Home

Samsung CLX-3175FW

1. TYPE SIZE DIMENSIONS WEIGHT CAPACITY Plain paper Letter 216 x 279 mm 8 5 x 11 inches 60 to 105 g m 16 to 28 Ib bond 150 sheets of 75 g m Legal 216 x 356 mm 8 5 x 14 inches oat ena Pennoni US Folio 216 x 330 mm 8 5 x 13 inches A4 210 x 297 mm 8 26 x 11 69 inches Oficio 216 x 343 mm 8 5 x 13 5 inches JIS B5 182 x 257 mm 7 16 x 10 11 inches ISO B5 176 x 250 mm 6 93 x 9 84 inches Executive 184 x 267 mm 7 25 x 10 5 inches Statement 140 x 216 mm 5 5 x 8 5 inches A5 148 x 210 mm 5 82 x 8 26 inches A6 105 x 148 mm 4 13 x 5 82 inches Envelope Envelope Monarch 98 x 191 mm 3 87 x 7 5 inches 75 to 90 g m 20 to 24 Ib bond 5 sheet for manual feeding in Envelope 6 3 4 92 x 165 mm 3 62 x 6 5 inches nen Envelope No 10 105 x 241 mm 4 12 x 9 5 inches Envelope No 9 98 x 225 mm 3 87 x 8 87 inches Envelope DL 110 x 220 mm 4 33 x 8 66 inches Envelope C5 162 x 229 mm 6 37 x 9 01 inches Envelope C6 114 x 162 mm 4 48 x 6 38 inches Thick paper Refer to the Plain Refer to the Plain paper section 90 to 105 g m 24 to 28 Ib bond 5 sheet for manual feeding in paper section the tray Thin paper Refer to the Plain Refer to the Plain paper section 60 to 70 g m 16 to19 Ib bond paper section Labels Letter A4 Refer to the Plain paper section 120 to 150 g m 37 to 40 Ib bond Card stock Post card 101 6 x 152 4 mm 4 x 6 inches 105 to 163 g m 28 to 43 Ib bond Tra
2. A Long Edge A Short Edge NOTE Do not print on both sides of labels transparencies envelopes or thick paper Paper jamming and damage to the printer may result 1 To change the print settings from your software application access printer properties Printing a Document on page 12 2 From the Layout tab select the paper orientation 3 From the Double sided Printing section select the binding option you want 4 Click the Paper tab and select the paper source size and type 5 Click OK and print the document NOTE f your printer does not have a duplex unit you should complete the printing job manually The printer prints every other page of the document first After printing the first side of your job the Printing Tip window appears Follow the on screen instructions to complete the printing job 19 t l C l Advanced Printing Printing a Reduced or Enlarged Document You can change the size of a page s content to appear larger or smaller on the printed page 1 To change the print settings from your software application access printer properties See Printing a Document on page 12 2 From the Paper tab select Reduce Enlarge in the Printing Type drop down list 3 Enter the scaling rate in the Percentage input box You can also click the w or 4 button 4 Select the paper source size and type in Paper Opt
3. 5 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode 64 You cannot adjust the copy size using the Reduce Enlarge menu while making a clone copy Erasing background images You can set the machine to print an image without its background This copy feature removes the background color and can be helpful when copying an original containing color in the background such as a newspaper or a catalog 1 Press Copy 2 Press Menu until Copy Feature appears on the bottom line of the display and press OK 3 Press the left right arrow until Adjust Bkgd appears and press OK 4 Press the left right arrow until the binding option you want appears e Off Does not use this feature e Auto Optimizes the background e Enhance Lev 1 2 The higher the number is the more vivid the background is e Erase Lev 1 4 The higher the number is the lighter the background is 5 Press OK to begin copying 6 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Gray enhance copying When you copy the original in gray scale use this feature for the better quality of copy output This feature is only for the copy in gray scale 1 Press Copy 2 Press Menu until Copy Feature appears on the bottom line of the display and press OK Press the left right arrow until Gray Enhance appears and press OK Press the left right arrow to select On Press OK to begin copying Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Oa Pw 46 Copying SETTING COPY
4. Holding both handles on the toner cartridge thoroughly rock it from side to side to evenly distribute the toner L If toner gets on your clothing wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash it in cold water Hot water sets toner into fabric 4 Slide four toner cartridges back into the machine 5 Close the front cover Make sure the cover is securely latched N If the front cover is not completely closed the machine will not operate REPLACING THE TONER CARTRIDGE The machine uses four colors and has a different toner cartridge for each one yellow Y magenta M cyan C and black K e The status LED and the toner related message on the display indicates which each individual toner cartridge should be replaced At this stage the toner cartridge needs to be replaced Check the type of toner cartridge for your machine See on page 65 1 Turn the machine off then wait a few minutes for the machine to cool 2 Using the handle completely open the front cover 3 Grasp the handles on the toner cartridge and pull to remove the cartridge from the machine 4 Take a new toner cartridge out of its package C A e Don t use sharp objects such as a knife or scissors to open the toner cartridge package You could damage the surface of the toner cartridge 5 Holding both handles on the toner cartridge thoroughly rock it from side to side to evenly distribute the toner 6 Place the tone
5. 26 If you are a Windows user from the Start menu select Programs or All Programs your printer driver name gt Smart Panel NOTES e If you have already installed more than one Samsung printer first select the printer model you want in order to use the corresponding Smart Panel Right click in Windows or Linux or click in Mac OS X the Smart Panel icon and select your printer name The Smart Panel window and its contents shown in this Software User s Guide may differ depending on the printer or Operating System in use The Smart Panel program displays the current status of the printer the level of toner remaining in the toner cartridge s and various other information You can also change settings Read Z Gay amp Buy Now Ciloubteshooting Guide vn z s zip riner Setting Ce Driver Setting Toner Level You can view the level of toner remaining in the toner cartridge s The printer and the number of toner cartridge s shown in the above window may differ depending on the printer in use Any printers do not have this feature Buy Now You can order replacement toner cartridge s online Troubleshooting Guide You can view Help to solve problems Printer Setting You can configure various printer settings in the Printer Settings Utility window Any printers do not have this feature NOTE If your machine is connected a network the SyncThru Web Service window a
6. NI o Place Front Side and Press Start appears on the display 4 Press Color Start or Black Start Your machine begins scanning the front side and shows Place Back Side and Press Start 35 _Copying 5 Turn the original over and place it on the scanner glass where arrows indicate as shown Then close the scanner lid 6 Press Color Start to begin color copying Or press Black Start to begin black and white copying L e Ifyou don t press the Color Start or Black Start button only the front side will be copied e Ifthe original is larger than the printable area some portions may not be printed e Ifyou press Stop Clear or if no buttons are pressed for approximately 30 seconds the machine cancels the copy job and returns to ready mode USING SPECIAL COPY FEATURES You can use the following copy features 2 up or 4 up copying Your machine can print 2 or 4 original images reduced to fit onto one sheet of paper 1 i 1 Press Menu IN NN 2 Press OK when Copy Menu appears MUTA HA a 3 Press OK when Copy Feature appears 4 Press the left right arrow until Layout appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until 2 Up or 4 Up appears and press OK 6 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode oi 14 You cannot adjust the copy size using the Reduce Enlarge menu for making a 2 or 4 up copy Poster cop
7. The following chart lists some conditions that may occur and the recommended solutions Follow the suggested solutions until the problem is corrected If the problem persists call for service Paper feeding Printing problems CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS Paper is jammed during printing Clear the paper jam See Tips for avoiding paper jams on page 72 Paper sticks together e Ensure there is not too much paper in the tray The tray can hold up to 150 sheets of paper depending on the thickness of your paper e Make sure that you are using the correct type of paper See Setting the paper size and type on page 43 e Remove paper from the tray and flex or fan the paper e Humid conditions may cause some paper to stick together Multiple sheets of paper do not feed Different types of paper may be stacked in the tray Load paper of only one type size and weight e f multiple sheets have caused a paper jam clear the paper jam See Tips for avoiding paper jams on page 72 Paper does not feed into the machine Remove any obstructions from inside the machine e Paper has not been loaded correctly Remove paper from the tray and reload it correctly e There is too much paper in the tray Remove excess paper from the tray e The paper is too thick Use only paper that meets the specifications required by the machine See Selecting print media on page 38 e If an ori
8. Turn over the stack of paper in the tray Also try rotating the paper 180 in the tray CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS AaBbCc Ensure that the paper is loaded properly Check the paper type and quality See Selecting print media on page 28 Turn over the stack of paper in the tray Also try rotating the paper 180 in the tray Character Voids Character voids are white areas within parts of characters that should be solid black If you are using transparencies try another type of transparency Because of the composition of transparencies some character voids are normal You may be printing on the wrong surface of the paper Remove the paper and turn it around The paper may not meet paper specifications See Selecting print media on page 28 Back of printouts are dirty AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc Check for leaking toner Clean the inside of the machine See Cleaning the inside on page 45 Horizontal stripes If horizontally aligned black streaks or smears appear The toner cartridge may be installed improperly Remove the cartridge and reinsert it The toner cartridge may be defective Remove the toner cartridge and install a new one See Replacing the toner Solid Color or Black pages The toner cartridge may not be installed properly Remove the cartridge and reinsert it The toner cartridge may be defective and need replacing Remove
9. Fax RCV Report JunkFax Report Network Info User Auth List Maintenance CLR Empty Msg Supplies Life Color Serial Number 21 Introduction Scan Setup Change Default USB Default E mail Default System Setup Machine Setup Machine ID Machine Fax No Date amp Time Clock Mode Language Default Mode Power Save Timeout Altitude Adj Auto Continue Import Setting Export Setting Paper Setup Paper Size Paper Type Sound Volume Key Sound Alarm Sound Speaker Ringer SUPPLIED SOFTWARE After you have set up your machine and connected it to your computer you must install the printer software If you are a Windows or Macintosh OS install the software from the supplied CD and if you are a Linux OS user download the software from the Samsung website www samsung com printer and install Os CONTENTS Windows e Printer driver Use this driver to take full advantage of your printer s features Scanner driver TWAIN and Windows Image Acquisition WIA drivers are available for scanning documents on your machine Smart Panel This program allows you to monitor the machine s status and alerts you when an error occurs during printing e SmarThru This is the accompanying Windows based software for your multifunctional machine SetIP Use this program to set your machine s TCP IP addresses Linux e Printer driver Use this driver to run your machine from a Linux computer and
10. Load the correct paper in the tray Troubleshooting_ 56 SOLVING OTHER PROBLEMS The following chart lists some conditions that may occur and the recommended solutions Follow the suggested solutions until the problem is corrected If the problem persists call for service Paper feeding Printing problems CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS Paper is jammed during printing Clear the paper jam See Tips for avoiding paper jams on page 52 Paper sticks together Ensure there is not too much paper in the tray The tray can hold up to 150 sheets of paper depending on the thickness of your paper Make sure that you are using the correct type of paper See Setting the paper size and type on page 33 Remove paper from the tray and flex or fan the paper Humid conditions may cause some paper to stick together Multiple sheets of paper do not feed Different types of paper may be stacked in the tray Load paper of only one type size and weight If multiple sheets have caused a paper jam clear the paper jam See Tips for avoiding paper jams on page 52 Paper does not feed into the machine Remove any obstructions from inside the machine Paper has not been loaded correctly Remove paper from the tray and reload it correctly There is too much paper in the tray Remove excess paper from the tray The paper is too thick Use only paper that meets the specifications
11. This setting may not be available depending on your country If you cannot reach this option your machine does not support this feature You can set the dial mode for your machine to either tone dialling or pulse dialling If you have a public telephone system or a private branch exchnage PBX system you may need to select Pulse Contact your local telephone company if you are not sure which dial mode to use If you select Pulse some phone system features might not be available It can also take longer to dial a fax or phone number Receiving options OPTION DESCRIPTION Receive Mode You can select the default fax receiving mode For details on receiving faxes in each mode see Changing receiving modes on page 55 Ring to Answer You can specify the number of times the machine rings before answering an incoming call Stamp Rev This option allows the machine to automatically Name print the page number and the date and time of reception at the bottom of each page of a received fax Rev Start Code This code allows you to initiate fax reception from an extension phone plugged into the EXT socket on the back of the machine If you pick up the extension phone and hear fax tones enter the code It is preset to 9 at the factory OPTION DESCRIPTION Redial Times You can specify the number of redial attempts If you enter 0 the machine will not redial Redial Term Your machine ca
12. b Region A Albania Austria Belgium Bosnia Bulgaria Croatia Cyprus Czech Republic Denmark Finland France Germany Greece Hungary Italy Macedonia Netherlands Norway Poland Portugal romania Serbia Slovakia Slovenia Spain Sweden Switzerland UK c Image counts based on one color on each in full color yan Magenta Yellow Black 0 reduced by Mh e If you print documents e life of this item will be A When purchasing new print cartridges or other supplies these must be purchased in the same country where the machine was purchased Otherwise print cartridges or other supplies will be incompatible with your machine as configurations of print cartridges and other supplies vary depending on the specific country e How to purchase HOW TO PURCHASE To order Samsung authorized supplies or accessories contact your local Samsung dealer or the retailer where you purchased your machine or visit www samsung com supplies and select your country region to obtain information on calling for technical support Ordering supplies_ 87 specifications This chapter guides you about this machine s specifications such as various features This chapter include e General specifications e Printer specifications e Scanner specifications GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS Z The symbol optional feature depending on machines ITEM DESCRIPTION ADF Capacity Up to 15 sheets 75 g m 20 Ib bond ADF
13. off and on If the problem persists call for service Cycle Power occurred in the LSU off and on If the problem Laser Scanning Unit persists call for service Main Motor There is a problem in Open and then close the Locked the main motor front cover Network Error There is a problem with the network Contact your network administrator COMM Error The machine has a communication problem Ask the sender to try again Connection Error Connection with the SMTP server failed Check the server settings and the network cable Data Read Fail Check USB Mem Time expired while reading data Try again Data Write Fail Check USB Mem Storing to the USB memory failed Check the available USB memory space Deve Home Sensor Error There is a problem in the fuser unit Turn the power switch off and on If the problem persists call for service NonSAMSUNG Toner v The toner cartridge which the arrow indicates is not a Samsung genuine cartridge Press OK to toggle the message to Stop or Continue lt Stop gt You can select either Stop or Continue with the left right arrow If you select Stop by pressing OK on the control panel the machine stops printing If you select Continue the machine keeps printing but the quality cannot be guaranteed If you do not select any the machine will work as Stop is selected Replace the corresponding
14. recycle Bin DAEMON Tools ae e__ Double click this icon Microsoft Smatrhru 4 Outlook The SmarThru 4 window opens ul Make sure that your printer is selected Scan To Allows you to scan an image and save it to an application or folder email it or publish it on a web site eImage Allows you to edit an image you have saved as a graphic file and send it to a selected application or folder email it or publish it on a web site ePrint Allows you to print images you have saved You can print images in black and white or color mode if your machine supports it eFax Allows you to fax images or files you have saved on your computer This is available when your machine supports the fax feature 4 Click Scan To The Scan To menu bar appears on the SmarThru 4 window Scan To Image Print Fax D La Application E mail Folder OCR Web Settings p Scan To menu bar 0 GE 2 scan 8 Application NG Scan Settings 5 E gi Image Type True Color 24 bit x pa a i Te Resolution 300 dpi j e Adj ust the scan settings Scan Area Selection aj a Ie i Source Auto Select li i Scan Multiple Properties 2534 x 3113 pixels 22 57 MB Click to start scanning Scan To lets you use the following services eApplication Scanning an image and placing it in an image editor application
15. 3 Scanner glass 4 Scanner lid 4 Wipe the underside of the scanner lid and white sheet until it is clean and dry 5 Push the ADF sheet with any tool such as tweezers carefully SS Pa 6 Hold the edge of the ADF sheet and wipe both sides of the ADF sheet until it is clean and dry 66 Maintenance 7 Push the ADF sheet back into the machine smoothly 8 Close the scanner lid MAINTAINING THE CARTRIDGE Toner cartridge storage Toner cartridges contain components that are sensitive to light temperature and humidity Samsung suggests users follow the recommendations to ensure the optimum performance highest quality and longest life from your new Samsung toner cartridge Store this cartridge in the same environment as the printer it will be used in this should be in controlled office temperature and humidity conditions The toner cartridge should remain in its original unopened package until installation If original packaging is not available cover the top opening of the cartridge with paper and store in a dark cabinet Opening the cartridge package prior to use dramatically shortens its useful shelf and operating life Do not store on the floor If the toner cartridge is removed from the printer always store the cartridge Inside the protective bag from the original package e Correct side up in a horizontal position not standing on end Do not store consumables in Temperature g
16. Ensure that the paper is loaded properly Check the paper type and quality Both high temperature and humidity can cause paper curl See Selecting print media on page 38 Turn over the stack of paper in the tray Also try rotating the paper 180 in the tray CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS AaBbCc Ensure that the paper is loaded properly Check the paper type and quality See Selecting print media on page 38 Turn over the stack of paper in the tray Also try rotating the paper 180 in the tray Character Voids Character voids are white areas within parts of characters that should be solid black If you are using transparencies try another type of transparency Because of the composition of transparencies some character voids are normal You may be printing on the wrong surface of the paper Remove the paper and turn it around The paper may not meet paper specifications See Selecting print media on page 38 Back of printouts are dirty AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc Check for leaking toner Clean the inside of the machine See Cleaning the inside on page 64 Horizontal stripes If horizontally aligned black streaks or smears appear The toner cartridge may be installed improperly Remove the cartridge and reinsert it The toner cartridge may be defective Remove the toner cartridge and install a new one See Replacing the toner Solid Color
17. See the Rating label on the machine for the correct voltage frequency hertz and type of current for your machine Power consumption Average operating mode Less than 350 W e Ready mode Less than 80 W e Power Save mode Less than 15 W Noise Level e Ready mode Background noise level e Printing mode Less than 48 dBA e Copying mode Less than 50 dBA Boot up time Less than 35 seconds Operating Temperature 10 to 32 C 59 to 89 6 F environment Humidity 20 to 80 RH Display 16 characters x 2 lines Toner cartridge life Black Average continuous black cartridge yield 1 500 standard pages Shipped with 1 000 pages Starter toner cartridge Color Average continuous colored cartridge Yellow yield 1 000 standard pages Magenta Shipped with 700 pages Starter toner Cyan cartridge Imaging unit Approx 24 000 images yield Waste toner Approx 10 000 images container Memory 128 MB Non extendable 66 Specifications e Scanner specifications e Copier specifications ITEM DESCRIPTION External 415 x 360 x 311 mm dimension 16 3 x 14 2 x 12 2 inches WxDxH Weight 14 5 Kg 31 97 Ibs Including consumables Package e Paper 2 0 Kg 4 41 Ibs weight e Plastic 0 4 Kg 0 88 Ibs Fusing 180 C 356 F temperature a Sound Pressure Level ISO 7779 b Declared yield value in accordance with ISO IEC 19798 The number of pages
18. Unified Linux Driver is installed Please re logon your system for all the installation settings to take effect User Registration Do you want to register yourself as user of the printer MFP model you just installed Being registered you will gain access to various services X Yes want to be registered as user He 6o En The installation program has added the Unified Driver Configurator desktop icon and Samsung Unified Driver group to the system menu for your convenience If you have any difficulties consult the onscreen help that is available through your system menu or can otherwise be called from the driver package windows applications such as Unified Driver Configurator or I mage Manager NOTE Installing the driver in the text mode e If you do not use the graphical interface or have failed the driver installation you have to use the driver in the text mode e Follow the step 1 to 3 then type root localhost Linux install sh than follow the instruction on the terminal screen Then the installation completes e When you wan to uninstall the driver follow the installation instruction above but type root localhost Linux uninstall sh on the terminal screen Using Your Printer in Linux 29 Uninstalling the Unified Linux Driver 1 When the Administrator Login window appears type in root in the Login field and enter the system password NOTE You must log in as a s
19. Use the following options to set the basic paper handling specifications when you access the printer properties See Printing a Document on page 12 for more information on accessing printer properties Click the Paper tab to access various paper properties RIK Layout Paper Graphic Extras About Paper Orientation sl Portrait s C Landscape T Rotate 180 Degrees Layout Options Layout Type Multiple Pages per Side x Pages per Side 1 Bi all AS E 210 x 297 mm Double sided Printing Manual mm f inch None Copies 1 Long Edge Quality Normal P C Short Edge Favorites Printer Default X ELECTRONICS a nah Paper Orientation Paper Orientation allows you to select the direction in which information is printed on a page e Portrait prints across the width of the page letter style Landscape prints across the length of the page spreadsheet style Rotate 180 Degrees allows you to rotate the page 180 degrees A Landscape Dt A Portrait Layout Options Layout Options allows you to select advanced printing options You can choose Multiple Pages per Side and Poster Printing e For details see Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet of Paper N Up Printing on page 17 For details see Printing Posters on page 18 For details see Printing Booklets on page 18 Double sided P
20. 1 Selecta stable location Select a level stable place with adequate space for air circulation Allow extra space to open covers and trays The area should be well ventilated and away from direct sunlight or sources of heat cold and humidity Do not set the machine close to the edge of your desk or table 100 mmj dp t5 3 9 inches 3 9 inches 482 6 mm 18 8 inches Printing is suitable for altitudes under 1 000 m 3 281 ft Refer to the altitude setting to optimize your printing See Altitude adjustment on page 27 for more information Place the machine on a flat stable surface so that there is no incline greater than 2 mm 0 08 inch Otherwise printing quality may be affected 2mm4 83 2 Unpack the machine and check all the enclosed items 23 Getting started e Installing the software e Machine s basic settings Remove the tape holding the machine tightly Load paper Make sure that all the cables are connected to the machine Turn the machine on DpH When you move the machine do not tilt or turn it upside down Otherwise the inside of the machine may be contaminated by toner which can cause damage to the machine or bad print quality This equipment will be inoperable when mains power fails SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS Before you begin ensure that your system meets the following requirements Windows Your machine supports
21. 1284 B refers to a specific connector type on the end of the parallel cable that attaches to the peripheral for example a printer 92 Glossary Intranet A private network that uses Internet Protocols network connectivity and possibly the public telecommunication system to securely share part of an organization s information or operations with its employees Sometimes the term refers only to the most visible service the internal website IP address An Internet Protocol IP address is a unique number that devices use in order to identify and communicate with each other on a network utilizing the Internet Protocol standard IPM The Images Per Minute IPM is a way of measuring the speed of a printer An IPM rate indicates the number of single sided sheets a printer can complete within one minute IPP The Internet Printing Protocol IPP defines a standard protocol for printing as well as managing print jobs media size resolution and so forth IPP can be used locally or over the Internet to hundreds of printers and also supports access control authentication and encryption making it a much more capable and secure printing solution than older ones IPX SPX IPX SPX stands for Internet Packet Exchange Sequenced Packet Exchange It is a networking protocol used by the Novell NetWare operating systems IPX and SPX both provide connection services similar to TCP IP with the IPX protocol having similarities to IP and
22. 25 and Gilbert 100 Plain Paper Normal plain paper Select this type if your printer is monochrome and printing on the 16 Ib 60 g m cotton paper Recycled Paper 20 Ib to 24 Ib 75 90 g m recycled paper Color Paper 20 Ib to 24 Ib 75 90 g m color backgrounded paper Archive Paper If you need to keep print out for a long period time such as archives select this option Scaling Printing Scaling Printing allows you to automatically or manually scale your print job on a page You can choose from None Reduce Enlarge and Fit to Page e For details see Printing a Reduced or Enlarged Document on page 19 For details see Fitting Your Document to a Selected Paper Size on page 19 Graphics Tab Use the following Graphic options to adjust the print quality for your specific printing needs See Printing a Document on page 12 for more information on accessing printer properties Click the Graphic tab to display the properties shown below RIK Layout Paper Graphic Extras About Quality C Best CC S Normal s C Draft Color Mode Color j C Grayscale n Copies Setting FT T Manual A4 corset 210 x 297 mm mm C inch D Goer Matching Copies 1 Quality Normal Favorites Printer Default nd Advanced Options DT Quality The Quality options you can select may vary depending on your printer model The higher the sett
23. For the best print quality position margins no closer than 15 mm from the edges of the envelope Avoid printing over the area where the envelope s seams meet MODE SIZE SOURCE Copy mode Letter A4 Legal tray 1 Oficio US Folio Executive JIS B5 A5 A6 Print mode All sizes supported by tray 1 the machine Fax mode Letter A4 Legal tray 1 Guidelines for special print media MEDIA TYPE GUIDELINES Envelopes e Successful printing on envelopes depends upon the quality of the envelopes When selecting envelopes consider the following factors Weight The weight of the envelope paper should not exceed 90 g m or jamming may occur Construction Prior to printing envelopes should lie flat with less than 6 mm curl and should not contain air Condition Envelopes should not be wrinkled nicked or otherwise damaged Temperature You should use envelopes that are compatible with the heat and pressure of the machine during operation Use only well constructed envelopes with sharp and well creased folds Do not use stamped envelopes Do not use envelopes with clasps snaps windows coated lining self adhesive seals or other synthetic materials Do not use damaged or poorly made envelopes Be sure the seam at both ends of the envelope extends all the way to the corner of the envelope o eo B Labels To avoid damaging the machine use only labels designed for use in laser machine
24. Paper Jam 2 Paper has jammed In Clear the jam See In Check Inside the fuser area or the paper exit area on around the toner cartridge page 74 Refilled Toner v The toner cartridge you have installed is not genuine or refilled The arrow indicates which color toner cartridge The print quality may get poor if the refilled toner cartridge is installed since its characteristics may significantly differ from the genuine We recommend Samsung genuine color toner cartridge Replace Toner This message Replace the toner vy appears between cartridge with a new one Toner Empty and See Replacing the Toner Low status toner cartridge on page 68 Replace The life of the part Replace the part with a xxx expires totally new one Call for service Replace The life of the part See Checking xxx Soon expires soon replaceables on page 71 and call for service attempts NonSAMSUNG The toner cartridge You can select either Toner which the arrow Stop or Continue with v indicates is not a the left right arrow Samsung genuine If you select Stop by cartridge pressing OK on the Press OK to toggle control panel the the message to Stop machine stops printing or Continue If you select Continue lt Stop gt the machine keeps printing but the quality cannot be guaranteed If you do not select any the machine will work as Stop is selected Replace the corresponding toner car
25. Press the left right arrow until Forward appears and press OK Press OK when Fax appears Press the left right arrow until Rev Forward appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until Forward appears and press OK To set the machine to print out a fax when fax forwarding has been completed select Forward amp Print 7 Enter the number of the fax machine to which faxes are to be sent and press OK Enter the starting time and press OK 9 Enter the ending time and press OK 10 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Subsequent received faxes will be forwarded to the specified fax machine oa Po bad Forwarding received faxes to email address You can set your machine to forward incoming faxes to the email address you entered 1 Press Fax 2 Press Menu until Fax Feature appears on the bottom line of the display and press OK DAA Press the left right arrow until Forward appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until E mail appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until Rev Forward appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until Forward appears and press OK To set the machine to print out a fax when fax forwarding has been completed select Forward amp Print ON Enter your email address and press OK Enter the email address to which faxes are to be sent and press OK 9 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Subsequent sent faxes will be forwarded to the specified email ad
26. Samsung suggests users follow the recommendations to ensure the optimum performance highest quality and longest life from your new Samsung toner cartridge Store this cartridge in the same environment as the printer it will be used in this should be in controlled office temperature and humidity conditions The toner cartridge should remain in its original unopened package until installation If original packaging is not available cover the top opening of the cartridge with paper and store in a dark cabinet Opening the cartridge package prior to use dramatically shortens its useful shelf and operating life Do not store on the floor If the toner cartridge is removed from the printer always store the cartridge Inside the protective bag from the original package e Correct side up in a horizontal position not standing on end Do not store consumables in Temperature greater than 40 C 104 F Humidity range less than 20 and not greater than 80 An environment with extreme changes in humidity or temperature Direct sunlight or room light Dusty places Acar for a long period of time An environment where corrosive gases are present An environment with salty air Handling instructions e Do not touch the surface of the photosensitive drum in the cartridge e Donot expose the cartridge to unnecessary vibrations or shock e Never manually rotate the drum especially in the reverse direction this can cause i
27. air conditioner or ventilation duct Do not allow anything to rest on the power Do not locate your machine where the cords will be abused by persons walking on them Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords This can diminish performance and may result in the risk of fire or electric shock Do not allow pets to chew on the AC power telephone or PC interface cords Never push objects of any kind into the machine through case or cabinet openings They may touch dangerous voltage points 12 creating a risk of fire or shock Never spill liquid of any kind onto or into the machine To reduce the risk of electric shock do not disassemble the machine Take it to a qualified service technician when repair work is required Opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltages or other risks Incorrect reassembly could cause electric shock when the unit is subsequently used Safety information_6 13 Unplug the machine from the telephone jack PC and AC wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions e When any part of the power cord plug or connecting cable is damaged or frayed e If liquid has been spilled into the machine e f the machine has been exposed to rain or water e If the machine does not operate properly after instructions have been followed e Ifthe machine has been dropped or the cabinet appears damaged e Ifthe machine exhibits a sudden and distinct change in
28. appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until ID appears and press OK Enter the first few letters of the name you want and press OK Press the left right arrow until the name you want appears and press OK Printing Address Book You can check your Address Book settings by printing a list 1 Press Address Book until Print appears on the bottom line of the display 2 Press OK 3 Press the left right arrow until the option you want appears and press OK 4 Press OK when Yes appears to confirm printing The selected information prints out 50 Scanning basic printing This chapter explains common printing tasks This chapter includes e Printing a document PRINTING A DOCUMENT Your machine allows you to print from various Windows Macintosh or Linux applications The exact steps for printing a document may vary depending on the application you use For details about printing see Software section CANCELING A PRINT JOB If the print job is waiting in a print queue or print spooler such as the printer group in Windows delete the job as follows 1 Click the Windows Start menu 2 For Windows 2000 select Settings and then Printers For Windows XP 2003 select Printers and Faxes For Windows Vista 2008 select Control Panel 5 Hardware and Sound 5 Printers For Windows 7 select Control Panel 5 Hardware and Sound 5 Devices and Printers For Windows Server 2008 R2 select Control Panel 5 Hardw
29. e TWAIN TWAIN is the one of preset imaging applications Scanning an image launches the selected application enabling you to control the scanning process See Software section This feature can be used via the local connection or the network connection See Software section e Samsung SmarThru 4 This feature is the accompanying software for your machine You can use this program to scan images or documents and this feature can be used via the local connection or the network connection See Software section e WIA WIA stands for Windows Images Acquisition To use this feature your computer must be connected directly to the machine with a USB cable See Software section e Changing the settings for scan job e Changing the default scan settings SCANNING FROM THE CONTROL PANEL Your machine offers you to scan from the control panel and easily send the scanned document to connected computer s My Documents folder In order to use this function your machine and computer must be connect by USB cable or by network Also with the offered Samsung Scan Manager program scanned documents can be opened with the program you have setup previously Such as Microsoft Paint Email SmarThru 4 OCR can be added to application program See Setting scan information in Samsung Scan Manager on page 37 Scanned images can be saved as BMP JPEG TIFF PDF files Setting scan information in Samsung Scan Manager You can find out about Samsung Sc
30. gt 4 Features of your new laser product safety information IMPORTANT SAFETY SYMBOLS AND PRECAUTIONS What the icons and signs in this user s guide mean Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in severe personal injury or death WARNING Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in minor personal injury or property damage CAUTION To reduce the risk of fire explosion electric shock or personal injury when using your laser MFP follow these basic safety precautions CAUTION Do NOT attempt Do NOT disassemble Do NOT touch Follow directions explicitly Unplug the power plug from the wall socket Make sure the MFP is grounded to prevent electric shock DISDA Call the service center for help These warning signs are here to prevent injury to you and others Follow them explicitly After reading this section keep it in a safe place for future reference 1 2 3 4 6 amp amp oa a 2 ON gt Read and understand all instructions Use common sense whenever operating electrical appliances Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the machine and in the literature accompanying the machine If an operating instruction appears to conflict with safety information heed the safety information You may have misunderstood the operating instruction If you cannot resolve the conflict contact your sales or service representative for a
31. install Linux 28 N n up printing Macintosh 41 Windows 17 O orientation print 33 Windows 14 overlay create 21 delete 21 print 21 P Paper properties set 14 paper size set 14 print 33 paper source set 33 Windows 14 paper type set 43 print 33 poster print 18 print document 12 fit to page 19 from Macintosh 40 from Windows 12 N up Macintosh 41 Windows 17 overlay 21 poster 20 PRN 13 scaling 19 watermark 20 print resolution 33 printer driver install Linux 28 printer properties Linux 33 printer properties set Macintosh 40 Windows 13 printer resolution set Windows 15 printer software install Macintosh 37 Windows 4 uninstall Macintosh 37 Windows 11 printing booklets 18 double sided 19 from Linux 33 R resolution printing 33 S scanning Linux 34 SmarThru 23 TWAIN 25 WIA driver 25 scanning from Macintosh 42 setting darkness 15 favorites 16 image mode 15 resolution Windows 15 toner save 15 true type option 15 software install Macintosh 37 Windows 4 reinstall Windows 10 system requirements Macintosh 37 uninstall Macintosh 37 Windows 11 status monitor use 26 7 toner save set 15 TWAIN scan 25 U uninstall software Macintosh 37 Windows 11 uninstalling MFP driver Linux 29 W watermark create 20 delete 20 edit 20 print 20 WIA scan 25 44
32. print 65 ringer 38 S scanner glass cleaning 68 loading documents 39 scanning default setting change 51 to email 50 USB flash memory 63 secure receiving mode 58 sending a fax automatically 55 sounds set 37 speaker sound 38 speaker volume 38 special copy features 47 speed dial numbers set 60 supplies checking life 73 T Tel mode receiving mode 57 96 Index tray adjusting the width and length 43 U USB flash memory data backup 64 managing 64 printing 63 scanning 63 using SetIP 27 V volume adjust ringer 38 speaker 38 W Windows problems 86 contact samsung worldwide If you have any comments or questions regarding Samsung products contact the Samsung customer care center COUNTRY REG CUSTOMER CARE COUNTRY REG CUSTOMER CARE ION CENTER WEBSITE ARGENTINE 0800 333 3733 www samsung com ar AUSTRALIA 1300 362 603 www samsung com au AUSTRIA 0810 SAMSUNG 7267864 www samsung com at 0 07 min BELARUS 810 800 500 55 500 www samsung ua www samsung com ua_ru BELGIUM 02 201 2418 www samsung com be Dutch www samsung com be_fr French BRAZIL 0800 124 421 www samsung com br 4004 0000 CANADA 1 800 SAMSUNG www samsung com ca 726 7864 CHILE 800 SAMSUNG 726 7864 www samsung com cl CHINA 400 810 5858 www samsung com cn 010 6475 1880 COLO
33. successfully If possible attach the cable and the machine to another computer and try a print job that you know works Finally try a new printer cable The wrong printer driver was selected Check the application s printer selection menu to ensure that your machine is selected The software application is malfunctioning Try printing a job from another application The operating system is malfunctioning Exit Windows and reboot the computer Turn the machine off and then back on again Pages print but are blank The toner cartridge is defective or out of toner Redistribute the toner if necessary See Redistributing toner on page 47 If necessary replace the toner cartridge The file may have blank pages Check the file to ensure that it does not contain blank pages Some parts such as the controller or the board may be defective Contact a service representative Before printing the machine emits vapor near the output tray Using damp paper can cause vapor during printing This is not a problem Just keep printing Printing quality problems If the inside of the machine is dirty or paper has been loaded improperly you may notice a reduction in print quality See the table below to clear the problem CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS Light or faded print AabbCc AaBbCc AabbCc AaBbCc AabbCc on th
34. such as Paint or Adobe Photoshop eE mail Scanning an image and emailing it Allows you to scan an image preview it and email it Scanning 24 NOTE To send an image by e mail you must have a mail client program like Outlook Express which has been set up with your e mail account eFolder Scanning an image and saving it to a folder Allows you to scan an image preview it and save it to the folder of your choice OCR Scanning an image and performing text recognition Allows you to scan an image preview it and send it to the OCR program for text recognition Recommended Scan Option for OCR Resolution 200 or 300 dpi Image Type Grayscale or Black amp White eWeb Scanning an image previewing it and publishing it on a web site using the specified file format for the image you want to publish e Settings Customizing settings of Scan To basic functions Allows you to customize settings for Application E mail OCR and Web functions 5 Click the service icon according to your job 6 SmarThru 4 opens for the selected service Adjust the scan settings 7 To start scanning click Scan NOTE If you want to cancel the scan job click Cancel Using Onscreen Help File For more information about SmarThru click at the top right corner of the window The SmarThru Help window opens and allows you to view onscreen help supplied on the SmarThru program Scanning Process with
35. transmission result and number of pages sent This report can be set to print after each job or only after failed transmissions TIFF Tagged Image File Format TIFF is a variable resolution bitmapped image format TIFF describes image data that typically come from scanners TIFF images make use of tags keywords defining the characteristics of the image that is included in the file This flexible and platform independent format can be used for pictures that have been made by various image processing applications Toner Cartridge A kind of bottle within a machine like printer which contains toner Toner is a powder used in laser printers and photocopiers which forms the text and images on the printed paper Toner can be melted by the heat of the fuser causing it to bind to the fibers in the paper TWAIN An industry standard for scanners and software By using a TWAIN compliant scanner with a TWAIN compliant program a scan can be initiated from within the program an image capture API for Microsoft Windows and Apple Macintosh operating systems UNC Path Uniform Naming Convention UNC is a standard way to access network shares in Window NT and other Microsoft products The format of a UNC path is lt servername gt lt sharename gt lt Additional directory gt URL Uniform Resource Locator URL is the global address of documents and resources on the Internet The first part of the address indicates what protocol to use
36. 13 Printer Settings magaan AA PAA a Amaia An 13 Layout Tabi Ga DRA ahh ALAN NN 14 Paper AA AA AA AA AE A ouaa 14 Graphics Tab NAAN NN NANG LATAG I RA ABG EDNA AA GNG 15 Extras Taba ANAN ANGARA ABRA Nha 16 ADOUT TAD AA AA AA APA 16 Using a Favorite Setting aa APAN DINAANAN BANA AG ANN BA AA ARA 16 Using Help sistestncecaiaer enean en OA NAE ea pabisiotarasnhs asters painaetecaanbitigke cagaldaptenannbenwndei stanton 16 Chapter 3 ADVANCED PRINTING Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet of Paper N Up Printing asasasasaa ee eee eee tenet eee 17 data fe Ade AA AAP dict 18 Printing BOOKICES aa paa BANAAG ANNA NAA PBA AKA AT AA AA 18 Printing oh Both Sides of Paper aaa ALALA NA DAN NI SERATE EEEa REEERE 19 Printing a Reduced or Enlarged Document 222 2 2sasa nanana nb ANG tt NAN GA KAG ANAN GRAN NN NN eee 19 Fitting Your Document to a Selected Paper Size 01 ene nent eed 19 Using Waterers anan ANNA NAGANA AARAL ADAN AA 20 Using an Existing Watermark 2 202 ma asana an kG GG GANANG NGA KANAN AN BANANA ANGER EK NE NENENG NGA NANa nanan eee 20 Creating a Watermark 222 2 0a nanan an eee Ee tenet eaten 20 Editingia Watermark xa KAANAK AA AA AN GA uae E EA 20 Deleting a Watermark 1 0 0 0 AA AA AA Eee need 20 USING Overlay S oreeson ena AA tienes EREE RERE E DEDE 21 What isan OVER ay nanana DA BAAL ANN PG ERRE EEE 21 Creating a New Page Overlay 0 net ne nanana 21 Using a Page Overlay
37. 41 using SetIP 26 V volume adjust ringer 28 W Windows problems 62 Index 72 contact samsung worldwide If you have any comments or questions regarding Samsung products contact the Samsung customer care center COUNTRY REG CUSTOMER CARE COUNTRY REG CUSTOMER CARE ION CENTER WEBSITE ARGENTINE 0800 333 3733 www samsung com ar AUSTRALIA 1300 362 603 www samsung com au AUSTRIA 0810 SAMSUNG 7267864 www samsung com at 0 07 min BELARUS 810 800 500 55 500 www samsung ua www samsung com ua_ru BELGIUM 02 201 2418 www samsung com be Dutch www samsung com be_fr French BRAZIL 0800 124 421 www samsung com br 4004 0000 CANADA 1 800 SAMSUNG www samsung com ca 726 7864 CHILE 800 SAMSUNG 726 7864 www samsung com cl CHINA 400 810 5858 www samsung com cn 010 6475 1880 COLOMBIA 01 8000112112 www samsung com co COSTA RICA 0 800 507 7267 www samsung com latin CZECH 800 SAMSUNG www samsung com cz REPUBLIC 800 726786 Samsung Zrt esk organiza n slo ka Oasis Florenc Sokolovsk 394 17 180 00 Praha 8 DENMARK 8 SAMSUNG 7267864 www samsung com dk ECUADOR 1 800 10 7267 www samsung com latin EL SALVADOR 800 6225 www samsung com latin ESTONIA 800 7267 www samsung com ee KAZAKHSTAN 8 10 800 500 55 500 www samsung com kz_ru KYRGYZSTAN 00 800 500 55 500 FINLAND 30 62
38. 5 8 When you have finished press the left right arrow to select No at the Another No prompt and press OK 9 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode oO PON gt Using group dial numbers To use a group dial entry you need to search for and select it from memory When you are prompted to enter a fax number while sending a fax press Address Book See below Searching Address Book for an entry There are two ways to search for a number in memory You can either scan from A to Z sequentially or you can search by entering the first letters of the name associated with the number Searching sequentially through the memory 1 If necessary press Fax 2 Press Address Book until Search amp Dial appears on the bottom line of the display and press OK 3 Press the left right arrow until the number category you want appears and press OK 4 Press OK when All appears 5 Press the left right arrow until the name and number you want appears You can search upwards or downwards through the entire memory in alphabetical order Searching with a particular first letter 1 If necessary press Fax 2 Press Address Book until Search amp Dial appears on the bottom line of the display and press OK 3 Press the left right arrow until the number category you want appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until ID appears and press OK 5 Enter the first few letters of the name you want and press OK gt 6
39. 9 graphics with 128 MB memory to enable the Aero theme e DVD R W Drive Windows Pentium IV 1 GHz x86 or 512 MB 10 GB Server 2008 1 4GHz x64 2048 MB R2 processors 2GHz or faster L e Internet Explorer 6 0 or higher is the minimum requirement for all Windows operating systems e Users who have an administrator right can install the software e Windows Terminal Service is compatable with this machine CPU Pentium IV 2 4GHz IntelCore2 RAM 512 MB 1024 MB Free HDD space 1 GB 2GB NG e Itis necessary to claim swap partition of 300 MB or larger for working with large scanned images e The Linux scanner driver supports the optical resolution at maximum Getting started 24 SETTING UP THE NETWORK CLX 3175N ONLY You need to set up the network protocols on the machine to use it in the network environment You can set up the basic network settings through the machine s control panel Supported operating environments The following table shows the network environments supported by the machine ITEM REQUIREMENTS Network interface e Ethernet 10 100 Base TX Windows 2000 XP 2003 2008 Vista 7 Server 2008 R2 e Various Linux OS MAC OS 10 3 10 6 Network operating system TCP IP Standard TCP IP LPR IPP HTTP Bonjour DHCP BOOTP Network protocols 64 If you are in a non static IP address environment and need to setup a DHCP network protocol go to the http developer a
40. Add Printer s Print to file Make sure that your printer is selected all Number of copies i g lection 1 urrent Page O Pages 1 65535 Enter either a single page number or a single page range For example 5 12 Select your printer driver from the Name drop down list To take advantage of the printer features provided by your printer driver click Properties or Preferences in the application s Print window For details see Printer Settings on page 13 If you see Setup Printer or Options in your Print window click it instead Then click Properties on the next screen Click OK to close the printer properties window To start the print job click OK or Print in the Print window Printing to a file PRN You will sometimes need to save the print data as a file for your purpose To create a file 1 Check the Print to file box at the Print window 2 Print al General Select Printer E a z Add Printer Status Ready Location Comment Page Range al Number of copies 1 b3 O Pages 1 65535 ollate a J Enter either a single page number or a single page range For example 5 12 2 Select the folder and assign a name of the file and then click OK Basic Printing 13 Printer Settings You can use the printer properties window which allows you to access all of the printer options you need when u
41. CD ROM drive The CD ROM should automatically run and an installation window appears If the installation window does not appear click Start and then Run Type X Setup exe replacing X with the letter which represents your drive and click OK If you use Windows vista Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2 click Start All programs Accessories gt Run and type X Setup exe If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows vista Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2 click Run Setup exe in Install or run program field and click Continue in the User Account Control window 3 Click Next Select a language from the list below English X Cancel e If necessary select a language from the drop down list 7 4 Select Typical installation for a network printer Click Next Select Installation Type em Select type that you want and click Next button pr Typical installation for a local printer Install default components for a device that is directly connected to user s computer Typical installation for a C 9 network printer Install software for a device that is on network Custom installation You can select installation options This option is recommended for professional users C Wireless setup Configure wireless setting using USB cable 5 The list of printers available on the network appears Select the printer you want to install from the list and then clic
42. Debian 3 1 4 0 32 64bit OPERATING SYSTEM FREE HDD CPU RAM SPACE Windows Pentium Il 400 MHz 64 MB 600 MB 2000 Pentium Ill 933 MHz 128 MB Windows XP Pentium Ill 933 MHz 128 MB 1 5 GB Pentium IV 1 GHz 256 MB Windows Pentium Ill 933 MHz 128 MB 1 25 GB to Server 2003 Pentium IV 1 GHz 512 MB 2GB Windows Pentium IV 1 GHz 512 MB 10 GB Server 2008 Pentium IV 2 GHz 2048 MB Windows Pentium IV 3 GHz 512 MB 15 GB Vista 1024 MB Windows 7 Pentium IV 1 GHz 32 bit 1 GB 16 GB or 64 bit processor or 2 GB higher Support for DirectX 9 graphics with 128 MB memory to enable the Aero theme e DVD R W Drive Windows Pentium IV 1 GHz x86 or 512 MB 10 GB Server 2008 1 4GHz x64 2048 MB R2 processors 2GHz or faster L e Internet Explorer 6 0 or higher is the minimum requirement for all Windows operating systems e Users who have an administrator right can install the software e Windows Terminal Service is compatable with this machine 24 Getting started CPU Pentium IV 2 4GHz IntelCore2 RAM 512 MB 1024 MB Free HDD space 1 GB 2GB NG e Itis necessary to claim swap partition of 300 MB or larger for working with large scanned images e The Linux scanner driver supports the optical resolution at maximum SETTING UP THE NETWORK You need to set up the network protocols on the machine printer to use it in the network environment If you use your machine in the wired network refer to Us
43. LAN to the Internet or a Corporate Intranet Most Infrastructure mode networks use a DHCP Server to automatically assign the IP address and set other network parameters If you know that you are connecting to an Infrastructure mode network with an access point you may proceed to the Wireless network setting in infrastructure mode part e Ad hoc mode An Ad hoc mode network provides peer to peer communication In an Ad hoc mode network wireless devices and computers communicate directly with each other without using an access point They can share files and machines but may not be able to access the Internet The machine receives print jobs from wireless computers directly If you know that you are connecting to an ad hoc mode network without an access point proceed to the Wireless network setting in Ad hoc mode part If you already used your printer click Start gt All Programs gt your printer name 5 Smart Panel Select Printer Setting in the Smart Panel window Select Network in the Printer Settings Utility window and select Wireless Network Setting Installing the printer on an Ad Hoc wireless network If you do not have a Access Point AP you may still connect the printer wirelessly to your computer by setting up an Ad Hoc wireless network by following these simple directions Locate the Printer Sotware installation CD ROM supplied with the printer Preparing items Ensure you have next items ready e Wireless network co
44. NEW ZEALAND 0800 SAMSUNG 0800 726 www samsung com nz 786 NICARAGUA 00 1800 5077267 www samsung com latin NORWAY 3 SAMSUNG 7267864 www samsung com no PANAMA 800 7267 www samsung com latin PHILIPPINES 1800 10 SAMSUNG www samsung com ph 726 7864 1 800 3 SAMSUNG 726 7864 1 800 8 SAMSUNG 726 7864 02 5805777 POLAND 0 801 1SAMSUNG www samsung com pl 172678 022 607 93 33 PORTUGAL 80820 SAMSUNG www samsung com pt 726 7864 PUERTO RICO 1 800 682 3180 www samsung com latin REP DOMINICA 1 800 751 2676 www samsung com latin EIRE 0818 717 100 www samsung com ie Contact SAMSUNG worldwide_ 97 COUNTRY REG CUSTOMER CARE WEB SITE ION CENTER RUSSIA 8 800 555 55 55 www samsung ru SINGAPORE 1800 SAMSUNG www samsung com sg 726 7864 SLOVAKIA 0800 SAMSUNG www samsung com sk 726 7864 SOUTH AFRICA 0860 SAMSUNG www samsung com za 726 7864 SPAIN 902 1 SAMSUNG 902 172 www samsung com es 678 SWEDEN 0771 726 7864 www samsung com se SAMSUNG SWITZERLAND 0848 SAMSUNG 7267864 www samsung com ch CHF 0 08 min TADJIKISTAN 8 10 800 500 55 500 TAIWAN 0800 329 999 www samsung com tw THAILAND 1800 29 3232 www samsung com th 02 689 3232 TRINIDAD amp 1 800 SAMSUNG www samsung com latin TOBAGO 726 7864 TURKEY 444 77 11 www samsung com tr U A E 800 SAMSUNG 726 7864 www samsung com ae 8000 4726 U K 0845 SAMS
45. Press the left right arrow until Darkness appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until the darkness you want appears and press OK Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Printing sent fax report automatically You can set the machine to print a report with detailed information about the previous 50 communication operations including time and dates 1 2 3 4 5 Press Fax Press Menu until Fax Setup appears on the bottom line of the display and press OK Press the left right arrow until Auto Report appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until On appears and press OK Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode 58 Faxing Setting up Address Book You can set up Address Book with the fax numbers you use most frequently Your machine provides you with the following features for setting up Address Book e Speed Group dial numbers 64 Before beginning to store fax numbers make sure that your machine is in Fax mode Speed dial numbers You can store up to 240 frequently used fax numbers in speed dial numbers Registering a speed dial number 1 Press Fax 2 Press Address Book until New amp Edit appears on the bottom line of the display and press OK 3 Press OK when Speed Dial appears 4 Enter a speed dial number between 0 and 239 and press OK If an entry is already stored in the number you choose the display shows the name to allow you to change it To start over with another spee
46. Press the left right arrow until the name you want appears and press OK Deleting a Address Book entry You can delete entries in Address Book one by one 1 Press Address Book until Delete appears on the bottom line of the display and press OK 2 Press the left right arrow until the number category you want appears and press OK 3 Press the left right arrow until the searching method you want appears and press OK Select Search All to search for an entry by scanning through all entries in Address Book Select Search ID to search for an entry by the first few letters of the name 4 Press the left right arrow until the name you want appears and press OK Or enter the first letters and press OK Press the left right arrow until the name you want appears and press OK 5 Press OK 6 Press OK when Yes appears to confirm the deletion 7 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Printing Address Book 1 You can check your Address Book settings by printing a list 1 Press Address Book until Print appears on the bottom line of the display 2 Press OK A list showing your speed button settings and speed dial and group dial entries prints out Faxing_ 59 Using USB memory cevice This chapter explains how to use a USB memory device with your machine This chapter includes About USB memory Plugging in a USB memory device Scanning to a USB memory device Printing from a USB memory device ABOUT USB MEMORY USB m
47. Printer Specifications in your Printer User s Guide e You can check your printer name in the supplied CD ROM e The maximum resolution that can be achieved depends upon various factors including computer speed available disk space memory the size of the image being scanned and bit depth settings Thus depending on your system and what you are scanning you may not be able to scan at certain resolutions especially using enhanced dpi Scanning 23 Scanning Using Samsung SmarThru Samsung SmarThru is the accompanying software for your machine With SmarThru scanning is the proverbial piece of cake Uninstalling Samsung SmarThru NOTE Before beginning uninstallation ensure that all applications are closed on your computer From the Start menu select Programs Select SmarThru 4 and then select Uninstall SmarThru 4 3 When your computer asks you to confirm click OK 4 Click Finish You may be prompted to restart your computer In this case you must shut the computer down and then restart it before the changes will be saved Using Samsung SmarThru Follow these steps to start scanning using the SmarThru 1 Make sure that your machine and computer are turned on and properly connected to each other 2 Place your photograph or page on the document glass or ADF 3 Once you have installed Samsung SmarThru you will see the SmarThru 4 icon on your desktop Double click the SmarThru 4 icon
48. Remove the wired network cable form your printer PC Connecting Error The configured network address is unable to connect between your computer and printer For DHCP network environment The print receives the IP address automatically DHCP when computer is configured DHCP e For Static network environment The printer uses the static address when computer is configured static address If computer is configured IP address as 192 168 1 100 Subnet address as 255 255 255 0 and Gateway address as 192 168 1 1 input IP address as 192 168 1 101 Subnet address as 255 255 255 0 and Gateway address as 192 168 1 1 on your printer USING A WIRELESS NETWORK CLX 3175FW ONLY This wireless setting procedure is mainly for Macintosh users However Windows users can also use this procedure too but it is recommended to use the easier procedure See Using a wireless network Windows CLX 3175FW only on page 27 You must set up the network protocols on your machine to use it on your network This chapter will show you how this is easily accomplished Before starting please locate the crossover network cable and the Printer Software Installation CD ROM provided with your machine printer You may need to contact a network administrator or the person who has set up your wireless network for information regarding the configuration If you are already aware of your machine s IP address configuration and this IP address is available y
49. Selected port Port type USB Device Port is unused a Exit e Refresh Renews the available ports list e Release port Releases the selected port Sharing Ports Between Printers and Scanners Your machine may be connected to a host computer via the parallel port or USB port Since the MFP device contains more than one device printer and scanner it is necessary to organize proper access of consumer applications to these devices via the single I O port The Samsung Unified Linux Driver package provides an appropriate port sharing mechanism that is used by Samsung printer and scanner drivers The drivers address their devices via so called MFP ports The current status of any MFP port can be viewed via the Ports Configuration The port sharing prevents you from accessing one functional block of the MFP device while another block is in use When you install a new MFP device onto your system it is strongly recommended you do this with the assistance of an Unified Driver Configurator In this case you will be asked to choose I O port for the new device This choice will provide the most suitable configuration for MFP s functionality For MFP scanners O ports are being chosen by scanner drivers automatically so proper settings are applied by default Using Your Printer in Linux 32 Configuring Printer Properties Using the properties window provided by the Printers configuration yo
50. Service Web based printer management solution for network administrators SyncThru Web Admin Service provides you with an efficient way of managing network devices and lets you remotely monitor and troubleshoot network machines from any site with corporate internet access Download this program from http solution samsungprinter com SyncThru Web Service Web server embedded on your network print server which allows you to A Configure the network parameters Windows XP Macintosh OS necessary for the machine to connect to various network environments Open Control Panel Open System B Customize machine settings e Double click Security Preferences Center e Click Sharing Click Windows Firewall Click the Firewall menu Restoring factory default settings e Disable the firewall e Turn firewall off You can restore factory default settings to the machine by using SyncThru 3 From the Windows Start menu select All Programs 5 Samsung Network Printer Utilities gt SetIP gt SetIP 4 Click on the gy icon third from left in the Set P window to open the TCP IP configuration window 5 Enter the machine s new information into the configuration window as follows e MAC Address Find the machine s MAC address from the Network Configuration Report and enter it without the colons For example 00 15 99 29 51 A8 becomes 0015992951A8 MAC address is a hardware serial number of the machine s network interface and c
51. Setting copy timeout Scanning basics Scanning from the control panel Setting scan information in Samsung Scan Manager Scanning to application programs Changing the settings for scan job Changing the default scan settings Printing a document Canceling a print job About USB memory Plugging in a USB memory device Scanning to a USB memory device Scanning Customizing Scan to USB Printing from a USB memory device To print a document from a USB memory device Backing up data Backing up data Restoring data Managing USB memory Deleting an image file Formatting a USB memory device Viewing the USB memory status Printing directly from a digital camera Printing reports Printing a report Adjusting the color contrast Clearing memory Cleaning your machine Cleaning the outside Cleaning the inside Cleaning the scan unit Maintaining the cartridge Toner cartridge storage Handling instructions Use of non Samsung and refilled toner cartridge Estimated cartridge life Redistributing toner Replacing the toner cartridge Replacing the imaging unit Replacing the waste toner container Maintenance parts Checking replaceables Managing your machine from the website Contents 16 contents 17_Contents TROUBLESHOOTING ORDERING SUPPLIES SPECIFICATIONS GLOSSARY INDEX 51 51 52 52 52 52 53 57 57 57 58 61 61 62 62 64 65 65 To access SyncThru Web Service Checking the machine s serial number Tips fo
52. Stop or Continue or Black Only lt Stop gt If the black NG toner cartridge is empty Black Only message does not appear You can select the option among Stop Continue or Black Only with the left right arrow If you select Stop by pressing OK on the control panel the machine stops printing If you select Continue the machine keeps printing but the quality cannot be guaranteed If you select Black Only the machine prints the data in black In this case the mono printing feature is preset in the printer properties When you copy the Black Start button will be activated only with this condition If you do not select any the machine will work as Stop is selected Replace the toner cartridge for the best print quality when this message appears Using a cartridge beyond this stage can result in printing quality issues See Replacing the toner cartridge on page 68 Toner Exhausted A toner cartridge has Replace the toner h reached its estimated cartridge See cartridge life The Replacing the toner printer stops printing cartridge on page 68 Toner Low Small amount of toner Prepare a new cartridge y is left in the cartridge for replacement You The estimated cartridge life of toner is close may temporarily increase the printing quality by redistributing the toner See Redistributing toner on page 67 78 _Troubleshooting SOLVING OTHER PROBLEMS
53. TIMEOUT You can set the time the machine waits before it restores the default copy settings if you do not start copying after changing them on the control panel 1 Press Menu until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the display and press OK 2 Press OK when Machine Setup appears 3 Press the left right arrow until Timeout appears and press OK 4 Press the left right arrow until the time setting you want appears Selecting Off means that the machine does not restore the default settings until you press Black Start or Color Start to begin copying or Stop Clear to cancel Press OK to save your selection 6 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode scanning Scanning with your machine lets you turn pictures and text into digital files that can be stored on your computer This chapter includes Scanning basics Scanning from the control panel Scanning by a network connection Z The maximum resolution that can be achieved depends upon various factors including computer speed available disk space memory the size of the image being scanned and bit depth settings Thus depending on your system and what you are scanning you may not be able to scan at certain resolutions especially using enhanced resolution SCANNING BASICS You can scan the originals with your machine via an USB cable or the network e Samsung Scan Manager You just walk to the machine with the originals and scan them from th
54. TWAIN enabled Software If you want to scan documents using other software you will need to use TWAIN compliant software such as Adobe Photoshop The first time you scan with your machine select it as your TWAIN source in the application you use The basic scanning process involves a number of steps 1 Make sure that your machine and computer are turned on and properly connected to each other 2 Place a single document face down on the document glass OR load the document s face up into the ADF or DADF 3 Open an application such as Photoshop 4 Open the TWAIN window and set the scan options 5 Scan and save your scanned image NOTE You need to follow the program s instructions for acquiring an image Please refer to the user s guide of the application Scanning Using the WIA Driver Your machine also supports the Windows Image Acquisition WIA driver for scanning images WIA is one of the standard components provided by Microsoft Windows XP and works with digital cameras and scanners Unlike the TWAIN driver the WIA driver allows you to scan and easily manipulate images without using additional software NOTE The WIA driver works only on Windows XP Vista 7 with USB port Windows XP 1 Place a single document face down on the document glass OR load the document s face up into the ADF or DADF 2 From the Start menu on your desktop window select Settings Control Panel and then Scanne
55. Troubleshooting_ 62 CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS Some color images come out in unexpected color This is a known bug in Ghostscript until GNU Ghostscript version 7 xx when the base color space of the document is indexed RGB color space and it is converted through CIE color space Because Postscript uses CIE color space for Color Matching System you should upgrade Ghostscript on your system to at least GNU Ghostscript version 8 xx or later You can find recent Ghostscript versions at www ghostscript com CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS The machine does not print whole pages and its output is half page printed It is a known problem that occurs when a color printer is used on version 8 51 or earlier of Ghostscript 64 bit Linux OS and reported to bugs ghostscript com as Ghostscript Bug 688252 The problem is solved in AFPL Ghostscript v 8 52 or above Download the latest version of AFPL Ghostscript from http sourceforge net projects ghostscript and install it to solve this problem cannot scan via Gimp Front end e Check if Gimp Front end has Xsane Device dialog on the Acquire menu If not you should install Xsane plug in for Gimp on the your computer You can find Xsane plug in package for Gimp on Linux distribution CD or Gimp home page For the detail information refer to the Help for Linux distribution CD or Gimp Front end application If you wish to use other kind of
56. Wireless network printer your machine USB cable Creating the infrastructure network in Windows When items are ready follow the next procedure 1 2 3 4 Connect the USB cable provided with your machine Turn on your computer access point and printer Put the provided Printer Software CD ROM into your CD ROM drive The CD ROM starts automatically and the welcome message shows on the window Select a language from the drop down list and click Next Select Wireless Setup and click Next 28 Getting started 6 The software searches the wireless network devices J If the searching has failed you may check if the USB cable is connected between the computer and printer properly and follow the instruction on the window 7 After searching the window shows the wireless network devices Select the name SSID of access point you are using and click Next L When you set the wireless configuration manually click Advanced Setting e Network Name Type the SSID of wireless computer the SSID is case sensitive e Operation Mode Select Infrastructure e Authentication Select an authentication type Open System Authentication is not used and encryption may or may not be used depending on the need for data security Shared Key Authentication is used A device that has a proper WEP key which can access the network WPA Personal or WPA2 Personal Select this option to authenticate the print server based
57. Your setting is added to the Saved Settings drop down list To save a Job Type setting for the next scan job 1 Select the setting you want to use from the J ob Type drop down list 2 The next time you open the Scanner Properties window the saved setting is automatically selected for the scan job To delete a Job Type setting 1 Select the setting you want to delete from the Job Type drop down list 2 Click Delete The setting is deleted from the list 35 Using Your Printer in Linux Using the Image Manager The Image Manager application provides you with menu commands and tools to edit your scanned image amp coon Biana sasarean Use these tools to edit the image You can use the following tools to edit the image Tools Function B ave wo Saves the image Cancels your last action pov D Q o Restores the action you canceled Allows you to scroll through the image Crops the selected image area Zoom Out 0p fal ES Zooms the image out Ei Zooms the image in Zoom In Allows you to scale the image size you can ie enter the size manually or set the rate to Scale scale proportionally vertically or horizontally Allows you to rotate the image you can iasa select the number of degrees from the drop sak down list e Allows you to flip the image vertically or Flip 4 horizontally Tools Functi
58. allowed to gain control over the device The other consumer will encounter device busy response You should open ports configuration and select the port assigned to your printer In the Selected port pane you can see if the port is occupied by some other application If this is the case you should wait for completion of the current job or should press Release port button if you are sure that the present owner is not functioning properly e Check if your application has special print option such as oraw If oraw is specified in the command line parameter then remove it to print properly For Gimp front end select print gt Setup printer and edit command line parameter in the command item e The CUPS Common Unix Printing System version distributed with SuSE Linux 9 2 cups 1 1 21 has a problem with ipp Internet Printing Protocol printing Use the socket printing instead of ipp or install later version of CUPS cups 1 1 22 or higher Some color images come out all black This is a known bug in Ghostscript until GNU Ghostscript version 7 05 when the base color space of the document is indexed color space and it is converted through CIE color space Because Postscript uses CIE color space for Color Matching System you should upgrade Ghostscript on your system to at least GNU Ghostscript version 7 06 or later You can find recent Ghostscript versions at www ghostscript com
59. and press OK Press the left right arrow until the image mode you want appears and press OK e Text Use for originals containing mostly text e Text Photo Use for originals with mixed text and photographs e Photo Use when the originals are photographs Magazine Use when the originals are magazines 6 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode go PON Reduced or enlarged copy You can reduce or enlarge the size of a copied image from 25 to 400 when you copy original documents from the scanner glass To select from the predefined copy sizes 1 Press Menu 2 Press OK when Copy Menu appears 3 Press OK when Copy Feature appears 4 Press the left right arrow until Reduce Enlarge appears and press OK 5 Press the left right arrow until the size setting you want appears and press OK To scale the copy by directly entering the scale rate 1 Press Menu 2 Press OK when Copy Menu appears 3 Press OK when Copy Feature appears 4 Press the left right arrow until Reduce Enlarge appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until Custom appears and press OK Press the left right arrow to enter the copy size you want Pressing and holding the button allows you to quickly scroll to the number you want 7 Press OK to save the selection 8 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode When you make a reduced copy black lines may appear at the bottom of your copy Dm CHANGING THE DEFAULT COPY SETTING
60. and the printer will stop printing until a new waste toner tank is placed into the machine Replace the waste toner bank with a new one See Replacing the waste toner container on page 50 Toner Empty y A toner cartridge has almost reached its estimated cartridge life Press OK to toggle the message to Stop or Continue or Black Only lt Stop gt If the black L toner cartridge is empty Black Only message does not appear You can select the option among Stop Continue or Black Only with the left right arrow If you select Stop by pressing OK on the control panel the machine stops printing If you select Continue the machine keeps printing but the quality cannot be guaranteed If you select Black Only the machine prints the data in black In this case the mono printing feature is preset in the printer properties When you copy the Black Start button will be activated only with this condition If you do not select any the machine will work as Stop is selected Replace the toner cartridge for the best print quality when this message appears Using a cartridge beyond this stage can result in printing quality issues See Replacing the toner cartridge on page 48 Scan Unit Open The scan unit is not securely latched Close the scan unit it locks into place Scanner locked The scanner module is locked Turn the power switch off and on If the problem persists
61. appear at the bottom of each page or on other pages with a small strip of text at the top You may have chosen the wrong paper settings in the user option setting For details about paper settings see Selecting print media on page 38 No dial tone sounds e Check that the phone line is connected properly e Check that the phone socket in the wall is working by plugging in another phone Common Windows problems CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS The numbers stored in memory do not dial correctly Make sure that the numbers are stored in memory correctly Print a Address Book list referring to page 59 File in Use message appears during installation Exit all software applications Remove all software from the StartUp Group then restart Windows Reinstall the printer driver The original does not feed into the machine e Make sure that the paper is not wrinkled and you are putting it in correctly Check that the original is the right size not too thick or thin e Make sure that the ADF is firmly closed The ADF rubber pad may need to be replaced Contact a service representative General Protection Fault Exception OE Spool32 or Illegal Operation messages appear Close all other applications reboot Windows and try printing again Faxes are not received automatically e The receiving mode should be set to Fax e Make sure that the
62. automatically detects the device and reads data stored on it Press the left right arrow until the folder or file you want appears and press OK If you see D in the front of a folder name there are one or more files or folders in the selected folder If you selected a file skip to the next step If you selected a folder press the left right arrow until the file you want appears Press the left right arrow to select the number of copies to be printed or enter the number Press OK Color Start or Black Start to start printing the selected file There are two types of mode as following e OKor Color Start Color print e Black Start Black and White print After printing the file the display asks if you want to print another job Press OK when Yes appears to print another job and repeat from step 2 Otherwise press the left right arrow to select No and press OK Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Using USB memory device 61 BACKING UP DATA Data in the machine s memory can be accidentally erased due to power failure or storage failure Backup helps you protect your Address Book entries and the system settings by storing them as backup files on a USB memory device Backing up data 1 Insert the USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine 2 Press Menu until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the display and press OK 3 Press OK when Machine Setup appears Press the left right arrow until
63. by USB cable or by network Also with the offered Samsung Scan Manager program scanned documents can be opened with the program you have setup previously Such as Microsoft Paint Email SmarThru 4 OCR can be added to application program See Setting scan information in Samsung Scan Manager on page 47 Scanned images can be saved as BMP JPEG TIFF PDF files Setting scan information in Samsung Scan Manager You can find out about Samsung Scan Manager program information and installed scan driver s condition Also you can change scan settings and add or delete the folders where scanned documents to computer are save in Samsung Scan Manager program Z Scan Manager program can only be used in the Window and Macintosh system If you use the Macintosh See Software section 1 Press Start gt Control Panel gt Samsung Scan Manager Samsung Scan Manager Administration appears L You can open Samsung Scan Manager by pressing the Smart Panel icon s right in the window task bar 2 Select the appropriate machine from the Samsung Scan Manager Press Properties 4 Set Scan Button allows you to change the saving destination and scan settings add or delete application program and format files You can change the scanning machine by using Change Port Local or Network 5 Press OK after setting is done o Scanning to application programs 1 Make sure that your machine and computer are turned on and properly connected to each ot
64. call for service Toner Exhausted A toner cartridge has Replace the toner vV reached its estimated cartridge See cartridge life The Replacing the toner printer stops printing cartridge on page 48 Toner Low Small amount of toner Prepare a new cartridge v is left in the cartridge for replacement You The estimated cartridge life of toner is close may temporarily increase the printing quality by redistributing the toner See Redistributing toner on page 47 Transfer Belt Error A problem has occurred in the transfer belt in the machine Turn the power switch off and on If the problem persists call for service Send Error There is a problem in Configure the AUTH SMTP authentication authentication setting Send Error There is a problem in Configure the DNS DNS DNS setting Send Error There is a problem in Configure the POP3 POP3 POP3 setting Send Error There is a problem in Change to the available SMTP SMTP server Send Error There is a problem on Configure your network Wrong Config the network interface card interface card correctly Tray Paper Empty There is no paper in the tray Load paper in the tray Stop Pressed Stop Clear has been pressed during an operation Try again Tray Paper Mismatch The paper size specified in the printer properties does not match the paper you are loading
65. can not find a connected device Check connection between your computer an and the printer Setup Completed On line Registration 3 i aga Please refer to the following connection method You het ent pisan a e Sa with exclusive tips 1 Connect the device to your computer 2 Tum on the power of the device Would you like to register for the Samsung Printer Membership 3 If New Hardware Wizard appears close it 4 Click Next T Yes I d like to register 4Back Cancel e After connecting the printer click Next e If you don t want to connect the printer at this time click Next and No on the following screen Then the installation will start and a test page will not be printed at the end of the installation 6 Installing Printer Software in Windows Installing Software for Network Printing When you connect your printer to a network you must first configure the TCP IP settings for the printer After you have assigned and verified the TCP IP settings you are ready to install the software on each computer on the network You can install the printer software using the typical or custom method Typical I nstallation This is recommended for most users All components necessary for printer operations will be installed 1 Make sure that the printer is connected to your network and powered on For details about connecting to the network see the supplied printer s User s Guide 2 Insert the supplied CD ROM into your
66. cancel the copy job during an operation Press Stop Clear and the copying will stop o CHANGING THE SETTINGS FOR EACH COPY Your machine provides default settings for copying so that you can quickly and easily make a copy However if you want to change the options for each copy use the copy function buttons on the control panel Z If you press Stop Clear while setting the copy options all of the options you have set for the current copy job will be canceled and returned to their default status Or they will automatically return to their default status after the machine completes the copy in progress Darkness If you have an original containing faint markings and dark images you can adjust the brightness to make a copy that is easier to read 1 Press Copy 2 Press Menu until Copy Feature appears on the bottom line of the display and press OK 3 Press the left right arrow until Darkness appears and press OK 4 Press the left right arrow until the contrast mode you want appears and press OK e Light Works well with dark print e Normal Works well with standard typed or printed originals e Dark Works well with light print 5 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode 44 _ Copying e Using special copy features e Setting copy timeout Original Type The original type setting is used to improve the copy quality by selecting the document type for the current copy job 1 Press Copy 2 Press Menu until Co
67. color of a single pixel in a bitmapped image Higher color depth gives a broader range of distinct colors As the number of bits increases the number of possible colors becomes impractically large for a color map 1 bit color is commonly called as monochrome or black and white BMP A bitmapped graphics format used internally by the Microsoft Windows graphics subsystem GDI and used commonly as a simple graphics file format on that platform BOOTP Bootstrap Protocol A network protocol used by a network client to obtain its IP address automatically This is usually done in the bootstrap process of computers or operating systems running on them The BOOTP servers assign the IP address from a pool of addresses to each client BOOTP enables diskless workstation computers to obtain an IP address prior to loading any advanced operating system CCD Charge Coupled Device CCD is a hardware which enables the scan job CCD Locking mechanism is also used to hold the CCD module to prevent any damage when you move the machine Collation Collation is a process of printing a multiple copy job in sets When collation is selected the device prints an entire set before printing additional copies Control Panel A control panel is a flat typically vertical area where control or monitoring instruments are displayed They are typically found in front of the machine Coverage It is the printing term used for a toner usage measurement on
68. computing endpoints PS See PostScript PSTN The Public Switched Telephone Network PSTN is the network of the world s public circuit switched telephone networks which on industrial premises is usually routed through the switchboard Resolution The sharpness of an image measured in Dots Per Inch DPI The higher the dpi the greater the resolution SMB Server Message Block SMB is a network protocol mainly applied to share files printers serial ports and miscellaneous communications between nodes on a network It also provides an authenticated Inter process communication mechanism SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP is the standard for e mail transmissions across the Internet SMTP is a relatively simple text based protocol where one or more recipients of a message are specified and then the message text is transferred It is a client server protocol where the client transmits an email message to the server Glossary_ 93 Subnet Mask The subnet mask is used in conjunction with the network address to determine which part of the address is the network address and which part is the host address TCP IP The Transmission Control Protocol TCP and the Internet Protocol IP the set of communications protocols that implement the protocol stack on which the Internet and most commercial networks run TCR Transmission Confirmation Report TCR provides details of each transmission such as job status
69. control panel Canceling a print job Basic printing_ 40 Using USB memory cevice This chapter explains how to use a USB memory device with your machine This chapter includes About USB memory Plugging in a USB memory device Scanning to a USB memory device Printing from a USB memory device ABOUT USB MEMORY USB memory devices are available with a variety of memory capacities to give you more room for storing documents presentations downloaded music and videos high resolution photographs or whatever other files you want to store or move You can do the following on your machine using a USB memory device Scan documents and save them on a USB memory device Print data stored on a USB memory device Restore backup files to the machine s memory Format the USB memory device Check the available memory space PLUGGING IN A USB MEMORY DEVICE The USB memory port on the front of your machine is designed for USB V1 1 and USB V2 0 memory devices Your machine supports USB memory devices with FAT16 FAT32 and sector size of 512 bytes Check your USB memory device s file system from your dealer You must use only an authorized USB memory device with an A plug type connector 3 B OC X Use only a metal shielded USB memory device J 41 _Using USB memory device e Backing up data e Managing USB memory e Printing directly from a digital camera Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port o
70. down list Follow the instructions in the window and complete the installation N DAA Getting started 25 Starting the program 1 Connect your machine and the computer using crossover network cable 2 Temporarily disable the computer firewall before continuing by doing the following Windows XP Macintosh OS e Open Control Panel e Open System e Double click Security Preferences Center e Click Sharing e Click Windows Firewall e Click the Firewall menu e Disable the firewall e Turn firewall off 3 From the Windows Start menu select All Programs gt Samsung Network Printer Utilities gt SetIP gt SetIP 4 Click on the gy icon third from left in the Set P window to open the TCP IP configuration window 5 Enter the machine s new information into the configuration window as follows e MAC Address Find the machine s MAC address from the Network Configuration Report and enter it without the colons For example 00 15 99 29 51 A8 becomes 0015992951A8 MAC address is a hardware serial number of the machine s network interface and can be found in on the Network Configuration Report e IP Address Enter a new IP address for your printer the same as the computer s IP address except for the last number For example if your computer s IP address is 192 168 1 150 enter 192 168 1 X X is number between 1 and 254 other than the computer s address e Subnet Mask Enter this exactly the same as the compute
71. e Consult the dealer or experienced radio TV technician for help A Change or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to oper ate the equipment Canadian Radio Interference Regulations This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the interference causing equipment standard entitled Digital Apparatus ICES 003 of the Industry and Science Canada Cet appareil num rique respecte les limites de bruits radio lectriques applicables aux appareils num riques de Classe B prescrites dans la norme sur le mat riel brouilleur Appareils Num riques ICES 003 dict e par l Industrie et Sciences Canada UNITED STATES OF AMERICA Federal Communications Commission FCC Intentional emitter per FCC Part 15 Low power Radio LAN type devices radio frequency RF wireless communication devices operating in the 2 4 GHz 5 GHz Band may be present embedded in your printer system This section is only applicable if these devices are present Refer to the system label to verify the presence of wireless devices Wireless devices that may be in your system are only qualified for use in the United States of America if an FCC ID number is on the system label The FCC has set a general guideline of 20 cm 8 inches separation between the device and the body for use of a wireless device near the bo
72. either as a print out or onscreen Quick Install Guide Provides information on setting up your machine and this requires that you follow the instructions in the guide to prepare the machine Online User s Guide Provides you with step by step instructions for using your machine s full features and contains information for maintaining your machine troubleshooting and installing accessories lt lt This user s guide also contains a Software section to provide you with information on how to print documents with your machine in various operating systems and how to use the included software utilities Printer Driver Help Provides you with help information on printer driver properties and instructions for setting up the properties for printing To access a printer driver help screen click Help from the printer properties dialog box Samsung website If you have Internet access you can get help support printer drivers manuals and order information from the Samsung website www samsungprinter com Z Please visit www samsung com for open source information gt 4 Features of your new laser product safety information IMPORTANT SAFETY SYMBOLS AND PRECAUTIONS What the icons and signs in this user s guide mean Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in severe personal injury or death WARNING Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in minor personal injury or
73. existing paper and nothing will be discarded Junk Fax Setup This setting may not be available depending on your country Using this feature the system will not accept faxes sent from remote stations whose numbers are stored in the memory as junk fax numbers This feature is useful for blocking any unwanted faxes When you turn on this feature you can access the following options to set junk fax numbers Add Allows you to set up to 10 fax numbers e Delete Allows you to delete the desired junk fax number If you select Delete All Allows you to delete all junk fax numbers DRPD Mode This mode enables a user to use a single telephone line to answer several different telephone numbers In this menu you can set the machine to recognize which ring patterns to answer For details about this feature see Receiving faxes using DRPD mode on page 55 Changing the default document settings The fax options including resolution and darkness can be set to the most frequently used modes When you send a fax the default settings are used if they are not changed by using the corresponding button and menu i 2 3 P gt 8 Press Fax Press Menu until Fax Setup appears on the bottom line of the display and press OK Press the left right arrow until Change Default appears and press OK Press OK when Resolution appears Press the left right arrow until the resolution you want appears and press OK
74. illustrations on this user s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models The surface of the output tray may become hot if you print a large number of pages at once Make sure that you do not touch the surface and do not allow children near it Introduction_ 19 UNDERSTANDING THE STATUS LED The color of the Status LED indicates the machine s current status STATUS DESCRIPTION Off e The machine is powered off line The machine is in power save mode When data is received or any button is pressed it switches to on line automatically e Wireless function can not be used Green Blinking When the green LED slowly blinks the machine is receiving data from the computer e When the green LED rapidly brinks the machine is printing data On e The machine is powered on and can be used A minor error has occurred and the machine is waiting for the error to be cleared Check the display message and solve the problem referring to Understanding display messages on page 55 e Small amount of toner is left in the cartridge The estimated cartridge life of toner is close You can temporarily improve print quality by redistributing the toner See Replacing the toner cartridge on page 48 Red Blinking On e A problem has occurred such as a paper jam cover is open or no paper in the tray so that the machine cannot continue the job Check the message on the display and refe
75. imaging unit Close the front cover should the installation need to be halted for any reason 6 With a dry lint free cloth wipe away any dust and spilled toner from the toner cartridges area and their cavities A e If toner gets on your clothing wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash it in cold water Hot water sets toner into fabric e 1f your machine or its surrounding is contaminated with toner we recommend you to use a cloth or tissue dampened with water to clean it If you use a vacum cleaner toner blows into the air then might be harmful to you After cleaning let the machine to dry completely 7 Holding the groove on the front of the imaging unit push imaging unit in to the machine 8 Insert the waste toner container into position and then push it to make sure that it is firmly seated in place 10 Reinstall all the compartments into the machine and close the front cover N If the front cover is not completely closed the machine will not operate 11 Plug in the power cord and turn the machine on Maintenance 65 Cleaning the scan unit Keeping the scan unit clean helps ensure the best possible copies We suggest that you clean the scan unit at the start of each day and during the day as needed 1 Slightly dampen a soft lint free cloth or paper towel with water 2 Open the scanner lid 3 Wipe the surface of the scanner glass until it is clean and dry 1 White sheet 2 ADF Sheet
76. into your CD ROM drive The CD ROM should automatically run and an installation window appears If the installation window does not appear click Start and then Run Type X Setup exe replacing X with the letter which represents your drive and click OK If you use Windows vista Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2 click Start All programs Accessories gt Run and type X Setup exe If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows vista Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2 click Run Setup exe in Install or run program field and click Continue in the User Account Control window Click Next Select a language from the list below English v e If necessary select a language from the drop down list Installing Printer Software in Windows 4 Select Custom installation Click Next e The installation window that appears in this User s Guide may differ depending on the printer and interface in use Select Installation Type am Gad GP AHA you word and GEA Nadi baton 6 Select the components to be installed and click Next c Typical installation for a local printer Install default components for a device that is directly connected to user s computer Select components that you would like to install Typical installation fora 41 software for a device that is on network network printer Select components Select components that you would like to install You can
77. isisiyi inniinr nrar E rS PEN EE EER EE Rr EREE ER EE DID DNA 21 Deleting a Page Overlay 0 I EE IE Erneta tie 21 Chapter 4 SHARING THE PRINTER LOCALLY Setting Up a Host Computer 20 0 ante neat eed 22 Setting Up a Client Computer 2 2 2 0a sanan Ee CN NANANA eaten ed 22 Chapter 5 SCANNI NG Scanning Using Samsung SmarThruU 2 0 naaa aN GR GG GANAN AREA EN NN NEN AN AREA NANE ENGR RANA EEEE KN CR 0n Kana nena 23 Uninstalling Samsung SmarThrU u 1 30 cece ec ee cece eee ee ee eee ence eA EEDA EE EASES EASES EEE EEE EE ESSE EE EE EEE E ES 23 USING Samsung SmarThrU Uu 2 cece eee ee eee eee ee een EE EE EEE DEDEDE EE EE ESSE SEES OSES EE EE EE EE EE SESE EEE E ES 23 Using Onscreen Help File ccccececec eee e cence eee ee ee eee ee ee eee n SEEDS nE E BEEE ESSE EE EE Sa EEE EE EES 24 Scanning Process with TWAIN enabled Software 2 2asaawa nanana nanana nee ee eee eee er nnne 25 Scanning Using the WIA Driver sernir ree e NARE KK KAKANAN KN E a EE 25 WINDOWS XP aasa ihi stored slew shia nab Mart ban lee a a 25 Windows Vista sis scctidisiadatisdieiiiedeehiwesieddanetiat ER EE EEE A DERN E an a 25 WINdOWS T asa niae dhs ban NA hn a SiE AN NAAN DAN 25 Chapter 6 USING SMART PANEL Understanding Smart Panel ana sapa NPA Gm2 ns rane DAs anes bebe NA nen E EEE E AA Da ort 26 Opening the Troubleshooting Guide anuna awan an anan nn NN NEN rtrt EA NANANG NEN EN GAN ANKN ENCA CANG NG nanan nananana 27 Usin
78. margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission the following information 1 the date and time of transmission 2 identification of either business business entity or individual sending the message and 3 telephone number of either the sending machine business business entity or individual The Telephone Company may make changes in its communications facilities equipment operations or procedures where such action is reasonably required in the operation of its business and is not inconsistent with the rules and regulations in FCC Part 68 If such changes can be reasonably expected to render any customer terminal equipment incompatible with telephone company communications facilities or require modification or alteration of such terminal equipment or otherwise materially affect its use or performance the customer shall be given adequate notice in writing to allow the customer an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted service RINGER EQUIVALENCE NUMBER The Ringer Equivalence Number and FCC Registration Number for this machine may be found on the label located on the bottom or rear of the machine In some instances you may need to provide these numbers to the telephone company The Ringer Equivalence Number REN is a measure of the electrical load placed on the telephone line and is useful for determining whether you have overloaded the line Installing several types of equipment on the s
79. network select Network PC and press OK 14 If you see Not Available message check the port connection Z If you selected Network PC select your registered user ID and enter the PIN Press OK e ID is the same ID as the registered ID for Samsung Scan Manager e PIN is the 4 digit number registered for Samsung Scan Manager 6 From Scan Destination press the left right arrow until the application program you want appears then press OK Default setting is My Documents 69 To add or delete the folder where the scanned file is saved add or delete the application program in Samsung Scan Manager gt Set Scan Button 7 Press the left right button until the setting you want appears then press OK e Resolution Sets the image resolution Scan Color Sets the color mode e Scan Format Sets the file format in which the image is to be saved e Scan Size Sets the image size L e Scan Format appears only when you selected the Scan Destination to My Documents e Ifyou want to scan from the default setting press Color Start or Black Start 8 Scanning begins IZ e Scanned image is saved in computer s My Documents My Pictures gt Samsung folder e You can use Twain driver to scan quickly in Samsung Scan Manager program e You can also scan by pressing Window s Start gt Control Panel gt Samsung Scan Manager gt Quick Scan CHANGING THE SETTINGS FOR SCAN JOB Your machine provides you with the following setting options to allo
80. numbers using the destination s existing speed dial numbers Registering a group dial number 1 Press Fax 2 Press Address Book until New amp Edit appears on the bottom line of the display and press OK 3 Press the left right arrow until Group Dial appears and press OK Enter a group dial number between 0 and 199 and press OK 5 Enter the name you want and press OK A Enter a speed dial number and press OK Press OK when speed dial information appears correctly Press OK when Yes appears Repeat steps 5 and 6 to include other speed dial numbers into the group 10 When you have finished press the left right arrow to select No at the Another No prompt and press OK 11 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode CONS Editing a group dial number You can delete a specific entry from a group or add a new number to the selected group 1 Press Address Book until New amp Edit appears on the bottom line of the display and press OK Press the left right arrow until Group Dial appears and press OK Enter the group dial number you want to edit and press OK Enter the name you want to edit and press OK Enter the speed dial number you want to add or delete and press OK If you entered a new speed dial number Add appears If you enter a speed dial number stored in the group Delete appears Press OK to add or delete the number 7 Press OK when Yes appears to add or delete more numbers and repeat steps 4 and
81. of material resources Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchased this product or their local government office for details of where and how they can take these items for environmentally safe recycling Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and conditions of the purchase contract This product and its electronic accessories should not be mixed with other commercial wastes for disposal CORRECT DISPOSAL OF BATTERIES IN THIS PRODUCT bd Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate battery return systems This marking on the battery manual or packaging indicates that the batteries in this product should not be disposed with other household waste at the end of their working life Where marked the chemical symbols Hg Cd or Pb indicate that the battery contains mercury cadmium or lead above the reference levels in EC Directive 2006 66 If batteries are not properly disposed of these substances can cause harm to human health or the environment To protect natural resources and to promote material reuse please separate batteries from other types of waste and recycle them through your local free battery return system Safety information 8 RADIO FREQUENCY EMISSIONS FCC Information to the User This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions e This device may not cause harmful interferenc
82. on the printer in use A printer driver is software that lets your computer communicate with your printer The procedure to install drivers may differ depending on the operating system you are using All applications should be closed on your PC before beginning installation Installing Software for Local Printing A local printer is a printer directly attached to your computer using the printer cable supplied with your printer such as a USB or parallel cable If your printer is attached to a network skip this step and go to Installing Software for Network Printing on page 7 You can install the printer software using the typical or custom method NOTE If the New Hardware Wizard window appears during the installation procedure click 3t in the upper right corner of the box to close the window or click Cancel Typical I nstallation This is recommended for most users All components necessary for printer operations will be installed 4 1 Make sure that the printer is connected to your computer and powered on 2 Insert the supplied CD ROM into your CD ROM drive The CD ROM should automatically run and an installation window appears If the installation window does not appear click Start and then Run Type X Setup exe replacing X with the letter which represents your drive and click OK If you use Windows vista Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2 click Start All programs Accessorie
83. on your computer before beginning installation 3 Insert the Printer Software CD ROM into your CD ROM drive The CD ROM should automatically run and an installation window appears If the installation window does not appear click Start gt Run Type X Setup exe replacing X with the letter which represents your drive and click OK If you use Windows vista Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2 click Start gt All Programs gt Accessories gt Run and type X Setup exe If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows vista Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2 click Run Setup exe in Install or run program field and click Continue in the User Account Control window 4 Click Next N Select a language from the list below English ad e The window above may slightly differ if you are reinstalling the driver 5 Select Typical installation for a network printer and then click Next Select Installation Type Select type that you want and click Next button c Typical installation for a local printer Install default components for a device that is directly connected to user s computer i Install software for a device that is on network Wired or Wireless C Custom installation You can select installation options This option is recommended for professional users lt Back Next gt Cancel 6 The list of machines available on the network appears Select the printer you want to insta
84. or Black pages The toner cartridge may not be installed properly Remove the cartridge and reinsert it The toner cartridge may be defective and need replacing Remove the toner cartridge and install a new one See Replacing the toner cartridge on page 68 The machine may require repair Contact a service representative Aankh Ce cartridge on page 68 AAD anui e f the problem persists the machine may require repair Contact a service representative Curl If the printed paper is curled or paper does not AaBbCc AaBbCc esc feed into the machine Turn over the stack of paper in the tray Also try rotating the paper 180 in the tray Change the printer option and try again Go to printer properties click Paper tab and set type to Thin Paper Refer to the Software section for details An unknown image repetitively appears on a next few sheets or loose toner light print or contamination occurs Your printer is probably being used at an altitude of 1 000 m 3 281 ft or above The high altitude may affect the print quality such as loose toner or light imaging You can set this option through Printer Settings Utility or Printer tab in printer driver s properties See Altitude adjustment on page 35 Copying problems Loose toner AaBb Gc AaBbCc Clean the inside of the machine See Cleaning the inside on page 64 Check the paper type and quality S
85. or run program field and click Continue in the User Account Control window 8 Click Next Ej Select a language from the list below English e If necessary select a language from the drop down list Select Custom installation Click Next Select Installation Type em Select type that you want and click Next button Typical installation fora Install default components for a device that is directly connected to user s local printer computer c Typical installation for a network printer Install software for a device that is on network You can select installation options This option is recommended for professional users C Wireless setup Configure wireless setting using USB cable lt Back Cancel 5 The list of printers available on the network appears Select the printer you want to install from the list and then click Next Select Printer Port em Select a port that will be used for your printer Local or TCP IP Port Shared Printer UNC Add TCP IP Port Select a printer from the list below If you don t see your printer below click Update to refresh the list Printer Name IP Port Name NOTE If a firewall has been enabled on this PC this may be preventing the installer from Update detecting the printer Temporarily disable the firewall on this PC before continuing with the installation Set IP Address lt Back Cancel e If you do n
86. out the problem Faxes do not store in memory There may not be enough memory space to store the fax If the display shows the Memory Full message delete from memory any faxes you no longer need and then try again to store the fax 84 Troubleshooting L Refer to the Microsoft Windows documentation that came with your computer for further information on Windows error messages Common Linux problems CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS The machine does not print Check if the printer driver is installed in your system Open Unified Driver configurator and switch to the Printers tab in Printers configuration window to look at the list of available printers Make sure that your machine is displayed on the list If not invoke Add new printer wizard to set up your device e Check if the printer is started Open Printers configuration and select your machine on the printers list Look at the description in the Selected printer pane If its status contains stopped string press the Start button After that normal operation of the printer should be restored The stopped status might be activated when some problems in printing occurred For instance this could be an attempt to print document when port is claimed by a scanning application e Check if the port is not busy Since functional components of MFP printer and scanner share the same I O interface po
87. printing For example 5 coverage means that an A4 sided paper has about 5 image or text on it So if the paper or original has complicated images or lots of text on it the coverage will be higher and at the same time a toner usage will be as much as the coverage CSV Comma Separated Values CSV A type of file format CSV is used to exchange data between disparate applications The file format as it is used in Microsoft Excel has become a pseudo standard throughout the industry even among non Microsoft platforms DADF A Duplex Automatic Document Feeder DADF is a mechanism that will automatically feed and flip over an original sheet of paper so that the machine can scan on both sides of the paper Default The value or setting that is in effect when taking a printer out of its box state reset or initialized DHCP A Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP is a client server networking protocol A DHCP server provides configuration parameters specific to the DHCP client host requesting generally information required by the client host to participate on an IP network DHCP also provides a mechanism for allocation of IP addresses to client hosts DIMM Dual Inline Memory Module DIMM a small circuit board that holds memory DIMM stores all the data within the machine like printing data received fax data DNS The Domain Name Server DNS is a system that stores information associated with domain names in a di
88. process that are sometimes caused by telephone line noise Emulation Emulation is a technique of one machine obtaining the same results as another Glossary_ 91 An emulator duplicates the functions of one system with a different system so that the second system behaves like the first system Emulation focuses on exact reproduction of external behavior which is in contrast to simulation which concerns an abstract model of the system being simulated often considering its internal state Ethernet Ethernet is a frame based computer networking technology for local area networks LANs It defines wiring and signaling for the physical layer and frame formats and protocols for the media access control MAC data link layer of the OSI model Ethernet is mostly standardized as IEEE 802 3 It has become the most widespread LAN technology in use during the 1990s to the present EtherTalk A suite of protocols developed by Apple Computer for computer networking It was included in the original Macintosh 1984 and is now deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP IP networking FDI Foreign Device Interface FDI is a card installed inside the machine to allow a third party device such as a coin operated device or a card reader Those devices allow the pay for print service on your machine FTP A File Transfer Protocol FTP is a commonly used protocol for exchanging files over any network that supports the TCP IP protocol such as the In
89. property damage CAUTION To reduce the risk of fire explosion electric shock or personal injury when using your laser MFP follow these basic safety precautions CAUTION Do NOT attempt Do NOT disassemble Do NOT touch Follow directions explicitly Unplug the power plug from the wall socket Make sure the MFP is grounded to prevent electric shock DISDA Call the service center for help These warning signs are here to prevent injury to you and others Follow them explicitly After reading this section keep it in a safe place for future reference 1 2 3 4 6 amp amp oa a 2 ON gt Read and understand all instructions Use common sense whenever operating electrical appliances Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the machine and in the literature accompanying the machine If an operating instruction appears to conflict with safety information heed the safety information You may have misunderstood the operating instruction If you cannot resolve the conflict contact your sales or service representative for assistance Unplug the machine from the AC wall socket and or telephone jack before cleaning Do not use liquid or aerosol cleaners Use only a damp cloth for cleaning Do not place the machine on an unstable cart stand or table It may fall causing serious damage Your machine should never be placed on near or over a radiator heater
90. recognition of their conformity A full declaration defining the relevant Directives and referenced standards can be obtained from your Samsung Electronics Co Ltd representative EC Certification Certification to 1999 5 EC Radio Equipment amp Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive FAX This Samsung product has been self certified by Samsung for pan European single terminal connection to the analogue public switched telephone network PSTN in accordance with Directive 1999 5 EC The product has been designed to work with the national PSTNs and compatible PBXs of the European countries In the event of problems you should contact the Euro QA Lab of Samsung Electronics Co Ltd in the first instance The product has been tested against TBR21 To assist in the use and application of terminal equipment which complies with this standard the European Telecommunication Standards Institute ETSI has issued an advisory document EG 201 121 which contains notes and additional requirements to ensure network compatibility of TBR21 terminals The product has been designed against and is fully compliant with all of the relevant advisory notes contained in this document 11 Safety information European Radio Approval Information for products fitted with EU approved radio devices Low power Radio LAN type devices radio frequency RF wireless communication devices operating in the 2 4 GHz 5 GHz band may be present embedded in your
91. scan application refer to the Help for application encounter error Cannot open port device file when printing a document Avoid changing print job parameters via LPR GUI for example while a print job is in progress Known versions of CUPS server break the print job whenever print options are changed and then try to restart the job from the beginning Since Unified Linux Driver locks port while printing the abrupt termination of the driver keeps the port locked and therefore unavailable for subsequent print jobs If this situation occurred try to release the port The machine does not appear on the scanners list Check if your machine is attached to your computer Make sure that it is connected properly via the USB port and is turned on Check if the scanner driver for your machine is installed in your system Open Unified Driver configurator switch to Scanners configuration then press Drivers Make sure that driver with a name corresponding to your machine s name is listed in the window Check if the port is not busy Since functional components of MFP printer and scanner share the same O interface port the situation of simultaneous access of different consumer application to the same port is possible To avoid possible conflicts only one of them at a time is allowed to gain control over the device The other consumer will encounter device busy response This can usually happen
92. scanner 71 Glossary Index A adjustment altitude 28 alarm sound 28 background image adjust 37 C cleaning inside 45 outside 45 scan unit 46 control panel 20 copying 2 up 4 up 36 clone 37 darkness 35 default setting change 36 erasing background 37 ID card copy 36 original type 35 poster 36 time out set 37 D display language change 28 driver installation 27 E Erasing background special copy 37 l ID card special copy 36 ID copy 20 J jam tips for avoiding paper jams 52 K key sound 28 L LED Status 21 Linux problems 62 loading originals scanner glass 29 Maintenance maintenance parts 51 toner cartridge 47 memory clear 44 N network setting up 26 P paper changing the size 32 clearing jam 52 paper jam clear tray 1 52 paper type setting 34 power save mode 28 print quality problems solve 58 printing reports 44 USB memory 42 problem solve copying 61 Linux 62 Network Scan 62 paper feeding 57 printing quality 58 scanning 61 Windows 62 R replacing components toner cartridge 48 reports print 44 ringer 28 S scanner glass cleaning 46 loading documents 29 scanning default setting change 39 USB flash memory 41 sounds set 28 speaker sound 28 special copy features 36 supplies checking life 51 T tray adjusting the width and length 32 U USB flash memory data backup 42 managing 43 printing 42 scanning
93. select No at the Another Page prompt The machine returns to ready mode The display reminds you that you are in ready mode and that a delayed fax is set Adding pages to a delayed fax You can add pages to the delayed transmissions previously reserved in your machine s memory 1 Load the originals to be added and adjust document settings 2 Press Menu until Fax Feature appears on the bottom line of the display and press OK 54 Faxing 3 Press the left right arrow until Add Page appears and press OK 4 Press the left right arrow until the fax job you want appears and press OK When you have finished select No at the Another Page prompt The machine scans the original into memory and shows the total number of pages and the number of the added pages Canceling a delayed fax 1 Press Menu until Fax Feature appears on the bottom line of the display and press OK 2 Press the left right arrow until Cancel Job appears and press OK 3 Press the left right arrow until the fax job you want appears and press OK 4 Press OK when Yes appears The selected fax is deleted from memory Sending a priority fax Using the Priority Fax feature a high priority fax can be sent ahead of reserved operations The original is scanned into memory and immediately transmitted when the current operation is finished In addition priority transmission will interrupt a Multiple Send operation between stations i e when the transmission to stat
94. service representative The connection cable between the computer and the machine is not connected properly Disconnect the printer cable and reconnect it The connection cable between the computer and the machine is defective If possible attach the cable to another computer that is working properly and print a job You can also try using a different printer cable The port setting is incorrect Check the Windows printer setting to make sure that the print job is sent to the correct port If the computer has more than one port make sure that the machine is attached to the correct one The machine may be configured incorrectly Check the printer properties to ensure that all of the print settings are correct The printer driver may be incorrectly installed Repair the printer software See Software section The machine is malfunctioning Check the display message on the control panel to see if the machine is indicating a system error The document size is so big that the hard disk space of the computer is not enough to access the print job Get more hard disk space and print the document again Troubleshooting_ 79 CONDITION POSSIBLE CAUSE SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS POSSIBLE CONDITION CAUSE SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS The machine The paper source For many software selects print materials from the wrong paper source selection in the
95. switch off and on If the problem persists call for service Door Open The front cover or rear Close the cover until it cover is not securely locks into place latched Enter Again You entered an Enter the correct item unavailable item again File Format The selected file Use the correct file Not Supported format is not format supported Mail Exceeds Server Support The mail size is larger than the supported size by SMTP server Divide your mail or reduce the resolution Main Motor Locked There is a problem in the main motor Open and then close the front cover 76 Troubleshooting MESSAGE MEANING SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS Memory Full The memory is full Delete unnecessary fax jobs and retransmit after more memory becomes available Alternatively split the transmission into more than one operation SUGGESTED MESSAGE MEANING SOLUTIONS Paper Jam 0 Paper has jammed in Clear the jam See In Open Close Door the feeding area of the tray the tray 1 on page 73 Network Error There is a problem with the network Contact your network administrator No Answer The receiving fax machine has not answered after several redial Try again Make sure that the receiving machine is operational Paper Jam 1 Paper has jammed in Clear the jam See In Check Inside the paper exit area the fuser unit area on page 73
96. the following Windows operating systems REQUIREMENT RECOMMENDED Macintosh REQUIREMENT RECOMMENDED OPERATING SYSTEM FREE CPU RAM HDD SPACE Mac OS X e Intel Processor e 128 MB fora 1 GB 10 3 10 4 e Power PC G4 Power PC G5 based Mac 512 MB e 512 MB for an Intel based Mac 1 GB Mac OS X 10 5 Intel Processor 512 MB 1 GB 1 GB e 867 MHz or faster Power PC G4 G5 Mac OS X 10 6 Intel processors 1 GB 2 GB 1 GB Linux ITEM REQUIREMENTS Operating system RedHat 8 0 9 0 32bit RedHat Enterprise Linux WS 4 5 32 64bit Fedora Core 1 7 32 64bit Mandrake 9 2 32bit 10 0 10 1 32 64bit Mandriva 2005 2006 2007 32 64bit SuSE Linux 8 2 9 0 9 1 32bit SuSE Linux 9 2 9 3 10 0 10 1 10 2 32 64bit SuSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 9 10 32 64bit Ubuntu 6 06 6 10 7 04 32 64bit Debian 3 1 4 0 32 64bit OPERATING SYSTEM FREE HDD CPU RAM SPACE Windows Pentium Il 400 MHz 64 MB 600 MB 2000 Pentium Ill 933 MHz 128 MB Windows XP Pentium Ill 933 MHz 128 MB 1 5GB Pentium IV 1 GHz 256 MB Windows Pentium Ill 933 MHz 128 MB 1 25 GB to Server 2003 Pentium IV 1 GHz 512 MB 2GB Windows Pentium IV 1 GHz 512 MB 10 GB Server 2008 Pentium IV 2 GHz 2048 MB Windows Pentium IV 3 GHz 512 MB 15 GB Vista 1024 MB Windows 7 Pentium IV 1 GHz 32 bit 1 GB 16 GB or 64 bit processor or 2 GB higher Support for DirectX
97. the printer at this time click Cancel Printer Name IP Port Name Next and No on the following screen Then the installation will start and a test page will not be printed at the end of the installation NOTE I femal az been enabled on is PC ths maybe preventing the instaler fom Update The reinstallation window that appears in this User s bie tee emporarily disable the firewall on this iefore continuing with the Guide may differ depending on the printer and interface in use lt Back Cancel If you do not see your printer on the list click Update to 5 Select the components you want to reinstall and click A Next refresh the list or select Add TCP IP Port to add your 5 ka printer to the network To add the printer to the If you installed the printer software for local printing network enter the port name and the IP address for the and you select your printer driver name the window printer asking you to print a test page appears Do as follows To find a shared network printer UNC Path select a ki Ai a test page select the check box and click Shared Printer UNC and enter the shared name j exe manually or find a shared printer by clicking the Browse b If the test page prints out correctly click Yes button If it doesn t click No to reprint it You will see a component list so that you can reinstall any 6 When the reinstallation is done click Finish item individually
98. the second part specifies the IP address or the domain name where the resource is located USB Universal Serial Bus USB is a standard that was developed by the USB Implementers Forum Inc to connect computers and peripherals Unlike the parallel port USB is designed to concurrently connect a single computer USB port to multiple peripherals Watermark A watermark is a recognizable image or pattern in paper that appears lighter when viewed by transmitted light Watermarks were first introduced in Bologna Italy in 1282 they have been used by papermakers to identify their product and also on postage stamps currency and other government documents to discourage counterfeiting WIA Windows Imaging Architecture WIA is an imaging architecture that is originally introduced in Windows Me and Windows XP A scan can be initiated from within these operating systems by using a WIA compliant scanner 94 Glossary Index A Address Book group dial numbers 60 speed dial numbers 60 Address Book use 51 ADF 20 ADF load 39 adjustment altitude 37 alarm sound 38 Ans Fax mode receiving mode 57 background image adjust 48 C characters enter 38 cleaning inside 66 outside 66 scan unit 68 clock mode 37 control panel 21 copying 2 up 4 up 47 clone 48 darkness 46 default setting change 47 erasing background 48 ID card copy 47 original type 46 poster 47 time out set 48 D date and time set 37 defa
99. the toner cartridge and install a new one See Replacing the toner cartridge on page 48 The machine may require repair Contact a service representative Aankh Ce cartridge on page 48 AAD anui e Ifthe problem persists the machine may require repair Contact a service representative Curl If the printed paper is curled or paper does not AaBbCc AaBbCc esc feed into the machine Turn over the stack of paper in the tray Also try rotating the paper 180 in the tray Change the printer option and try again Go to printer properties click Paper tab and set type to Thin Paper Refer to the Software section for details An unknown image repetitively appears on a next few sheets or loose toner light print or contamination occurs Your printer is probably being used at an altitude of 1 000 m 3 281 ft or above The high altitude may affect the print quality such as loose toner or light imaging You can set this option through Printer Settings Utility or Printer tab in printer driver s properties See Altitude adjustment on page 27 Loose toner AaBb Gc AaBbCc Clean the inside of the machine See Cleaning the inside on page 45 Check the paper type and quality See Selecting print media on page 28 Remove the toner cartridge and install a new one See Replacing the toner cartridge on page 48 If the problem persists the machine may require repair
100. to page printing O X 02 Scale printing O X O Watermark O X Overlay O X X a This feature is supported only MAC OS X 10 4 10 6 getting started This chapter gives you step by step instructions for setting up the machine This chapter includes Setting up the hardware System requirements Setting up the network Using a wired network SETTING UP THE HARDWARE This section shows the steps to set up the hardware which is explained in the Quick Install Guide Make sure you read Quick Install Guide and complete following steps 1 Select a stable location Select a level stable place with adequate space for air circulation Allow extra space to open covers and trays The area should be well ventilated and away from direct sunlight or sources of heat cold and humidity Do not set the machine close to the edge of your desk or table 100 mm UB 3 9 inches Printing is suitable for altitudes under 1 000 m 3 281 ft Refer to the altitude setting to optimize your printing See Altitude adjustment on page 35 for more information Place the machine on a flat stable surface so that there is no incline greater than 2 mm 0 08 inch Otherwise printing quality may be affected a 23 Getting started e Using a wireless network Windows CLX 3175FW only e Using a wireless network CLX 3175FW only e Machine s basic settings Unpack the machine and check all th
101. transfer the image recommended by ITU T T 4 MH is a codebook based run length encoding scheme optimized to efficiently compress white space As most faxes consist mostly of white space this minimizes the transmission time of most faxes MMR Modified Modified READ MMR is a compression method recommended by ITU T T 6 Modem A device that modulates a carrier signal to encode digital information and also demodulates such a carrier signal to decode transmitted information MR Modified Read MR is a compression method recommended by ITU T T 4 MR encodes the first scanned line using MH The next line is compared to the first the differences determined and then the differences are encoded and transmitted NetWare A network operating system developed by Novell Inc It initially used cooperative multitasking to run various services on a PC and the network protocols were based on the archetypal Xerox XNS stack Today NetWare supports TCP IP as well as IPX SPX OPC Organic Photo Conductor OPC is a mechanism that makes a virtual image for print using a laser beam emitted from a laser printer and it is usually green or gray colored and a cylinder shaped An exposing unit of a drum is slowly worn away by its usage of the printer and it should be replaced appropriately since it gets scratches from grits of a paper Originals The first example of something such as a document photograph or text etc which is copied re
102. want to connect the printer at this time click Next and No on the following screen Then the installation will start and a test page will not be printed at the end of the installation e The installation window that appears in this User s Guide may differ depending on the printer and interface in use 5 After the installation is finished a window asking you to print a test page appears If you choose to print a test page select the checkbox and click Next Otherwise just click Next and skip to step 7 If the test page prints out correctly click Yes If not click No to reprint it To register yourself as a user of Samsung Printers in order to receive information from Samsung select the checkbox and click Finish You are now sent to the Samsung web site Otherwise just click Finish Setup Completed On line Registration You will get the opportunity to receive free newsletters with exclusive tips and promotions Also you will get more customer care Would you like to register for the Samsung Printer Membership T Yes I d like to register 5 NOTE After setup is complete if your printer driver doesn t work properly reinstall the printer driver See Reinstalling Printer Software on page 10 Custom Installation You can choose individual components to install 1 2 3 Make sure that the printer is connected to your computer and powered on Insert the supplied CD ROM
103. when it is not in actual use You can turn this mode on and select a length of time for which the machine waits after a job is printed before it switches to a reduced power state 1 2 3 4 5 Press Menu until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the display and press OK Press OK when Machine Setup appears Press the left right arrow until Power Save appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until the time setting you want appears and press OK Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Auto continue This is the option to set the machine to continue printing or not in case the paper size you have set and the paper within the tray mismatches Press Menu until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the display and press OK Press OK when Machine Setup appears Press the left right arrow until Auto Continue appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until the binding option you want appears 1 2 3 o On Automatically prints after set time passes when the paper size mismatches the tray paper size Off Waits until you press Black Start or Color Start on the control panel when the paper size mismatches the tray paper size Press OK to save your selection Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode loading orginals and print media This chapter introduces you how to load originals and print media into your machine This chapter includes e Loading originals e Selecting print
104. will look when it is printed Creating a Watermark 1 To change the print settings from your software application access printer properties See Printing a Document on page 12 2 Click the Extras tab and click the Edit button in the Watermark section The Edit Watermark window appears 3 Enter a text message in the Watermark Message box You can enter up to 40 characters The message displays in the preview window When the First Page Only box is checked the watermark prints on the first page only 4 Select watermark options You can select the font name style size or grayscale level from the Font Attributes section and set the angle of the watermark from the Message Angle section 5 Click Add to add a new watermark to the list 6 When you have finished editing click OK and start printing To stop printing the watermark select No Watermark from the Watermark drop down list Advanced Printing 20 Editing a Watermark 1 To change the print settings from your software application access printer properties See Printing a Document on page 12 2 Click the Extras tab and click the Edit button in the Watermark section The Edit Watermark window appears 3 Select the watermark you want to edit from the Current Watermarks list and change the watermark message and options 4 Click Update to save the changes 5 Click OK until you exit the Print window Deleting a Watermark 1 To change th
105. with a TWAIN compliant program a scan can be initiated from within the program an image capture API for Microsoft Windows and Apple Macintosh operating systems UNC Path Uniform Naming Convention UNC is a standard way to access network shares in Window NT and other Microsoft products The format of a UNC path is lt servername gt lt sharename gt lt Additional directory gt URL Uniform Resource Locator URL is the global address of documents and resources on the Internet The first part of the address indicates what protocol to use the second part specifies the IP address or the domain name where the resource is located USB Universal Serial Bus USB is a standard that was developed by the USB Implementers Forum Inc to connect computers and peripherals Unlike the parallel port USB is designed to concurrently connect a single computer USB port to multiple peripherals Watermark A watermark is a recognizable image or pattern in paper that appears lighter when viewed by transmitted light Watermarks were first introduced in Bologna Italy in 1282 they have been used by papermakers to identify their product and also on postage stamps currency and other government documents to discourage counterfeiting WIA Windows Imaging Architecture WIA is an imaging architecture that is originally introduced in Windows Me and Windows XP A scan can be initiated from within these operating systems by using a WIA compliant
106. wrinkling creasing or jams and may even damage the fuser For the best print quality position margins no closer than 15 mm from the edges of the envelope Avoid printing over the area where the envelope s seams meet MODE SIZE SOURCE Copy mode Letter A4 Legal tray 1 Oficio US Folio Executive JIS B5 A5 A6 Print mode All sizes supported by tray 1 the machine Guidelines for special print media MEDIA TYPE GUIDELINES Envelopes e Successful printing on envelopes depends upon the quality of the envelopes When selecting envelopes consider the following factors Weight The weight of the envelope paper should not exceed 90 g m or jamming may occur Construction Prior to printing envelopes should lie flat with less than 6 mm curl and should not contain air Condition Envelopes should not be wrinkled nicked or otherwise damaged Temperature You should use envelopes that are compatible with the heat and pressure of the machine during operation Use only well constructed envelopes with sharp and well creased folds Do not use stamped envelopes Do not use envelopes with clasps snaps windows coated lining self adhesive seals or other synthetic materials Do not use damaged or poorly made envelopes Be sure the seam at both ends of the envelope extends all the way to the corner of the envelope ol Labels To avoid damaging the machine use only labels designed for u
107. your printer driver doesn t saa Andress Winde Your machas SMIREN WEBZINE l work properly reinstall the printer driver See Reinstalling Printer Software on page 10 6 Select the components to be installed After selecting the components the following window appears You can also change the printer name set the printer to be shared on 9 Installing Printer Software in Windows Reinstalling Printer Software NOTE If your printer is not already connected to the computer the following window will appear You can reinstall the software if installation fails 1 Start Windows Rasen From the Start menu select Programs or All Programs SLA canine atc Check connection between your computer an 2 your printer driver name Maintenance 3 Select Repair and click Next 4 The list of printers available on the network appears Select the printer you want to install from the list and then click Next Please refer to the following connection method 1 Connect the device to your computer 2 Turn on the power of the device 3 1 New Hardware Wizard appears close it 4 chek Me Select Printer Port am Select a port that will be used for your printer TCP IP Port lt Back Shared Printer UNC C Add TCP IP Pot e After connecting the printer click Next Select a printer from the list below If you don t see your printer below click Update to refresh the list If you don t want to connect
108. 0 mW transmitting power such as wireless In Italiy if used outside of own premises general authorization is required In Russian only for indoor applications EEA EFTA countries No limitations at this time Safety information_11 REGULATORY COMPLIANCE STATEMENTS AN Wireless Guidance Low power Radio LAN type devices radio frequency RF wireless communication devices operating in the 2 4 GHz 5 GHz Band may be present embedded in your printer system The following section is a general overview of considerations while operating a wireless device Additional limitations cautions and concerns for specific countries are listed in the specific country sections or country group sections The wireless devices in your system are only qualified for use in the countries identified by the Radio Approval Marks on the system rating label If the country you will be using the wireless device in is not listed contact your local Radio Approval agency for requirements Wireless devices are closely regulated and use may not be allowed The power output of the wireless device or devices that may be embedded in your printer is well below the RF exposure limits as known at this time Because the wireless devices which may be embedded into your printer emit less energy than is allowed in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations manufacturer believes these devices are safe for use Regardless of the power levels care should be taken to
109. 00 black pages or 25 000 color pages Transfer roller Approx 100 000 pages Transfer unit ITB Approx 100 000 black pages or 25 000 color pages Pick up roller Approx 50 000 pages We highly recommend that this maintenance be performed by an authorized service provider dealer or the retailer where you bought the machine The warranty does not cover the replacement of the maintenance parts after their lifespan A The battery inside the machine is a service component Do not change it by yourself Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type Dispose used betteries according to the instructions Checking replaceables If you experience frequent paper jams or printing problems check the number of pages the machine has printed or scanned Replace the corresponding parts if necessary 1 Press Menu until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the display and press OK 2 Press the left right arrow until Maintenance appears and press OK 3 Press the left right arrow until Supplies Life appears and press OK 4 Press the left right arrow until the item you want appears and press OK Supplies Info Prints the supply information page e Total Displays the total number of pages printed e ADF Scan Displays the number of pages scanned using the ADF e Platen Scan Displays the number of pages scanned using the scanner glass Imaging Unit Transfer Belt Fuser TransferRoller Tray1 Ro
110. 10 Installing Printer Software in Windows Removing Printer Software 1 Start Windows 2 From the Start menu select Programs or All Programs your printer driver name Maintenance 3 Select Remove and click Next You will see a component list so that you can remove any item individually 4 Select the components you want to remove and then click Next 5 When your computer asks you to confirm your selection click Yes The selected driver and all of its components are removed from your computer 6 After the software is removed click Finish Installing mono printer driver This printer provides you the printer drivers with a mono driver so you can use your printer as a monochrome printer You must install the mono driver on your computer Following steps guide you through the step by step installation process 1 Make sure that the printer is connected to your computer and powered on Or your computer and printer are connected to the network 2 Insert the supplied CD ROM into your CD ROM drive The CD ROM should automatically run and an installation window appears 3 Click Cancel Ej Select a language from the list below English z Cancel If the confirmation window appears click Finish Click Start Printers and Faxes Select Add Printer When Add Printer Wizard appears click Next avn 11 7 Select Local printer attached to this computer and Automatically detect and ins
111. 27 515 www samsung com fi FRANCE 01 4863 0000 www samsung com fr GERMANY 01805 SAMSUNG www samsung de 726 7864 0 14 min GUATEMALA 1 800 299 0013 www samsung com latin HONDURAS 800 7919267 www samsung com latin HONG KONG 3698 4698 www samsung com hk www samsung com hk_en ION CENTER WER SITE HUNGARY 06 80 SAMSUNG www samsung com hu 726 7864 INDIA 3030 8282 www samsung com in 1800 110011 1800 3000 8282 INDONESIA 0800 112 8888 www samsung com id ITALIA 800 SAMSUNG 726 7864 www samsung com it JAMAICA 1 800 234 7267 www samsung com latin JAPAN 0120 327 527 www samsung com jp LATVIA 8000 7267 www samsung com lv LITHUANIA 8 800 77777 www samsung com lt LUXEMBURG 02 261 03 710 www samsung com lu MALAYSIA 1800 88 9999 www samsung com my MEXICO 01 800 SAMSUNG www samsung com mx 726 7864 MOLDOVA 00 800 500 55 500 www samsung ua www samsung com ua_ru NETHERLANDS 0900 SAMSUNG www samsung com nl 0900 7267864 0 10 min NEW ZEALAND 0800 SAMSUNG 0800 726 www samsung com nz 786 NICARAGUA 00 1800 5077267 www samsung com latin NORWAY 3 SAMSUNG 7267864 www samsung com no PANAMA 800 7267 www samsung com latin PHILIPPINES 1800 10 SAMSUNG www samsung com ph 726 7864 1 800 3 SAMSUNG 726 7864 1 800 8 SAMSUNG 726 7864 02 5805777 POLAND 0 801 1SAMSUNG www samsung com pl 172678 022 607 93 33 PORTUGAL 80820 SAMSUNG www samsung com pt 726 7864 PUERTO RICO 1 800 682 3180 www samsung com latin REP DOMINI
112. 3 Adjust the resolution and the darkness to suit your fax needs See Adjusting the document settings on page 52 Press On Hook Dial You hear a dial tone 5 Enter the receiving fax machine s number You can use speed dial numbers or group dial numbers For details about storing and searching for a number see Setting up Address Book on page 58 6 Press Color Start or Black Start when you hear a high pitched fax signal from the remote fax machine P When you want to cancel a fax job press Stop Clear at any time while sending Confirming a transmission When the last page of your original has been sent successfully the machine beeps and returns to ready mode When something goes wrong while sending your fax an error message appears on the display For a list of error messages and their meanings see Understanding display messages on page 76 If you receive an error message press Stop Clear to clear the message and try to send the fax again You can set your machine to print a confirmation report automatically each time sending a fax is completed For further details see Send Report on page 57 Automatic redialing When the number you have dialed is busy or there is no answer when you send a fax the machine automatically redials the number every three minutes up to seven times according to the factory default settings When the display shows Retry Redial press OK to redial the number without waiting To cance
113. 52 4 mm 4 x 6 inches 105 to 163 g m 28 to 43 Ib bond Transparency Letter A4 Refer to the Plain paper section 138 to 146 g m 37 to 39 Ib bond 1 sheet for manual feeding in Glossy paper Letter A4 Refer to the Plain paper section 160 g m 44 Ib bond the tray Minimum size custom 76 x 160 mm 3 x 6 3 inches Maximum size custom 216 x 356 mm 8 5 x 14 inches 60 to 163 g m 16 to43 Ib bond a lf media weight is over 105 g m 28 Ib bond load a paper into the tray one by one b Maximum capacity may differ depending on media weight thickness and environmental conditions c Smoothness 100 to 250 sheffield d Recommended media Transparency for a Color Laser Printers by 3M such as PP2500 e Recommended media Glossy paper Letter for this machine by HP Brochure Paper Product Q6611A only f Recommended media Glossy paper A4 for this machine by HP Superior Paper 160 glossy Product Q6616A only Loading originals and print media_ 29 Media sizes supported in each mode MEDIA TYPE GUIDELINES Envelopes Continue Envelopes with a peel off adhesive strip or with more than one flap that folds over to seal must use adhesives compatible with the machine s fusing temperature for 0 1 second Check your machine s specification to view the fusing temperature see Printer specifications on page 67 The extra flaps and strips might cause
114. 6 95 EC Approximation of the laws of the member states related to low voltage equipment January 1 1996 Council Directive 2004 108 EC 92 31 EEC approximation of the laws of the Member States related to electromagnetic compatibility March 9 1999 Council Directive 1999 5 EC on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and the mutual recognition of their conformity A full declaration defining the relevant Directives and referenced standards can be obtained from your Samsung Electronics Co Ltd representative EC Certification Certification to 1999 5 EC Radio Equipment amp Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive FAX This Samsung product has been self certified by Samsung for pan European single terminal connection to the analogue public switched telephone network PSTN in accordance with Directive 1999 5 EC The product has been designed to work with the national PSTNs and compatible PBXs of the European countries In the event of problems you should contact the Euro QA Lab of Samsung Electronics Co Ltd in the first instance The product has been tested against TBR21 To assist in the use and application of terminal equipment which complies with this standard the European Telecommunication Standards Institute ETSI has issued an advisory document EG 201 121 which contains notes and additional requirements to ensure network compatibility of TBR21 terminals The product has been designed against and is fully c
115. A suite of protocols developed by Apple Computer for computer networking It was included in the original Macintosh 1984 and is now deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP IP networking FDI Foreign Device Interface FDI is a card installed inside the machine to allow a third party device such as a coin operated device or a card reader Those devices allow the pay for print service on your machine FTP A File Transfer Protocol FTP is a commonly used protocol for exchanging files over any network that supports the TCP IP protocol such as the Internet or an intranet Fuser Unit The part of a laser printer that melts the toner onto the print media It consists of a hot roller and a back up roller After toner is transferred onto the paper the fuser unit applies heat and pressure to ensure that the toner stays on the paper permanently which is why paper is warm when it comes out of a laser printer Gateway A connection between computer networks or between a computer network and a telephone line It is very popular as it is a computer or a network that allows access to another computer or network Grayscale A shades of gray that represent light and dark portions of an image when color images are converted to grayscale colors are represented by various shades of gray Halftone An image type that simulates grayscale by varying the number of dots Highly colored areas consist of a large number of dots while lighter areas co
116. ACING THE WASTE TONER CONTAINER When the life span of the waste toner container has expired the Smart Panel program window appears on the computer indicating the waste toner container needs to be replaced Otherwise your machine stops printing 1 Turn the machine off then wait a few minutes for the machine to cool 2 Using the handle completely open the front cover L Make sure that you lay the waste toner container on a flat surface so that the toner does not spill 4 Remove the container s cap from the container as shown below and use it to close the waste toner container opening A Do not tilt or turn over the container 5 Take a new waste toner container out of its package 6 Insert the new container into position and then push it to make sure that it is firmly seated in place 7 Close the front cover firmly AN If the front cover is not completely closed the machine will not operate Please make sure all toner cartridges are installed properly If any toner cartridge is installed improperly the front cover do not close 8 Turn the machine on MAINTENANCE PARTS To avoid print quality and paper feed problems resulting from worn parts and to maintain your machine in top working condition the following condition the following items will need to be replaced after the specified number of pages or when the life span of each item has expired ITEMS YIELD AVERAGE Fuser unit Approx 100 0
117. BOQ d EHOC Ee O Fax Activates Fax mode Copy Activates Copy mode Scan Email Activates Scan mode Menu Enters Menu mode and scrolls through the available menus OK Confirms the selection on the screen Back Sends you back to the upper menu level Scroll through the options available in the UG cores menu and inorease or decrease vales empty space Dials a number or enters alphanumeric Number keypad characters See Keypad letters and oo numbers on page 36 Address Book Allows you to search for stored email addresses Redial Pause par o A In ready mode redials the last number or in Edit mode inserts a pause into a fax number On Hook Dial Engages the telephone line Stop Clear Stops an operation at any time In ready mode clears cancels the copy options such as the darkness the document type setting the copy size and the number of copies Black Start Starts a job in Black and White mode Color Start Starts a job in Color mode a CLX 3175FW only 4 e All illustrations on this user s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models e The surface of the output tray may become hot if you print a large number of pages at once Make sure that you do not touch the surface and do not allow children near it Introduction_ 19 UNDERSTANDING THE STATUS LED The color of the Status LED indicates the machine s curren
118. CA 1 800 751 2676 www samsung com latin EIRE 0818 717 100 www samsung com ie Contact SAMSUNG worldwide_ 73 COUNTRY REG CUSTOMER CARE WEB SITE ION CENTER RUSSIA 8 800 555 55 55 www samsung ru SINGAPORE 1800 SAMSUNG www samsung com sg 726 7864 SLOVAKIA 0800 SAMSUNG www samsung com sk 726 7864 SOUTH AFRICA 0860 SAMSUNG www samsung com za 726 7864 SPAIN 902 1 SAMSUNG 902 172 www samsung com es 678 SWEDEN 0771 726 7864 www samsung com se SAMSUNG SWITZERLAND 0848 SAMSUNG 7267864 www samsung com ch CHF 0 08 min TADJIKISTAN 8 10 800 500 55 500 TAIWAN 0800 329 999 www samsung com tw THAILAND 1800 29 3232 www samsung com th 02 689 3232 TRINIDAD amp 1 800 SAMSUNG www samsung com latin TOBAGO 726 7864 TURKEY 444 77 11 www samsung com tr U A E 800 SAMSUNG 726 7864 www samsung com ae 8000 4726 U K 0845 SAMSUNG www samsung com uk 726 7864 U S A 1 800 SAMSUNG www samsung com us 7267864 UKRAINE 8 800 502 0000 www samsung ua www samsung com ua_ru UZBEKISTAN 8 10 800 500 55 500 www samsung com kz_ru VENEZUELA 0 800 100 5303 www samsung com latin VIETNAM 1 800 588 889 www samsung com vn Contact SAMSUNG worldwide_ 74 2008 Samsung Electronics Co Ltd All rights reserved This user s guide is provided for information purposes only All information included herein is subject to change withou
119. Cancel OK A Mac OS 10 3 4 Open the File menu and click Print 5 Choose the number of copies you want and indicate which pages you want to print 6 Click Print when you finish setting the options 40 Changing Printer Settings You can use advanced printing features when using your printer From your Macintosh application select Print from the File menu The printer name which appears in the printer properties window may differ depending on the printer in use Except for the name the composition of the printer properties window is similar NOTES The setting options may differ depending on printers and Macintosh OS version Layout The Layout tab provides options to adjust how the document appears on the printed page You can print multiple pages on one sheet of paper Select Layout from the Presets drop down list to access the following features gt Printer Presets Standard Layout Pages per Sheet 1 a 1 Layout Direction A 5 Ral i oy Border None Two Sided off O Long edged binding O Short edged binding Cancel PDFw Preview A Mac OS 10 4 Pages per Sheet This feature determines how many pages printed on one page For details see Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet of Paper on the next column eLayout Direction You can select the printing direction on a page as like the examples on Ul Using Your Pri
120. Contact a service representative Troubleshooting_ 60 Copying problems Scanning problems CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS Copies are too light or too dark Use Darkness to darken or lighten the background of the copies Smears lines marks or spots appears on copies If defects are on the original press Darkness to lighten the background of your copies If no defects are on the original clean the scan unit See Cleaning the scan unit on page 46 Copy image is skewed Ensure that the original is face down on the scanner glass Check that the copy paper is loaded correctly Blank copies print out Ensure that the original is face down on the scanner glass The scanner does not work Make sure that you place the original to be scanned face down on the scanner glass There may not be enough available memory to hold the document you want to scan Try the Prescan function to see if that works Try lowering the scan resolution rate Check that the USB cable is connected properly Make sure that the USB cable is not defective Switch the cable with a known good cable If necessary replace the cable Check that the scanner is configured correctly Check scan setting in the SmarThru Configuration or the application you want to use to make certain that the scanner job is being sent to the correct port Image rubs off the copy eas
121. Document Source m set the image area to be scanned Job Type Delete Save Save As I Default JI J Press F for Help CO L_ Change the scan options in the Image Quality and Scan Area sections Image Quality allows you to select the color composition and the scan resolution for the image Scan Area allows you to select the page size The Advanced button enables you to set the page size manually If you want to use one of the preset scan option settings select from the J ob Type drop down list For details about the preset Job Type settings see page 35 You can restore the default setting for the scan options by clicking Default When you have finished click Scan to start scanning The status bar appears on the bottom left of the window to show you the progress of the scan To cancel scanning click Cancel The scanned image appears in the new Image Manager tab If you want to edit the scanned image use the toolbar For further details about editing an image see page 35 10 When you are finished click Save on the toolbar 11 Select the file directory where you want to save the image _ and enter the file name 12 Click Save Adding J ob Type Settings You can save your scan option settings to retrieve for a later scanning To save a new Job Type setting 1 Change the options from the Scanner Properties window 2 Click Save As 3 Enter the name for your setting 4 Click OK
122. EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com This product includes software written by Tim Hudson tih cryptsoft com a ORIGINAL SSLEAY LICENSE Copyright C 1995 1998 Eric Young eay cryptsoft com All rights reserved This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL This library is free for commercial and non commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution be it the RC4 RSA Ihash DES etc code not just the SSL code The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson tjnh cryptsoft com Copyright remains Eric Young s and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed If this package is used in a product Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation online or textual provided with the package Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice this list of conditions and the followi
123. Export Setting appears and press OK 5 Press the left right arrow until the option you want appears Address Book Backs up all Address Book entries e Setup Data Backs up all system settings 6 Press OK to begin backing up the data The data is backed up to the USB memory 7 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode P Restoring data 1 Insert the USB memory device on which the backup data is stored in to the USB memory port 2 Press Menu until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the display and press OK Press OK when Machine Setup appears Press the left right arrow until Import Setting appears and press OK 5 Press the left right arrow until the data type you want appears and press OK 6 Press the left right arrow until the file containing the data you want to restore appears and press OK 7 Press OK when Yes appears to restore the backup file to the machine 8 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Po MANAGING USB MEMORY You can delete image files stored on a USB memory device one by one or all at once by reformatting the device AN After deleting files or reformatting a USB memory device files cannot be restored Therefore confirm that you no longer need the data before deleting it Deleting an image file 1 Insert the USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine Press Direct USB Press the left right arrow until File Manage appears and press OK Press OK when Delete app
124. Extras tab and click Edit button in the Overlay section In the Edit Overlay window click Create Overlay In the Create Overlay window type a name of up to eight characters in the File name box Select the destination path if necessary The default is C Formover Click Save The name appears on the Overlay List box Click OK or Yes to finish creating The file is not printed Instead it is stored on your computer hard disk drive NOTE The overlay document size must be the same as the documents you print with the overlay Do not create an overlay with a watermark Advanced Printing 21 Using a Page Overlay After an overlay has been created it is ready to be printed with your document To print an overlay with a document 1 2 Create or open the document you want to print To change the print settings from your software application access printer properties See Printing a Document on page 12 Click the Extras tab Select the desired overlay from the Overlay drop down list box If the overlay file you want does not appear in the Overlay list click Edit button and Load Overlay and select the overlay file If you have stored the overlay file you want to use in an external source you can also load the file when you access the Load Overlay window After you select the file click Open The file appears in the Overlay List box and is available for printing Select the overlay from the Ov
125. F wireless communication devices operating in the 2 4 GHz 5 GHz Band may be present embedded in your printer system The following section is a general overview of considerations while operating a wireless device Additional limitations cautions and concerns for specific countries are listed in the specific country sections or country group sections The wireless devices in your system are only qualified for use in the countries identified by the Radio Approval Marks on the system rating label If the country you will be using the wireless device in is not listed contact your local Radio Approval agency for requirements Wireless devices are closely regulated and use may not be allowed The power output of the wireless device or devices that may be embedded in your printer is well below the RF exposure limits as known at this time Because the wireless devices which may be embedded into your printer emit less energy than is allowed in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations manufacturer believes these devices are safe for use Regardless of the power levels care should be taken to minimize human contact during normal operation As a general guideline a separation of 20 cm 8 inches between the wireless device and the body for use of a wireless device near the body this does not include extremities is typical This device should be used more than 20 cm 8 inches from the body when wireless devices are on and transmitting Th
126. H DAMAGE The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed i e this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence including the GNU Public Licence Safety information_13 contents 14 Contents INTRODUCTION GETTING STARTED LOADING ORIGINALS AND PRINT MEDIA 18 18 18 19 20 20 21 22 22 22 37 37 37 38 39 40 Features of your new laser product Safety information Machine overview Front view Rear view Control panel overview Understanding the Status LED Acknowledging the status of the toner cartridge Menu overview Supplied software Printer driver features Printer driver Setting up the hardware System requirements Windows Macintosh Linux Setting up the network Supported operation environments Using a wired network Printing Configuration report Setting IP address Network parameter setting Installing the driver software Using a wireless network Windows CLX 3175FW only Checking your network environments Installing the printer on an Ad Hoc wireless network Installing the printer on a wireless network with an Access Point Using a wireless network CLX 3175FW only Checking your Network Environments Printing Configuration report Setting IP address Network parameter setting Restoring factory default settings Configuring the machine s wireless network Installing the driver software Machine s basic settings A
127. If toner gets on your clothing wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash it in cold water Hot water sets toner into fabric e If your machine or its surrounding is contaminated with toner we recommend you to use a cloth or tissue dampened with water to clean it If you use a vacum cleaner toner blows into the air then might be harmful to you After cleaning let the machine to dry completely 7 Holding the groove on the front of the imaging unit push imaging unit in to the machine 8 Insert the waste toner container into position and then push it to make sure that it is firmly seated in place 10 Reinstall all the compartments into the machine and close the front cover N If the front cover is not completely closed the machine will not operate 11 Plug in the power cord and turn the machine on Cleaning the scan unit Keeping the scan unit clean helps ensure the best possible copies We suggest that you clean the scan unit at the start of each day and during the day as needed 1 Slightly dampen a soft lint free cloth or paper towel with water 2 Open the scanner lid 3 Wipe the surface of the scanner glass until it is clean and dry 4 Wipe the underside of the scanner lid and white sheet until it is clean and dry 5 Close the scanner lid Maintenance 46 MAINTAINING THE CARTRIDGE Toner cartridge storage Toner cartridges contain components that are sensitive to light temperature and humidity
128. If you need to know the exact name of your printer you can check the supplied CD ROM 22 Sharing the Printer Locally Setting Up a Host Computer AaAvUAWN Pe Start Windows From the Start menu select Printers and Faxes Double click your printer driver icon From the Printer menu select Sharing Check the Share this printer box Fill in the Shared Name field and then click OK Setting Up a Client Computer aus Right click the Windows Start button and select Explore Select My Network Places and then right click Search for Computers Fill in the IP address of host computer in Computer name field and click Search In case host computer requires User name and Password fill in User ID and password of host computer account Double click Printers and Faxes Right click printer driver icon select Connect Click Yes if the installation confirm message appears Scanning Scanning with your machine lets you turn pictures and text into digital files on your computer Then you can fax or e mail the files display them on your web site or use them to create projects that you can print using Samsung SmarThru software or the WIA driver This chapter includes e Scanning Using Samsung SmarThru e Scanning Process with TWAIN enabled Software e Scanning Using the WIA Driver NOTES e Check the Operating System s that are compatible with your printer Please refer to the OS Compatibility section of
129. K 2 Press the left right arrow until Clear Setting appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until the item you want to clear appears 3 Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models If so it is not applicable to your machine OPTIONS DESCRIPTION All Settings Clears all of the data stored in memory and resets all of your settings to the factory default Fax Setup Restores all of the fax options to the factory default Copy Setup Restores all of the copy options to the factory default Scan Setup Restores all of the scan options to the factory default System Setup Restores all of the system options to the factory default Network Setup Restores all of the network options to the factory default Address Book Clears all of the fax number and email address entries stored in memory Sent Report Clears all records of sent faxes and emails Fax RCV Report Clears all records of received faxes Press OK when Yes appears Press OK again to confirm clearing Repeat steps 3 through 5 to clear another item Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode NG orp 64 _Maintenance CLEANING YOUR MACHINE To maintain print and scan quality follow the cleaning procedures below each time the toner cartridge is replaced or if print and scan quality problems occur A e Cleaning the cabinet of the machine with cleaning materials containing large amounts of
130. L e If your machine does not work properly after the installation try to reinstall the printer driver See Software section e During the printer driver installation process the driver installer detects the location information for your operating system and sets the default paper size for your machine If you use a different Windows location you must change the paper size to match the paper you usually use Go to printer properties to change the paper size after installation is complete Getting started_ 26 MACHINE S BASIC SETTINGS After installation is complete you may want to set the machine s default settings Refer to the next section if you would like to set or change values Altitude adjustment The print quality is affected by atmospheric pressure which is determined by the height of the machine above sea level The following information will guide you on how to set your machine to the best print quality or best quality of print Before you set the altitude value find the altitude where you are using the machine 2 000 m 1 Normal 1 000 m 4 2 High1 3 High2 4 High3 0 1 Ensure that you have installed the printer driver with the provided Printer Software CD 2 Double click the Smart Panel icon on the Windows task bar or Notification Area in Linux You can also click Smart Panel on the status bar in Mac OS X Click Printer Setting 4 Click Setting gt Altitude Adjustment Select the app
131. LS AND PRINT MEDIA COPYING Features of your new laser product Safety information Machine overview Front view Rear view Control panel overview Understanding the Status LED Acknowledging the status of the toner cartridge Menu overview Supplied software Printer driver features Printer driver Setting up the hardware System requirements Windows Macintosh Linux Setting up the network CLX 3175N only Supported operating environments Configuring network protocol via the machine Using the SetIP program Installing the software Machine s basic settings Altitude adjustment Changing the display language Setting sounds Using the save modes Auto continue Loading originals On the scanner glass Selecting print media Specifications on print media Media sizes supported in each mode Guidelines for special print media Changing the size of the paper in the paper tray Printing on special print materials Feeding the print material manually Setting the paper size and type Copying Changing the settings for each copy Darkness Original Type Reduced or enlarged copy Changing the default copy settings ID card copying Using special copy features 2 up or 4 up copying Poster copying Clone copying contents SCANNING BASIC PRINTING USING USB MEMORY DEVICE MAINTENANCE 36 36 36 37 37 37 37 38 38 38 40 40 41 41 41 41 42 42 42 42 42 42 43 43 43 43 Erasing background images Gray enhance copying
132. MBIA 01 8000112112 www samsung com co COSTA RICA 0 800 507 7267 www samsung com latin CZECH 800 SAMSUNG www samsung com cz REPUBLIC 800 726786 Samsung Zrt esk organiza n slo ka Oasis Florenc Sokolovsk 394 17 180 00 Praha 8 DENMARK 8 SAMSUNG 7267864 www samsung com dk ECUADOR 1 800 10 7267 www samsung com latin EL SALVADOR 800 6225 www samsung com latin ESTONIA 800 7267 www samsung com ee KAZAKHSTAN 8 10 800 500 55 500 www samsung com kz_ru KYRGYZSTAN 00 800 500 55 500 FINLAND 30 6227 515 www samsung com fi FRANCE 01 4863 0000 www samsung com fr GERMANY 01805 SAMSUNG www samsung de 726 7864 0 14 min GUATEMALA 1 800 299 0013 www samsung com latin HONDURAS 800 7919267 www samsung com latin HONG KONG 3698 4698 www samsung com hk www samsung com hk_en ION CENTER WER SITE HUNGARY 06 80 SAMSUNG www samsung com hu 726 7864 INDIA 3030 8282 www samsung com in 1800 110011 1800 3000 8282 INDONESIA 0800 112 8888 www samsung com id ITALIA 800 SAMSUNG 726 7864 www samsung com it JAMAICA 1 800 234 7267 www samsung com latin JAPAN 0120 327 527 www samsung com jp LATVIA 8000 7267 www samsung com lv LITHUANIA 8 800 77777 www samsung com lt LUXEMBURG 02 261 03 710 www samsung com lu MALAYSIA 1800 88 9999 www samsung com my MEXICO 01 800 SAMSUNG www samsung com mx 726 7864 MOLDOVA 00 800 500 55 500 www samsung ua www samsung com ua_ru NETHERLANDS 0900 SAMSUNG www samsung com nl 0900 7267864 0 10 min
133. N device that connects the LAN to the Internet or a Corporate Intranet Most Infrastructure mode networks use a DHCP Server to automatically Getting started 29 assign the IP address and set other network parameters WT a A y a If you know that you are connecting to an Infrastructure mode network with an access point and the IP address is assigned by a DHCP server you may proceed to the Configuring the machine s wireless network part after reviewing the following parts on printing a Network Configuration Report If you know that you are connecting to an Infrastructure mode network with an access point but it does not have DHCP address assignment or you are required to set a static IP proceed to the Setting IP address part before going to Configuring the machine s wireless network part after reviewing the following parts on printing a Network Configuration Report e Ad hoc mode An Ad hoc mode network provides peer to peer communication In an Ad hoc mode network wireless devices and computers communicate directly with each other without using an access point They can share files and machines but may not be able to access the Internet The machine receives print jobs from wireless computers directly E S h N 4 bo A K t a N SJ N i If you know that you are connecting to an ad hoc mode network without an access point proceed to the Setting IP address part before going to Configuring the machin
134. NTOSH Installing SoftWare aa ANA NLANG ANAN AA AA AA hanna 37 Uninstalling software an i NANANA NALANG NBA NANANA 37 Using SetlP program nakka an Napa DN BABA a aa 38 Setting Up the Printer sm pirrer AA ALI NA AA AA E 38 For a Network connected asasaaaaaaaan an kanan ANG NAN NN ENEE ARE NEA NANGKA NAN ANKENENENAR ENNA NANANA NGA KETER eae 38 For a USB cOnnected Hana Nba haa kakaba paha aa aabang 39 PRIDEMO Aa AA AA NETRANE TOE ENE 40 Printing a DOCUMENE maa AA E SEAE E E EEE EAEE EEE E 40 Changing Printer Settings sirsirnestrnisnarr niiina iE nakna nE NEEN NENE sae OENE NANANA 40 Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet of Paper cc ceecee cette etter een eas 41 le 10 AA 42 Scanning With USB 2 72 ade id Nad bended eevee 42 Scanning With Network maana kapa pen ne y aba gba a bha baal 42 Setting scan information in Scan Manager 2 aasa nan asana eee 42 Installing Printer Software in Windows This chapter includes e Installing Printer Software e Reinstalling Printer Software e Removing Printer Software e Installing mono printer driver NOTE The following procedure is based on Windows XP for other operating systems refer to the corresponding Windows user s guide or online help Installing Printer Software You can install the printer software for local printing or network printing To install the printer software on the computer perform the appropriate installation procedure depending
135. OSYNLIG LASERSTR LNING N R DENNA DEL R PPEN STR LEN R FARLIG VAROITUS NAKYMATONTA LASERS TEILY AVATTAESSA VARO SUORAA ALTISTUMISTA SATEELLE B PRT GILAS 2l 0 SHE SH Aog LEA eE iig z x ps 6 Safety information OZONE SAFETY During normal operation this machine produces ozone The ozone produced does not present a hazard to the operator However it is advisable that the machine be operated in a well ventilated area If you need additional information about ozone request your nearest Samsung dealer MERCURY SAFETY Contains Mercury Dispose According to Local State or Federal Laws U S A only POWER SAVER ENERGY STAR RECYCLING This printer contains advanced energy conservation technology that reduces power consumption when it is not in active use When the printer does not receive data for an extended period of time power consumption is automatically lowered ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered U S marks For more information on the ENERGY STAR program see http www energystar gov nas Recycle or dispose of the packaging material for this product in an environmentally responsible manner CORRECT DISPOSAL OF THIS PRODUCT WASTE ELECTRICAL amp ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT bd Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate collection systems This marking on the product accessories or literature indicates that the produ
136. Properties About Help Shows the status of the class and the number of r Selected class Antes nes printers in the class Frusuned J e Refresh Renews the classes list Add Class Allows you to add a new printer class Remove Class Removes the selected printer class Scanners Configuration In this window you can monitor the activity of scanner devices view a list of installed Samsung MFP devices change device properties and scan images Beanners configuration Switches to S fen Scanners configuration ke Shows all of the installed scanners Shows the vendor model name and type of your scanner Selected scanner Vendor Model Type a j CU C Ea a Properties Allows you to change the scan properties and scan a document See page 34 Drivers Allows you to monitor the activity of the scan drivers Ports Configuration In this window you can view the list of available ports check the status of each port and release a port that is stalled in busy state when its owner is terminated for any reason s Unified Driver Configurator f Port configuration Elaeeoea idevimfp0 idevimfp1 idevimfp2 Jdevimfp3 IPE EE CA Switches to p seve sevme sevme semt eves re ports Ko La configuration nemo x Shows all of the available ports Shows the port type device connected to the port and status
137. S The copy options including darkness original type copy size and number of copies can be set to those most frequently used When you copy a document the default settings are used unless they have been changed by using the corresponding buttons on the control panel 1 Press Menu Press OK when Copy Menu appears Press the left right arrow until Copy Setup appears and press OK Press OK when Change Default appears Press the left right arrow until the setup option you want appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until the setting you want appears and press OK 7 Repeat steps 5 through 6 as needed 8 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode While you are setting copy options pressing Stop Clear cancels the changed settings and restores the defaults go PON gt ID CARD COPYING Your machine can print 2 sided originals on one sheet of A4 Letter Folio Oficio Executive B5 A5 or A6 sized paper The machine prints one side of the original on the upper half of the paper and the other side on the lower half without reducing the size of the original This feature is helpful for copying a small sized item such as a business card 1g The original must be placed on the scanner glass to use this feature Press ID Copy Place the front side of an original facing down on the scanner glass where arrows indicate as shown and close the scanner lid
138. SPX having similarities to TCP IPX SPX was primarily designed for local area networks LANs and is a very efficient protocol for this purpose typically its performance exceeds that of TCP IP on a LAN ISO The International Organization for Standardization ISO is an international standard setting body composed of representatives from national standards bodies It produces world wide industrial and commercial standards ITU T The International Telecommunication Union is an international organization established to standardize and regulate international radio and telecommunications Its main tasks include standardization allocation of the radio spectrum and organizing interconnection arrangements between different countries to allow international phone calls A T out of ITU T indicates telecommunication ITU T No 1 chart Standardized test chart published by ITU T for document facsimile transmissions JBIG Joint Bi level Image Experts Group JBIG is an image compression standard with no loss of accuracy or quality which was designed for compression of binary images particularly for faxes but can also be used on other images JPEG Joint Photographic Experts Group JPEG is a most commonly used standard method of lossy compression for photographic images It is the format used for storing and transmitting photographs on the World Wide Web LDAP The Lightweight Directory Access Protocol LDAP is a networking protoco
139. See Software section You can use preprinted forms and letterhead with plain paper See Software section Save time and money To save paper you can print multiple pages on one single sheet of paper This machine automatically conserves electricity by substantially reducing power consumption when not in use To save paper you can print on both sides of the paper double sided printing See Software section Print in various environments You can print with various operating system such as Windows Linux and Macintosh systems Your machine is equipped with a USB interface and a network interface Copy originals in several formats Your machine can print multiple image copies from the original document on a single page There are special functions to erase catalog and newspaper background The print quality and image size may be adjusted and enhanced at the same time 2_Features of your new laser product Scan the originals and send it right away Scan in color and use the precise compressions of JPEG TIFF and PDF formats Quickly scan and send files to multiple destinations using Networks scanning FEATURES BY MODELS The machine is designed to support all of your document needs from printing and copying to more advanced networking solutions for your business Basic features of this machine include FEATURES CLX 3175 CLX 3175N USB 2 0 e e USB Memory Interface e e PictBridge e o Network I
140. Send Report This report shows the fax number the number of pages the elapsed time of the job the communication mode and the communication results for a particular fax job You can set up your machine to automatically print a transmission confirmation report after each fax job See Sending options on page 57 Sent Report This report shows information on the faxes and emails you have recently sent You can set the machine to automatically print this report every 50 communications See Sending options on page 57 Fax RCV Report This report shows information on the faxes you have recently received Schedule Jobs This list shows the documents currently stored for delayed faxes along with the starting time and type of each operation Replacing the imaging unit Replacing the waste toner container Maintenance parts Managing your machine from the website Checking the machine s serial number REPORT LIST DESCRIPTION Junk Fax Report This list shows the fax numbers specified as junk fax numbers To add or delete numbers to or from this list access the Junk Fax Setup menu See Receiving options on page 57 Network Info This list shows information on your machine s network connection and configuration User Auth List This list shows authorized users who are allowed to use the email function Printing a report 1 Press Menu until System Setup appears on the bottom line of
141. Setting the fax header Adjusting the document settings Sending a fax automatically Sending a fax manually Confirming a transmission Automatic redialing Redialing the last number Sending a fax to multiple destinations Sending a delayed fax Sending a priority fax Receiving a fax Contents 15 contents 16 Contents USING USB MEMORY DEVICE MAINTENANCE 60 60 61 61 61 61 61 62 62 62 62 62 62 62 Changing receiving modes Receiving automatically in Fax mode Receiving manually in Tel mode Receiving manually using an extension telephone Receiving automatically in Ans Fax mode Receiving faxes using DRPD mode Receiving in secure receiving mode Activating secure receiving mode Receiving faxes in memory Forwarding faxes Fax setup Changing the fax setup options Changing the default document settings Printing sent fax report automatically Setting up Address Book About USB memory Plugging in a USB memory device Scanning to a USB memory device Scanning Customizing Scan to USB Printing from a USB memory device To print a document from a USB memory device Backing up data Backing up data Restoring data Managing USB memory Deleting an image file Formatting a USB memory device Viewing the USB memory status Printing directly from a digital camera Printing reports Printing a report Adjusting the color contrast Clearing memory Cleaning your machine Cleaning the outside Cleaning the inside Cleaning the scan unit Ma
142. T T 4 MR encodes the first scanned line using MH The next line is compared to the first the differences determined and then the differences are encoded and transmitted NetWare A network operating system developed by Novell Inc It initially used cooperative multitasking to run various services on a PC and the network protocols were based on the archetypal Xerox XNS stack Today NetWare supports TCP IP as well as IPX SPX OPC Organic Photo Conductor OPC is a mechanism that makes a virtual image for print using a laser beam emitted from a laser printer and it is usually green or gray colored and a cylinder shaped An exposing unit of a drum is slowly worn away by its usage of the printer and it should be replaced appropriately since it gets scratches from grits of a paper Originals The first example of something such as a document photograph or text etc which is copied reproduced or translated to produce others but which is not itself copied or derived from something else OSI Open Systems Interconnection OSI is a model developed by the International Organization for Standardization ISO for communications OSI offers a standard modular approach to network design that divides the required set of complex functions into manageable self contained functional layers The layers are from top to bottom Application Presentation Session Transport Network Data Link and Physical PABX A private automatic branc
143. TED MESSAGE MEANING SOLUTIONS Group Not You have tried to Use a speed dial number Available selecta group location or dial a number number where onlya manually using the single location number keypad number can be used such as when adding locations for a Multiple Send operation Install The imaging unit is Install the imaging unit Imaging Unit not installed Install Toner The toner cartridge is Install the toner v not installed cartridge Cancel lt 4 Yes gt Your machine s memory has become full while trying to store an original into memory To cancel the fax job press the OK button to accept Yes If you want to send those pages that have been successfully stored press the OK button to accept No You should send the remaining pages later when memory is available Invalid Toner vy The toner cartridge you have installed is not for your machine Install the a Samsung genuine toner cartridge designed for your machine Incompatible The machine has received a fax from which is registered as a junk fax The received fax data will be deleted Reconfirm junk fax setup See Receiving options on page 57 COMM Error The machine has a communication problem Ask the sender to try again Connection Error Connection with the SMTP server failed Check the server settings and the network cable IP Conflict The network IP Check the IP address address
144. UNG www samsung com uk 726 7864 U S A 1 800 SAMSUNG www samsung com us 7267864 UKRAINE 8 800 502 0000 www samsung ua www samsung com ua_ru UZBEKISTAN 8 10 800 500 55 500 www samsung com kz_ru VENEZUELA 0 800 100 5303 www samsung com latin VIETNAM 1 800 588 889 www samsung com vn Contact SAMSUNG worldwide_ 98 features of your new laser product Your new machine is equipped with a number of special features that improve the quality of the documents you print With the machine you can SPECIAL FEATURES at Print with excellent quality and speed You can print in a full range of colors using cyan magenta yellow and black You can print with a resolution of up to 2400 x 600 dpi See Software section Your machine prints A4 sized paper at up to 16 ppm and letter sized paper at up to 17 ppm In Color mode your machine prints A4 sized or letter sized paper at up to 4 ppm Handle many different types of printable material The 150 sheet tray supports plain paper in various sizes letterhead envelopes labels custom sized media postcards and heavy paper Create professional documents Print Watermarks You can customize your documents with words such as Confidential See Software section Print Posters The text and pictures of each page of your document are magnified and printed across the sheet of paper and can then be taped together to form a poster
145. USB appears on the bottom line of the display 5 Press Color Start or Black Start when Ready to Scan to USB appears Regardless of the button you press the color mode is decided as customized See Customizing Scan to USB on page 42 Your machine begins scanning the original and then asks if you want to scan another page 6 Press OK when Yes appears to scan more pages Load an original and press Color Start or Black Start Regardless of the button you press the color mode is decided as customized See Customizing Scan to USB on page 42 Otherwise press the left right arrow to select No and press OK After scanning is complete you can remove the USB memory device from the machine Customizing Scan to USB You can specify image size file format or color mode for each scanning to USB job 1 Press Menu Press the left right arrow until Scan Menu appears and press OK Press OK when Scan Feature appears Press OK when USB Feature appears Press the left right arrow until the setting option you want appears and press OK You can set the following options e Scan Size Sets the image size e Original Type Sets the original document s type e Resolution Sets the image resolution e Scan Color Sets the color mode If you select Mono in this option you cannot select JPEG in Scan Format e Scan Format Sets the file format in which the image is to be saved When you select TIFF or PDF you can select to scan m
146. a two or three digit speed email location press the first digit button s and then hold down the last digit button You can search through memory for an entry by pressing Address Book See Searching Address Book for an entry on page 49 Group email numbers To use a group email entry you need to search for and select it from memory When you are prompted to enter a destination address while sending an email press Address Book See Searching Address Book for an entry on page 49 Searching Address Book for an entry There are two ways to search for an address in memory You can either scan from A to Z sequentially or search by entering the first letters of the name associated with the address Searching sequentially through memory 1 If necessary press Scan Email 2 Press Address Book until Search amp Send appears on the bottom line of the display and press OK 3 Press the left right arrow until the number category you want appears and press OK Press OK when All appears 5 Press the left right arrow until the name and address you want appears You can search upwards or downwards through the entire memory in alphabetical order A Scanning_ 49 Searching with a particular first letter 1 2 3 4 5 6 If necessary press Scan Email Press Address Book until Search amp Send appears on the bottom line of the display and press OK Press the left right arrow until the number category you want
147. achine If the paper does not move when you pull or if you do not see the paper in this area check the paper exit area See In the paper exit area on page 53 4 Insert the tray 1 into the machine until it snaps into place Printing automatically resumes In the fuser unit area If paper is jammed in the fuser unit area follow the next steps to release the jammed paper 1 Open the scan unit Do not touch the fuser inside the inner cover It is hot and could cause burns The fuser s operating temperature is 180 C 356 F Take care when removing paper from the machine 4 Close the inner cover 53 _ Troubleshooting 5 Lowering down the scan unit gently and slowly until it is completely closed Make sure that it is securely latched Be careful not to pinch your fingers AN If the scan unit is not completely closed the machine will not operate In the paper exit area 1 Open and close the front cover The jammed paper is automatically ejected from the machine 2 Gently pull the paper out of the output tray If you do not see the jammed paper or if there is any resistance when you pull stop and go to the next step 3 Open the rear cover 4 If you see the jammed paper pull it straight up Skip to step 8 If you still do not see the paper go to the next step closed Make sure that it is securely latched 8 Lowering down the scan unit gently and slowly until it is completely Be
148. ad have the following color code e Green and Yellow Earth e Blue Neutral e Brown Live If the wires in the mains lead do not match the colors marked in your plug do the following You must connect the green and yellow wire to the pin marked by the letter E or by the safety Earth symbol or colored green and yellow or green You must connect the blue wire to the pin which is marked with the letter N or colored black You must connect the brown wire to the pin which is marked with the letter L or colored red You must have a 13 amp fuse in the plug adaptor or at the distribution board DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY EUROPEAN COUNTRIES CE Approvals and Certifications The CE marking applied to this product symbolizes Samsung Electronics Co Ltd Declaration of Conformity with the following applicable 93 68 EEC Directives of the European Union as of the dates indicated The declaration of conformity may be consulted at www samsung com printer go to Support 5 Download center and enter your printer name to browse the EuDoC January 1 1995 Council Directive 2006 95 EC Approximation of the laws of the member states related to low voltage equipment January 1 1996 Council Directive 2004 108 EC 92 31 EEC approximation of the laws of the Member States related to electromagnetic compatibility March 9 1999 Council Directive 1999 5 EC on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and the mutual
149. alcohol solvent or other strong substances can discolor or distort the cabinet e If your machine or its surrounding is contaminated with toner we recommend you to use cloth or tissue dampened with water to clean it If you use a vacuum cleaner toner blown into the air may be harmful Cleaning the outside Clean the cabinet of the machine with a soft lint free cloth You can dampen the cloth slightly with water but be careful not to let any water drip onto or into the machine Cleaning the inside During the printing process paper toner and dust particles can accumulate inside the machine This buildup can cause print quality problems such as toner specks or smearing Cleaning the inside of the machine clears or reduces these problems 1 Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord Wait for the machine to cool down 2 Using the handle completely open the front cover 3 Grasp the handles on the toner cartridge and pull to remove four cartridges from the machine 4 Pull the waste toner container out of the machine using its handle 5 Pull the imaging unit out of the machine using the groove on the front of the imaging unit A e Do not touch the green surface the imaging unit with your hands or any other material e Be careful not to scratch the surface of the imaging unit e Ifyou leave the front cover open for more than a few minutes the imaging unit can be exposed to light This will cause damage to the
150. ame telephone line may result in problems making and receiving telephone calls especially ringing when your line is called The sum of all Ringer Equivalence Numbers of the equipment on your telephone line should be less than five in order to assure proper service from the telephone company In some cases a sum of five may not be usable on your line If any of your telephone equipment is not operating properly you should immediately remove it from your telephone line as it may cause harm to the telephone network A FCC Regulations state that changes or modifications to this equipment not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the user s authority to operate this equipment In the event that terminal equipment causes harm to the telephone network the telephone company should notify the customer that service may be stopped However where prior notice is impractical the company may temporarily cease service providing that they a promptly notify the customer b give the customer an opportunity to correct the equipment problem c inform the customer of the right to bring a complaint to the Federal Communication Commission pursuant to procedures set out in FCC Rules and Regulations Subpart E of Part 68 You should also know that e Your machine is not designed to be connected to a digital PBX system e Ifyou intend to use a computer modem or fax modem on the same phone line as your machine you may experience transmission and rece
151. an Manager program information and installed scan driver s condition Also you can change scan settings and add or delete the folders where scanned documents to computer are save in Samsung Scan Manager program Scan Manager program can only be used in the Window and Macintosh system If you use the Macintosh See Software section 1 Press Start gt Control Panel gt Samsung Scan Manager Samsung Scan Manager Administration appears L You can open Samsung Scan Manager by pressing the Smart Panel icon s right in the window task bar 2 Select the appropriate machine from the Samsung Scan Manager Press Properties 4 Set Scan Button allows you to change the saving destination and scan settings add or delete application program and format files You can change the scanning machine by using Change Port Local or Network 5 Press OK after setting is done o Scanning to application programs 1 Make sure that your machine and computer are turned on and properly connected to each other 2 Place a single original face down on the scanner glass For details about loading an original See Loading originals on page 28 3 Press Scan to Ready to Scan appears on the top line of the display 4 Press the left right arrow until Scan to PC appears on the bottom line of the display and press OK Scanning 37 5 Press the left right arrow until Local PC appears on the bottom line of the display and press OK If the machine connected to a
152. an be found in the Network Configuration Report IP Address Enter a new IP address for your printer the same as the computer s P address except for the last number For example if your computer s IP address is 192 168 1 150 enter 192 168 1 X X is number between 1 and 254 other than the computer s address e Subnet Mask Enter this exactly the same as the computer s Subnet Mask e Default Gateway Enter this exactly the same as the computer s Default Gateway 6 Click Apply and then click OK The machine will automatically print the Configuration report Confirm that all the settings are correct 7 Click Exit to close the SetIP program 8 If necessary restart the computer s firewall Web Service You may need to reset the machine to the factory default settings when machine that you are using is connected to new network environment Restoring factory default settings using SyncThru Web Service 1 Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer Safari or Firefox and enter your machine s new IP address in the browser window For example http 192 168 1 133 2 When the SyncThru Web Service window opens click Network Settings 3 Click Reset Then click Clear for network ISyncThry re Armaan Mentone Serge satan lamng Mantenere buson gt het anasa Cat Setting Tce Network Raw TOR LPR SF DP Factary Deteut For Wiretess Osiy Coma F teeny 4 Turn off and restart
153. and the printer stops printing A Samsung does not recommend using non genuine Samsung toner cartridge such as refilled or remanufactured Samsung cannot guarantee non genuine Samsung toner cartridge s quality Service or repair required as a result of using non genuine Samsung toner cartridges will not be covered under the machine warranty Introduction 20 MENU OVERVIEW The control panel provides access to various menus to set up the machine or use the machine s functions These menus can be accessed by pressing Menu Refer to the following diagram Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models If so it is not applicable to your machine Reduce Enlarge Darkness Original Type Layout Adjust Bkgd Gray Enhance 21 Introduction Change Default Copies Copy Collation Reduce Enlarge Darkness Original Type USB feature Scan Size Original Type Resolution Scan Color Scan Format Change Default USB Default TCP IP Ethernet Speed Clear Setting Network Info Machine Setup Language Power Save Timeout Altitude Adj Auto Continue Import Setting Export Setting Paper Setup Paper Size Paper Type Sound Volume Key Sound Alarm Sound Report All Report Configuration Supplies Info Network Info Maintenance CLR Empty Msg Supplies Life Color Serial Number Clear Setting All Settings Copy Setup Scan Setup System Setup Network Setup SUPPLIED SOFTWARE After you have set up yo
154. ard appears and press OK Press the left right arrow to select On and press OK Enter the number of the fax machine to which faxes are to be sent and press OK Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Subsequent sent faxes will be forwarded to the specified fax machine NoOoarpo oo Forwarding sent faxes to email address You can set the machine to send copies of all outgoing faxes to a specified destination in addition to the email address you entered 1 Press Fax 2 Press Menu until Fax Feature appears on the bottom line of the display and press OK Press the left right arrow until Forward appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until E mail appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until Send Forward appears and press OK Press the left right arrow to select On and press OK Enter your email address and press OK Enter the email address to which faxes are to be sent and press OK Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Subsequent sent faxes will be forwarded to the specified email address PON Oo o Forwarding received faxes to another fax machine You can set your machine to forward incoming faxes to another fax number during a specified time period When a fax arrives at your machine it is stored in memory Then the machine dials the fax number that you have specified and sends the fax 1 Press Fax 2 Press Menu until Fax Feature appears on the bottom line of the display and press OK
155. are 5 Devices and Printers 3 For Windows 2000 XP 2003 2008 and Vista double click your machine For Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2 right click your printer icon context menus See what s printing 4 From the Document menu select Cancel Z You can also access this window by simply double clicking the printer icon at the bottom right corner of the Windows desktop You can also cancel the current job by pressing Stop Clear on the control panel Canceling a print job Basic printing_ 51 faxing This chapter gives you information about using your machine as a fax machine This chapter includes e Sending a fax e Receiving a fax We recommend you to use traditional analog phone services PSTN public switched telephone network when connecting telephone lines to use Fax If you use other Internet services DSL ISDN VoIP you can improve the connection quality by using the Micro filter The Micro filter eliminates unnecessary noise signals and improves connection quality or Internet quality Since the DSL Micro filter is not provided with the machine contact your Internet Service provider for use on DSL Micro filter LINE EXT 2 1 cj A t x 1 Line Port 2 Micro filter 3 DSL modem Telephone line Z You cannot use this machine as a fax via the internet phone For more information ask the internet service provider SENDING A FAX Setting the fax heade
156. ass to use this feature l Press ID Copy 2 Place the front side of an original facing down on the scanner glass where arrows indicate as shown and close the scanner lid ad Place Front Side and Press Start appears on the display 4 Press Color Start or Black Start Your machine begins scanning the front side and shows Place Back Side and Press Start 5 Turn the original over and place it on the scanner glass where arrows indicate as shown Then close the scanner lid 6 Press Color Start to begin color copying Or press Black Start to begin black and white copying L e Ifyou don t press the Color Start or Black Start button only the front side will be copied e Ifthe original is larger than the printable area some portions may not be printed e Ifyou press Stop Clear or if no buttons are pressed for approximately 30 seconds the machine cancels the copy job and returns to ready mode USING SPECIAL COPY FEATURES You can use the following copy features 2 up or 4 up copying Your machine can print 2 or 4 original images reduced to fit onto one sheet of paper 1 i 1 Press Copy Ui all 2 Press Menu until Copy Feature appears on the MUTA Ut bottom line of the display and press OK ll AI 3 Press the left right arrow until Layout appears and press OK 4 Press the left right arrow until 2 Up or 4 Up appears and press OK 5 Press Stop Clea
157. ate the wireless device unless all covers and shields are in place and the system is fully assembled Wireless devices are not user serviceable Do not modify them in any way Modification to a wireless device will void the authorization to use it Contact manufacturer for service Only use drivers approved for the country in which the device will be used See the manufacturer System Restoration Kit or contact manufacturer Technical Support for additional information 13_Safety information OPENSSL LICENSE Copyright c 1998 2001 The OpenSSL Project All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org 4 The names OpenSSL Toolkit and OpenSSL Project must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission For writte
158. ate to be answered by the fax machine Unless you change it this ringing pattern will continue to be recognized and answered as a fax call and all other ringing patterns will be forwarded to the extension telephone or answering machine plugged into the EXT socket You can easily suspend or change DRPD at any time Before using the DRPD option Distinctive Ring service must be installed on your telephone line by the telephone company To set up DRPD you will need another telephone line at your location or someone available to dial your fax number from outside To set up the DRPD mode 1 Press Fax 2 Press Menu until Fax Setup appears on the bottom line of the display and press OK 3 Press the left right arrow until Receiving appears and press OK 4 Press the left right arrow until DRPD Mode appears and press OK Waiting Ring appears on the display 5 Call your fax number from another telephone It is not necessary to place the call from a fax machine Faxing_ 55 6 When your machine begins to ring do not answer the call The machine requires several rings to learn the pattern When the machine completes learning the display shows Completed DRPD Setup If the DRPD setup fails Error DRPD Ring appears Press OK when DRPD Mode appears and start over from step 4 7 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode L e DRPD must be set up again if you re assign your fax number or connect the machine to another telephone line e Afte
159. atically stretched to cover 4 physical pages l From the Layout tab choose Booklet Printing from the Layout Type drop down list PRN aLe NOTE The Booklet Printing option is not available for all paper sizes In order to find out the available paper size for UD Ch this feature select the paper size in the Size option on the a22 Paper tab then check if the Booklet Printing in a Layout N IA Type drop down list on the Layout tab is activated A 3x3 Specify an overlap in millimeters or inches to make it 3 Click the Paper tab and select the paper source size and easier to pasting the sheets together type 0 15 inches 4 Click OK and print the document A ESA D 5 After printing fold and staple the pages D ln i 0 15 inches 4 Click the Paper tab select the paper source size and type 5 Click OK and print the document You can complete the poster by pasting the sheets together 18 Advanced Printing Printing on Both Sides of Paper You can print on both sides of a sheet of paper Before printing decide how you want your document oriented The options are e None Long Edge which is the conventional layout used in book binding e Short Edge which is the type often used with calendars no giji IN pug Ft iil ku r
160. ature adds start and end banners and changes the number of pages per sheet Text allows you to specify the page margins and set the text options such as spacing or columns Graphics allows you to set image options that are used when printing images files such as color options image size or image position Device allows you to set the print resolution paper source and destination 5 Click Apply to apply the changes and close the Properties window 6 Click OK in the LPR GUI window to start printing 7 The Printing window appears allowing you to monitor the status of your print job To abort the current job click Cancel Printing Files You can print many different types of files on the Samsung machine device using the standard CUPS way directly from the command line interface The CUPS Ipr utility allows you do that But the drivers package replaces the standard Ipr tool by a much more user friendly LPR GUI program To print any document file 1 Type lpr lt file_ name gt from the Linux shell command line and press Enter The LPR GUI window appears When you type only lpr and press Enter the Select file s to print window appears first J ust select any files you want to print and click Open 2 In the LPR GUI window select your printer from the list and change the printer and print job properties For details about the properties window see page 33 3 Click OK to start printing Scanning a D
161. ault printer and change the port name of each printer Click Next 13 After the installation is finished a window appears asking you to print a test page and to register yourself as a user of Samsung Printers in order to receive information from Samsung If you desire select the corresponding checkbox es and click Finish Troubleshooting When installing the Printer Software CD and setting the wireless network the error window may appears Follow the next solutions Printer Not Found e Your computer or printer may not turned on Turn on your computer or printer e USB cable is not connected between your computer and printer Connect printer to your computer using USB cable The printer does not support wireless network Check the printer manual and prepare wireless network printer Connecting Failure Not Found SSID e The printer is unable to search network name SSID which is selected or entered name form you Check the network name SSID on your access point and retry to connect e Your access point is not turned on Turn on your access point Connecting Failure Invalid Security You configured security incorrectly Check the configured security on your access point and printer Connecting Failure General Connection Error Your computer is not receiving a signal form your printer Check the USB cable and your printer power Connecting Failure Connected Wired Network Your printer is connected wired network cable
162. ausing it to bend For paper smaller than Letter sized return the paper guides to their original positions and adjust the paper length guide and paper width guide If the paper that you need to print is shorter than length 222 mm 8 74 inches press and unlatch the guide lock in the tray push the tray in manually Adjust the paper length guide and paper width guide 64 e Donot push the paper width guides far enough to cause the materials to warp e If you do not adjust the paper width guides it may cause paper jams Loading originals and print media 41 6 Slide the tray 1 back into the machine The tray is preset to Letter or A4 size depending on your country To 7 After loading paper set the paper type and size for the tray See Setting change the size to A4 or Letter you must adjust the lever and paper width the paper size and type on page 43 guide properly K gt Due to insufficient paper in the tray the paper length guide can be 1 Pull the tray out of the machine Open the paper cover and remove pushed to inside load enough paper e If you experience problems with paper feed load a paper into the tray one by one e You can load previously printed paper The printed side should be 2 si pu kaha al ba ne Ek hold the lever at thie DacK orhe facing up with an uncurled edge at the front If you experience problems with paper feed turn the paper around Note that print quality is no
163. be printed with heat resistant ink paper that will not melt vaporize or release hazardous emissions when subjected to the printer s fusing temperature for 0 1 second Check your machine s specification to view the fusing temperature see General specifications on page 66 e Letterhead ink must be non flammable and should not adversely affect printer rollers e Forms and letterhead should be sealed in a moisture proof wrapping to prevent changes during storage e Before you load preprinted paper such as forms and letterhead verify that the ink on the paper is dry During the fusing process wet ink can come off preprinted paper reducing print quality AN Using photographic paper or coated paper may cause problems requiring repairs Such repairs are not covered by Samsung s warranty or service agreements CHANGING THE SIZE OF THE PAPER IN THE PAPER TRAY To load longer sizes of paper such as Legal sized paper you need to adjust the paper guides to extend the paper tray To change the tray 1 size to other size you must adjust the paper length guide properly 1 Pull the tray 1 out of the machine Open the paper cover and remove paper from the tray 1 if necessary 2 Pressing and unlatching the guide lock in the top of the tray pull the tray out manually 31 _Loading originals and print media 4 Slide the paper length guide until it lightly touches the end of the paper stack Squeeze the paper width
164. careful not to pinch your fingers 9 Pull down the fuser lever 10 Close the rear cover Printing automatically resumes 5 Pull up the fuser lever 1 fuser lever 6 Open the scan unit 7 Carefully take the jammed paper out of the machine Troubleshooting_ 54 UNDERSTANDING DISPLAY MESSAGES Messages appear on the control panel display to indicate the machine s status or errors Refer to the tables below to understand the messages meaning and correct the problem if necessary Messages and their meanings are listed in alphabetical order 1 If the message is not in the table cycle the power and try the job again If the problem persists call for service e When you call for service it is very convenient to provide the service representative with the contents of display message e xxx indicates the media type MESSAGE MEANING SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS Low Heat Error Cycle Power There is a problem in the fuser unit Turn the power switch off and on If the problem persists call for service LSU Motor Error Cycle Power A problem has occurred in the LSU Laser Scanning Unit Turn the power switch off and on If the problem persists call for service LSU Hsync Error A problem has Turn the power switch SUGGESTED MESSAGE MEANING SOLUTIONS ADC Not A problem has Turn the power switch Confirm Error occurred in the ADC in the machine
165. ced does not present a hazard to the operator However it is advisable that the machine be operated in a well ventilated area If you need additional information about ozone request your nearest Samsung dealer MERCURY SAFETY Contains Mercury Dispose According to Local State or Federal Laws U S A only POWER SAVER RECYCLING This printer contains advanced energy conservation technology that reduces power consumption when it is not in active use When the printer does not receive data for an extended period of time power consumption is automatically lowered ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered U S marks For more information on the ENERGY STAR program see http www energystar gov nas Recycle or dispose of the packaging material for this product in an environmentally responsible manner CORRECT DISPOSAL OF THIS PRODUCT WASTE ELECTRICAL 8 ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT bd Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate collection systems This marking on the product accessories or literature indicates that the product and its electronic accessories e g charger headset USB cable should not be disposed of with other household waste at the end of their working life To prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncontrolled waste disposal please separate these items from other types of waste and recycle them responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse
166. click Q 27 Using Smart Panel Using Your Printer in Linux You can use your machine in a Linux environment This chapter includes e Getting Started e Installing the Unified Linux Driver e Using SetlP program e Using the Unified Driver Configurator e Configuring Printer Properties e Printing a Document e Scanning a Document Getting Started You need to download Linux software package from the Samsung website www samsung com printer to install the printer softwares Samsung s Unified Linux Driver package contains printer and scanner drivers providing the ability to print documents and scan images The package also delivers powerful applications for configuring your machine and further processing of the scanned documents After the driver is installed on your Linux system the driver package allows you to monitor a number of machine devices via fast ECP parallel ports and USB simultaneously The acquired documents can then be edited printed on the same local or network machine devices sent by e mail uploaded to an FTP site or transferred to an external OCR system The Unified Linux Driver package is supplied with a smart and flexible installation program You don t need to search for additional components that might be necessary for the Unified Linux Driver software all required packages will be carried onto your system and installed automatically this is possible on a wide set of the most popular L
167. cludes cryptographic software written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com The word cryptographic can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic related 4 Ifyou include any Windows specific code or a derivative thereof from the apps directory application code you must include an acknowledgement This product includes software written by Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed i e this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence including the GNU Public Licence Safety information_14 contents 15 Contents INTRODUCTION GETTING STARTED LOADING ORIGINA
168. consumer will encounter device busy response This can usually happen while starting scan procedure and appropriate message box will be displayed To identify the source of the problem you should open ports configuration and select the port assigned to your scanner port s symbol dev mfp0 corresponds to LP 0 designation displayed in the scanners options dev mfp1 relates to LP 1 and so on USB ports start at dev mfp4 so scanner on USB 0 relates to dev mfp4 respectively and so forth sequentially In the Selected port pane you can see if the port is occupied by some other application If this is the case you should wait for completion of the current job or should press Release port button if you are sure that the present port s owner is not functioning properly 64 Refer to Linux User s Guide that came with your computer for further information on Linux error messages Common Macintosh problems CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS The printer does not print PDF file correctly Some parts of graphics text or illustrations are missing Incompatibility between the PDF file and the Acrobat products Printing the PDF file as an image may solve this problem Turn on Print As Image from the Acrobat printing options 7 It will take longer to print when L you print a PDF file as an image The document has printed but the print job has not disappeared from the spooler in Mac OS 10 3 2 Update
169. ct a service representative Vertical lines If black vertical streaks appear on the page e The drum inside the toner cartridge has probably been scratched Remove the toner cartridge and install a new one See Replacing the toner cartridge on page 48 If white vertical streaks appear on the page e The surface of the LSU part inside the machine may be dirty Clean the LSU contact a service representative Background scatter Background scatter results from bits of toner randomly distributed on the printed page e The paper may be too damp Try printing with a different batch of paper Do not open packages of paper until necessary so that the paper does not absorb too much moisture f background scatter occurs on an envelope change the printing layout to avoid printing over areas that have overlapping seams on the reverse side Printing on seams can cause problems f background scatter covers the entire surface area of a printed page adjust the print resolution through your software application or the printer properties Color or Black background AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc If the amount of background shading becomes unacceptable e Change to a lighter weight paper See Selecting print media on page 28 e Check the machine s environment very dry low humidity or high humidity higher than 80 RH conditions can increase the amount
170. ct and its electronic accessories e g charger headset USB cable should not be disposed of with other household waste at the end of their working life To prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncontrolled waste disposal please separate these items from other types of waste and recycle them responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchased this product or their local government office for details of where and how they can take these items for environmentally safe recycling Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and conditions of the purchase contract This product and its electronic accessories should not be mixed with other commercial wastes for disposal CORRECT DISPOSAL OF BATTERIES IN THIS PRODUCT ps Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate battery return systems This marking on the battery manual or packaging indicates that the batteries in this product should not be disposed with other household waste at the end of their working life Where marked the chemical symbols Hg Cd or Pb indicate that the battery contains mercury cadmium or lead above the reference levels in EC Directive 2006 66 If batteries are not properly disposed of these substances can cause harm to human health or the environment To protect natural resources and to promote material reuse
171. ction Save time and money To save paper you can print multiple pages on one single sheet of paper This machine automatically conserves electricity by substantially reducing power consumption when not in use To save paper you can print on both sides of the paper double sided printing See Software section Print in various environments You can print with various operating system such as Windows Linux and Macintosh systems Your machine is equipped with a USB interface and a network interface Copy originals in several formats Your machine can print multiple image copies from the original document on a single page There are special functions to erase catalog and newspaper background The print quality and image size may be adjusted and enhanced at the same time 2_Features of your new laser product tett 3 pag EREE Scan the originals and send it right away Scan in color and use the precise compressions of JPEG TIFF and PDF formats e Quickly scan and send files to multiple destinations using Networks scanning Set a specific time to transmit a Fax e You can specify a certain time to transmit the fax and also send the fax to several stored destinations After the transmission the machine may print out the fax reports according to the setting FEATURES BY MODELS The machine is designed to support all of your document needs from printing and copying to mo
172. d paper is recommended e Check for copy paper or pieces of copy paper remaining in the machine after a paper jam has been cleared CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS The scanner does e Make sure that you place the original to be not work scanned face down on the scanner glass or face up in the ADF There may not be enough available memory to hold the document you want to scan Try the Prescan function to see if that works Try lowering the scan resolution rate Check that the USB cable is connected properly Make sure that the USB cable is not defective Switch the cable with a known good cable If necessary replace the cable Check that the scanner is configured correctly Check scan setting in the SmarThru Configuration or the application you want to use to make certain that the scanner job is being sent to the correct port Toner cartridge produces fewer copies than expected before running out of toner Your originals may contain pictures solids or heavy lines For example your originals may be forms newsletters books or other documents that use more toner The machine may be turned on and off frequently The scanner lid may be left open while copies are being made The unit scans very slowly Check if the machine is printing received data If so scan the document after the received data has been printed Graphics are scanned more slowly than text Communication speed slows in sca
173. d by clicking the Help button in the printer properties window These help screens give detailed information about the printer features provided by the printer driver You can also click if from the upper right corner of the window and then click on any setting Advanced Printing This chapter explains printing options and advanced printing tasks NOTE e Your printer driver Properties window that appears in this User s Guide may differ depending on the printer in use However the composition of the printer properties window is similar If you need to know the exact name of your printer you can check the supplied CD ROM This chapter includes e Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet of Paper N Up Printing e Printing Posters e Printing Booklets e Printing on Both Sides of Paper e Printing a Reduced or Enlarged Document e Fitting Your Document to a Selected Paper Size e Using Watermarks e Using Overlays Advanced Printing 17 Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet of Paper N Up Printing You can select the number of pages to print on a single sheet of paper To print more than one page per sheet the pages will be reduced in size and arranged in the order you specify You can print up to 16 pages on one sheet 1 To change the print settings from your software application access printer properties See Printing a Document on page 12 2 From the Layou
174. d dial number press Back 5 Enter the name you want and press OK For details on how to enter alphanumeric characters see Entering characters using the number keypad on page 36 6 Enter the fax number you want and press OK 7 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Editing speed dial numbers 1 Press Address Book until New amp Edit appears on the bottom line of the display and press OK Press OK when Speed Dial appears Enter the speed dial number you want to edit and press OK Change the name and press OK Change the fax number and press OK Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode oa PWN Using speed dial numbers When you are prompted to enter a destination number while sending a fax enter the speed dial number at which you stored the number you want e Fora one digit 0 9 speed dial number press and hold the corresponding digit button on the number keypad e Fora two or three digit speed dial number press the first digit button s and then hold down the last digit button You can also search through memory for an entry by pressing Address Book See Searching Address Book for an entry on page 59 Group dial numbers If you frequently send the same document to several destinations you can group these destinations and set them under a group dial number You can then use a group dial number to send a document to all of the destinations within the group You can set up to 200 0 through 199 group dial
175. device has certain features example security key security partition booting disk password settings and so forth do not use the USB memory device with your machine The files stored in the USB memory device may be corrupted or the machine may not automatically detect it For details about these features see device s User s Guide SCANNING TO A USB MEMORY DEVICE You can scan a document and save the scanned image onto a USB memory device There are two ways of doing this you can scan to the device using the default settings or you can customize your own scan settings A If your USB memory device has certain features example security key security partition booting disk password settings and so forth do not use the USB memory device with your machine The files stored in the USB memory device may be corrupted or the machine may not automatically detect it For details about these features see device s User s Guide Scanning ths 2 Po Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine Load originals face up into the ADF or place a single original face down on the scanner glass For details about loading an original See Loading originals on page 37 Press Scan Email Press OK when Scan to USB appears on the bottom line of the display Press Color Start or Black Start when Ready to Scan to USB appears Regardless of the button you press the color mode is decided as cust
176. digital apparatus as set out in the interference causing equipment standard entitled Digital Apparatus ICES 003 of the Industry and Science Canada Cet appareil num rique respecte les limites de bruits radio lectriques applicables aux appareils num riques de Classe B prescrites dans la norme sur le mat riel brouilleur Appareils Num riques ICES 003 dict e par l Industrie et Sciences Canada UNITED STATES OF AMERICA Federal Communications Commission FCC Intentional emitter per FCC Part 15 Low power Radio LAN type devices radio frequency RF wireless communication devices operating in the 2 4 GHz 5 GHz Band may be present embedded in your printer system This section is only applicable if these devices are present Refer to the system label to verify the presence of wireless devices Wireless devices that may be in your system are only qualified for use in the United States of America if an FCC ID number is on the system label The FCC has set a general guideline of 20 cm 8 inches separation between the device and the body for use of a wireless device near the body this does not include extremities This device should be used more than 20 cm 8 inches from the body when wireless devices are on The power output of the wireless device or devices which may be embedded in your printer is well below the RF exposure limits as set by the FCC This transmitter must not be collocated or operation in conjunction wit
177. document Width 5 to 8 5 inches 127 to 216 mm size Length 5 8 to 14 inches 148 to 356 mm Paper input Tray 150 sheets for plain paper 75 g m 20 Ib bond capacity Paper output capacity Face down 80 sheets 75 g m 20 Ib bond Power rating AC 110 127V or AC 220 240 V See the Rating label on the machine for the correct voltage frequency hertz and type of current for your machine e Copier specifications e Facsimile specifications ITEM DESCRIPTION Waste toner Approx 10 000 images container Memory 128 MB Non extendable External 415 x 373 x 342 mm dimension 16 3 x 14 7 x 13 5 inches WxDxH Weight 15 4 Kg 33 95 Ibs Including consumables Package e Paper 2 0 Kg 4 41 Ibs weight e Plastic 0 4 Kg 0 88 Ibs Fusing 180 C 356 F temperature Power consumption Average operating mode Less than 350 W Ready mode Less than 80 W e Power Save mode Less than 15 W a Sound Pressure Level ISO 7779 b Declared yield value in accordance with ISO IEC 19798 The number of ages may be affected by operating environment printing interval media ype and media size c It varies depending on the product configuration Noise Level e Ready mode Background noise level Printing mode Less than 48 dBA Copying mode Less than 52 dBA Boot up time Less than 35 seconds Operating Temperature 10 to 32 C 59 to 89 6 F environment Humidit
178. dress FAX SETUP OPTION DESCRIPTION Send Report You can set your machine to print a confirmation report showing whether a transmission was successful how many pages were sent and more The available options are On Off and On Error which prints only when a transmission is not successful Image TCR This function allows users to know what fax messages have been sent by showing sent messages in the transmission report The first page of the message is turned into an image file than is printed on the transmission report so the users can see what messages have been sent However you can not use this function when sending fax without saving the data in the memory Changing the fax setup options Your machine provides you with various user selectable options for setting up the fax system You can change the default settings for your preferences and needs To change the fax setup options 1 Press Fax 2 Press Menu until Fax Setup appears on the bottom line of the display and press OK 3 Press the left right arrow to select Sending or Receiving and press OK 4 Press the left right arrow until the menu item you want appears and press OK 5 Press the left right arrow until the desired status appears or enter the value for the option you have selected and press OK gt If necessary repeat steps 4 through 5 7 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Sending options Dial Mode
179. dy this does not include extremities This device should be used more than 20 cm 8 inches from the body when wireless devices are on The power output of the wireless device or devices which may be embedded in your printer is well below the RF exposure limits as set by the FCC This transmitter must not be collocated or operation in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter Operation of this device is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Wireless devices are not user serviceable Do not modify them in any way Modification to a wireless device will void the authorization to use it Contact manufacturer for service FCC Statement for Wireless LAN use While installing and operating this transmitter and antenna combination the radio frequency exposure limit of 1mW cm2 may be exceeded at distances close to the antenna installed Therefore the user must maintain a minimum distance of 20cm from the antenna at all times This device cannot be colocated with another transmitter and transmitting antenna 8 Safety information FAX BRANDING The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device to send any message via a telephone facsimile machine unless such message clearly contains in a
180. e Make sure that the network setup for your machine is completed See Setting up the network on page 25 All applications should be closed on your computer before beginning the installation If your IP assignment method is DHCP and IP address can be changed whenever machine in turned on we recommend you to use the Bonjour program Go to the http developer apple com networking bonjour download select the program Bonjour for Windows according to your computer operating system and install the program In case of Mac OS X this program might be already installed in your PC This program will allow you to fix the network parameter automatically This Bonjour program does not support Linux If your IP assignment method is static follow the steps below 1 Insert the Printer Software CD ROM into your CD ROM drive The CD ROM should automatically run and an installation window appears 2 Click Next e Ifthe installation window does not appear click Start gt Run Type X Setup exe replacing X with the letter which represents your drive and click OK e If you use Windows vista Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2 click Start 5 All Programs 5 Accessories 5 Run and type X Setup exe L The installation window may slightly differ if you are reinstalling the driver o Select Typical installation for a network printer and then click Next 4 The list of machines available on the network appears Select the printer yo
181. e Duty cycle is the page quantity which does not affect printer performance for a month Generally the printer has the lifespan limitation such as pages per year The lifespan means the average capacity of print outs usually within the warranty period For example if the duty cycle is 48 000 pages per month assuming 20 working days a printer limits 2 400 pages a day ECM Error Correction Mode ECM is an optional transmission mode built into Class 1 fax machines or fax modems It automatically detects and corrects errors in the fax transmission process that are sometimes caused by telephone line noise Emulation Emulation is a technique of one machine obtaining the same results as another Glossary_ 68 An emulator duplicates the functions of one system with a different system so that the second system behaves like the first system Emulation focuses on exact reproduction of external behavior which is in contrast to simulation which concerns an abstract model of the system being simulated often considering its internal state Ethernet Ethernet is a frame based computer networking technology for local area networks LANs It defines wiring and signaling for the physical layer and frame formats and protocols for the media access control MAC data link layer of the OSI model Ethernet is mostly standardized as IEEE 802 3 It has become the most widespread LAN technology in use during the 1990s to the present EtherTalk
182. e s wireless network part after reviewing the following parts on printing a Network Configuration Report Printing Configuration report You can print a Network Configuration Report from the machine s control panel that will show the current machine s network settings This will help you to set up a network and troubleshooting problems 1 Press Menu until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the display and press OK 2 Press the left right arrow until Report appears and press OK 3 Press the left right arrow until Network Info appears and press OK 4 Press OK when Yes appears to confirm printing Network Configuration Report will then be printed out Please review your machines User s Guide to learn of additional details Using this Network Configuration Report you can find your machine MAC address and IP address For example MAC Address 00 15 99 41 A2 78 IP Address 192 0 0 192 30 Getting started Setting IP address Firstly you have to set up an IP address for network printing and managements In most cases a new IP address will be automatically assigned by a DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Server located on the network In a few situations the IP address must be set manually This is called a static IP and is often required in corporate Intranets for security reasons e DHCP IP assignment Connect your machine to the network and wait a few minutes for the DHCP server to assign an IP address to the
183. e USB connection eFor MAC OS 10 5 10 6 click Default and find the USB connection For MAC OS 10 3 if Auto Select does not work properly select Samsung in Printer Model and your printer name in Model Name For MAC OS 10 4 if Auto Select does not work properly select Samsung in Print Using and your printer name in Model For MAC OS 10 5 10 6 if Auto Select does not work properly select Select a driver to use and your printer name in Print Using Your printer appears on the Printer List and is set as the default printer Click Add 39 Printing NOTES e The Macintosh printer s properties window that appears in this User s Guide may differ depending on the printer in use However the composition of the printer properties window is similar e You can check your printer name in the supplied CD ROM Printing a Document When you print with a Macintosh you need to check the printer software setting in each application you use Follow these steps to print from a Macintosh 1 Open a Macintosh application and select the file you want to print 2 Open the File menu and click Page Setup Document Setup in some applications 3 Choose your paper size orientation scaling and other options and click OK Settings Page Attributes B Format for 4 Make sure that your Paper Size US Letter printer is selected 21 59 cm Orientation fo Na Scale 100 P
184. e and e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures e Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna e Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver e Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected e Consult the dealer or experienced radio TV technician for help A Change or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to oper ate the equipment Canadian Radio Interference Regulations This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from
185. e control panel then the scanned data will be stored in the connected computers My Documents folder When the setup installation is completed then you have installed the Samsung Scan Manager on your computer already This feature can be used via the local connection or the network connection See next section e TWAIN TWAIN is the one of preset imaging applications Scanning an image launches the selected application enabling you to control the scanning process See Software section This feature can be used via the local connection or the network connection See Software section e Samsung SmarThru 4 This feature is the accompanying software for your machine You can use this program to scan images or documents and this feature can be used via the local connection or the network connection See Software section e WIA WIA stands for Windows Images Acquisition To use this feature your computer must be connected directly to the machine with a USB cable See Software section e Email You can send the scanned image as an attachment to an email See Registering authorized users on page 48 e Changing the settings for each scan job e Changing the default scan settings Setting up Address Book SCANNING FROM THE CONTROL PANEL Your machine offers you to scan from the control panel and easily send the scanned document to connected computer s My Documents folder In order to use this function your machine and computer must be connect
186. e enclosed items Remove the tape holding the machine tightly Load paper Make sure that all the cables are connected to the machine Turn the machine on PAWN When you move the machine do not tilt or turn it upside down Otherwise the inside of the machine may be contaminated by toner which can cause damage to the machine or bad print quality This equipment will be inoperable when mains power fails SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS Before you begin ensure that your system meets the following requirements Windows Your machine supports the following Windows operating systems REQUIREMENT RECOMMENDED Macintosh REQUIREMENT RECOMMENDED OPERATING SYSTEM FREE CPU RAM HDD SPACE Mac OS X e Intel Processor e 128 MB fora 1 GB 10 3 10 4 e Power PC G4 Power PC G5 based Mac 512 MB e 512 MB for an Intel based Mac 1 GB Mac OS X 10 5 Intel Processor 512 MB 1 GB 1 GB e 867 MHz or faster Power PC G4 G5 Mac OS X 10 6 Intel processors 1 GB 2 GB 1 GB Linux ITEM REQUIREMENTS Operating system RedHat 8 0 9 0 32bit RedHat Enterprise Linux WS 4 5 32 64bit Fedora Core 1 7 32 64bit Mandrake 9 2 32bit 10 0 10 1 32 64bit Mandriva 2005 2006 2007 32 64bit SuSE Linux 8 2 9 0 9 1 32bit SuSE Linux 9 2 9 3 10 0 10 1 10 2 32 64bit SuSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 9 10 32 64bit Ubuntu 6 06 6 10 7 04 32 64bit
187. e inner devices within the machine which means the transfer belt may be dirty Clean the inside of your machine Contact a service representative e The paper path may need cleaning Contact a service representative Vertical lines If black vertical streaks appear on the page e The drum inside the toner cartridge has probably been scratched Remove the toner cartridge and install a new one See Replacing the toner cartridge on page 68 If white vertical streaks appear on the page e The surface of the LSU part inside the machine may be dirty Clean the LSU contact a service representative Background scatter Background scatter results from bits of toner randomly distributed on the printed page e The paper may be too damp Try printing with a different batch of paper Do not open packages of paper until necessary so that the paper does not absorb too much moisture f background scatter occurs on an envelope change the printing layout to avoid printing over areas that have overlapping seams on the reverse side Printing on seams can cause problems f background scatter covers the entire surface area of a printed page adjust the print resolution through your software application or the printer properties Color or Black background AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc If the amount of background shading becomes unacceptable e Change to a lighter w
188. e machine off then wait a few minutes for the machine to cool 2 Using the handle completely open the front cover 3 Grasp the handles on the toner cartridge and pull to remove four cartridges from the machine 5 Pull the imaging unit out of the machine using the groove on the front of the imaging unit 6 Take a new imaging unit out of its package Remove the protective devices on both sides of the imaging unit and the paper protecting the surface of the imaging unit A e Don t use sharp objects such as a knife or scissors to open the imaging unit package You could damage the surface of the imaging unit e Be careful not to scratch the surface of the imaging unit To prevent damage do not expose the imaging unit to light for more than a few minutes Cover it with a piece of paper to protect it if necessary 7 Holding the groove on the front of the imaging unit push imaging unit in to the machine Maintenance_ 69 8 Insert the waste toner container into position and then push it to make sure that it is firmly seated in place 10 Close the front cover firmly AN If the front cover is not completely closed the machine will not operate Please make sure all toner cartridges are installed properly If any toner cartridge is installed improperly the front cover do not close 11 Turn the machine on L It may takes few minutes for your machine to get ready 70 _Maintenance REPL
189. e machine warranty MENU OVERVIEW The control panel provides access to various menus to set up the machine or use the machine s functions These menus can be accessed by pressing Menu Refer to the following diagram Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models If so it is not applicable to your machine Fax Feature Fax Setup Fax Setup Scan Feature Continued Copy Feature Copy Setup Darkness Sending Stamp RCV Name Reduce Enlarge Change Default USB feature Resolution Redial Times RCV Start Code Darkness Copies Scan Size Multi Send Redial Term Auto Reduction Original Type Copy Collation Original Type Delay Send Prefix Dial Discard Size Layout Reduce Enlarge Resolution Priority Send ECM Mode Junk Fax Setup Adjust Bkgd Darkness Scan Color Forward Send Report DRPD Mode Gray Enhance Original Type Scan Format Secure Receive Image TCR Change Default E mail Feature Add Page Dial Mode Resolution Scan Size Cancel Job Receiving Darkness Original Type Receive Mode Auto Report Resolution Ring to Answer Scan Color Network System Setup Continued System Setup Continued TCP IP Clear Setting Report Ethernet Speed All Settings All Report Wireless Fax Setup Configuration Clear Setting Copy Setup Supplies Info Network Info Scan Setup Address Book System Setup Send Report a CLX 3175FW Network Setup Sent Report only Address Book Fax RCV Report Sent Report Schedule Jobs
190. e message box will be displayed To identify the source of the problem you should open ports configuration and select the port assigned to your scanner port s symbol dev mfp0 corresponds to LP 0 designation displayed in the scanners options dev mfp1 relates to LP 1 and so on USB ports start at dev mfp4 so scanner on USB 0 relates to dev mfp4 respectively and so forth sequentially In the Selected port pane you can see if the port is occupied by some other application If this is the case you should wait for completion of the current job or should press Release port button if you are sure that the present port s owner is not functioning properly Z Refer to Linux User s Guide that came with your computer for further information on Linux error messages Common Macintosh problems CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS The printer does not print PDF file correctly Some parts of graphics text or illustrations are missing Incompatibility between the PDF file and the Acrobat products Printing the PDF file as an image may solve this problem Turn on Print As Image from the Acrobat printing options 77 It will take longer to print when you print a PDF file as an image The document has printed but the print job has not disappeared from the spooler in Mac OS 10 3 2 Update your Mac OS to OS 10 3 3 or higher Some letiers are not displayed normally during the Cover page printing This prob
191. e page printer driver cleaning If a vertical white streak or faded area appears e The toner supply is low You may be able to temporarily extend the toner cartridge life See Replacing the toner cartridge on page 48 If this does not improve the print quality install a new toner cartridge e The paper may not meet paper specifications for example the paper is too moist or too rough See Selecting print media on page 28 e Ifthe entire page is light the print resolution setting is too low Adjust the print resolution See the help screen of the e Acombination of faded or smeared defects may indicate that the toner cartridge needs e The surface of the LSU part inside the machine may be dirty Clean the LSU contact a service representative Toner specks AaBbCe Aa3bCe AaskCc AaBbCo AabpCe page 28 e The paper may not meet specifications for example the paper is too moist or too rough See Selecting print media on e The paper path may need cleaning See Cleaning the inside on page 45 Troubleshooting 58 CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS Dropouts AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbOc If faded areas generally rounded occur randomly on the page e A single sheet of paper may be defective Try reprinting the job e The moisture content of the paper is uneven or the paper has moist spots o
192. e paper pull the jammed paper out gently and slowly Follow the instructions in the following sections to clear the jam In the tray 1 1 Open and close the front cover The jammed paper is automatically ejected from the machine If the paper does not exit go to the next step 2 Pull the tray 1 out of the machine If the paper does not move when you pull or if you do not see the paper in this area check the paper exit area See In the paper exit area on page 74 4 Insert the tray 1 into the machine until it snaps into place Printing automatically resumes In the fuser unit area If paper is jammed in the fuser unit area follow the next steps to release the jammed paper 1 Open the scan unit Troubleshooting_ 73 2 Open the inner cover Do not touch the fuser inside the inner cover It is hot and could cause burns The fuser s operating temperature is 180 C 356 F Take care when removing paper from the machine 4 Close the inner cover 5 Lowering down the scan unit gently and slowly until it is completely closed Make sure that it is securely latched Be careful not to pinch your fingers N If the scan unit is not completely closed the machine will not operate 74 Troubleshooting In the paper exit area 1 Open and close the front cover The jammed paper is automatically ejected from the machine 2 Gently pull the paper out of the output tray If you do not see the jam
193. e print settings from your software application access printer properties See Printing a Document on page 12 2 From the Extras tab click the Edit button in the Watermark section The Edit Watermark window appears 3 Select the watermark you want to delete from the Current Watermarks list and click Delete 4 Click OK until you exit the Print window e WORLD BEST WORLD BEST Using Overlays What is an Overlay An overlay is text and or images stored in the computer hard disk drive HDD as a special file format that can be printed on any document Overlays are often used to take the place of preprinted forms and letterhead paper Rather than using preprinted letterhead you can create an overlay containing the exact same information that is currently on your letterhead To print a letter with your company s letterhead you do not need to load preprinted letterhead paper in the printer You need only tell the printer to print the letterhead overlay on your document Creating a New Page Overlay To use a page overlay you must create a new page overlay containing your logo or image 1 Create or open a document containing text or an image for use in a new page overlay Position the items exactly as you wish them to appear when printed as an overlay To save the document as an overlay access printer properties See Printing a Document on page 12 Click the
194. e refer to the user s guide of the software e If scanning does not operate in Image Capture update Mac OS to the latest version I mage Capture operates propery in Mac OS X 10 3 9 or higher and Mac OS X 10 4 7 or higher Setting scan information in Scan Manager You can find out about Scan Manager program information and installed scan driver s condition Also you can change scan settings and add or delete the folders where scanned documents to computer are save in Scan Manager program 1 Open Scan Manager in Smart Panel menu on Status bar 2 Set Scan Button allows you to change the saving destination and scan settings add or delete application program and format files You can change the scanning machine by using Change port Local or Network 3 Press OK after setting is done Using Your Printer with a Macintosh SOFTWARE SECTION NDEX A advanced printing use 17 B booklet printing 18 C canceling scan 25 D document print Macintosh 40 Windows 12 double sided printing 19 Extras properties set 16 F favorites settings use 16 G Graphics properties set 15 H help use 16 install printer driver Macintosh 37 Windows 4 installing Linux software 28 L Layout properties set Windows 14 Linux driver install 28 printer properties 32 printing 33 scanning 34 M Macintosh driver install 37 uninstall 37 printing 40 scanning 42 setting up the printer 38 MFP driver
195. ealer or telephone and electronic specialty stores e When programming emergency numbers and or making test calls to emergency numbers use a non emergency number to advise the emergency service dispatcher of your intentions The dispatcher will give you further instructions on how to actually test the emergency number e This machine may not be used on coin service or party lines e This machine provides magnetic coupling to hearing aids You may safely connect this equipment to the telephone network by means of a standard modular jack USOC RJ 11C Safety information 10 REPLACING THE FITTED PLUG FOR UK ONLY Important The mains lead for this machine is fitted with a standard BS 1363 13 amp plug and has a 13 amp fuse When you change or examine the fuse you must re fit the correct 13 amp fuse You then need to replace the fuse cover If you have lost the fuse cover do not use the plug until you have another fuse cover Contact the people from you purchased the machine The 13 amp plug is the most widely used type in the UK and should be suitable However some buildings mainly old ones do not have normal 13 amp plug sockets You need to buy a suitable plug adaptor Do not remove the moulded plug A If you cut off the moulded plug get rid of it straight away You cannot rewire the plug and you may receive an electric shock if you plug it into a socket Important warning You must earth this machine The wires in the mains le
196. ears Press the left right arrow until the folder or file you want appears and press OK Oo PON Z If you see D in the front of a folder name there are one or more files or folders in the selected folder If you selected a file the display shows the size of the file for about 2 seconds Go to the next step If you selected a folder press the left right arrow until the file you want to delete appears and press OK 62 Using USB memory device 6 Press OK when Yes appears to confirm your selection 7 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Formatting a USB memory device 1 Insert the USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine Press Direct USB Press the left right arrow until File Manage appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until Format appears and press OK Press OK when Yes appears to confirm your selection Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode oa PWN Viewing the USB memory status You can check the amount of memory space available for scanning and saving documents 1 Insert the USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine 2 Press Direct USB 3 Press the left right arrow until Check Space appears and press OK The available memory space appears on the display 4 Press Stop Clear to return to the ready mode PRINTING DIRECTLY FROM A DIGITAL CAMERA This machine supports the PictBridge feature You can print images directly from any PictBridge compatible d
197. ecure receiving mode on page 56 Receiving automatically in Fax mode Your machine is preset to Fax mode at the factory When you receive a fax the machine answers the call on a specified number of rings and automatically receives the fax To change the number of rings see Ring to Answer on page 57 Receiving manually in Tel mode You can receive a fax call by pressing On Hook Dial and then pressing Black Start or Color Start when you hear a fax tone from the remote machine The machine begins receiving a fax and returns to ready mode when the reception is completed Receiving manually using an extension telephone This features works best when you are using an extension telephone connected to the EXT socket on the back of your machine You can receive a fax from someone you are talking to on the extension telephone without going to the fax machine When you receive a call on the extension phone and hear fax tones press the keys 9 on the extension phone The machine receives the fax Press the buttons slowly in sequence If you still hear the fax tone from the remote machine try pressing 9 once again 9 is the remote receive code preset at the factory The first and the last asterisks are fixed but you can change the middle number to whatever you wish For details about changing the code see Rcv Start Code on page 57 Receiving automatically in Ans Fax mode To use this mode you must attach an answering
198. ed computing performance application software connecting method media type media size and Job complexity b Visit www samsungprinter com to download the latest software version ITEM DESCRIPTION Compatibility TWAIN standard WIA standard Scanning method Color CIS Resolution TWAIN 1 200 x 1 200 dpi standard Up to 4 800 x 4 800 dpi WIA Up to 1 200 x 1 200 dpi standard Scan to 100 200 300 dpi USB Scan to 100 200 300 dpi E mail Scan to 75 150 200 300 600 dpi PC Network Scan PDF BMP TIFF JPEG File format Effective Max 289 mm 11 4 inches scanning length Effective Max 208 mm 8 2 inches scanning width Color bit depth 24 bit Mono bit depth 1 bit for black amp white mode 8 bit for gray scale aDue to the applications for scanning the maximum resolution might iffer b JPEG is not available when you select the mono mode in scan color COPIER SPECIFICATIONS ITEM DESCRIPTION Copy e Black amp White Up to 16 cpm A4 17 cpm Letter Speed e Color Up to 4 cpm A4 4 cpm Letter Copy Scan glass up to 600 x 600 text text photo resolution magazine up to 1200 x 1200 photo ADF up to 600 x 600 text text photo photo magazine Zoom Scanner glass 25 to 400 range e ADF 25 to 100 a Copy speed is based on Single Document Multiple Copy Specifications_ 89 FACSIMILE SPECIFICATIONS 1g The fax feat
199. edia 28 Specifications on print media TYPE SIZE DIMENSIONS WEIGHT CAPACITY Plain paper Letter 216 x 279 mm 8 5 x 11 inches 60 to 105 g m 16 to 28 Ib bond 150 sheets of 75 g m Legal 216 x 356 mm 8 5 x 14 inches oat ena Pennoni US Folio 216 x 330 mm 8 5 x 13 inches A4 210 x 297 mm 8 26 x 11 69 inches Oficio 216 x 343 mm 8 5 x 13 5 inches JIS B5 182 x 257 mm 7 16 x 10 11 inches ISO B5 176 x 250 mm 6 93 x 9 84 inches Executive 184 x 267 mm 7 25 x 10 5 inches Statement 140 x 216 mm 5 5 x 8 5 inches A5 148 x 210 mm 5 82 x 8 26 inches A6 105 x 148 mm 4 13 x 5 82 inches Envelope Envelope Monarch 98 x 191 mm 3 87 x 7 5 inches 75 to 90 g m 20 to 24 Ib bond 5 sheet for manual feeding in Envelope 6 3 4 92 x 165 mm 3 62 x 6 5 inches nen Envelope No 10 105 x 241 mm 4 12 x 9 5 inches Envelope No 9 98 x 225 mm 3 87 x 8 87 inches Envelope DL 110 x 220 mm 4 33 x 8 66 inches Envelope C5 162 x 229 mm 6 37 x 9 01 inches Envelope C6 114 x 162 mm 4 48 x 6 38 inches Thick paper Refer to the Plain Refer to the Plain paper section 90 to 105 g m 24 to 28 Ib bond 5 sheet for manual feeding in paper section the tray Thin paper Refer to the Plain Refer to the Plain paper section 60 to 70 g m 16 to19 Ib bond paper section Labels Letter A4 Refer to the Plain paper section 120 to 150 g m 37 to 40 Ib bond Card stock Post card 101 6 x 1
200. ee Selecting print media on page 38 Remove the toner cartridge and install a new one See Replacing the toner cartridge on page 68 If the problem persists the machine may require repair Contact a service representative CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS Copies are too light or too dark Use Darkness to darken or lighten the background of the copies 82 _ Troubleshooting Smears lines marks or spots appears on copies e If defects are on the original press Darkness to lighten the background of your copies e If no defects are on the original clean the scan unit See Cleaning the scan unit on page 66 Copy image is skewed Ensure that the original is face down on the scanner glass or face up in the ADF e Check that the copy paper is loaded correctly CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS Scanning problems Blank copies print out Ensure that the original is face down on the scanner glass or face up in the ADF Image rubs off the copy easily Replace the paper in the tray with paper from a new package e In high humidity areas do not leave paper in the machine for extended periods of time Frequent copy paper jams occur Fan the stack of paper then turn it over in the tray Replace the paper in the tray with a fresh supply Check adjust the paper guides if necessary Ensure that the paper is the proper paper weight 75 g m 20 Ib bon
201. eed the installation and settings e If you have set the network configuration before reset the machine to its factory default setting Checking your network environments IP address Every device in a network is identified by a unique numerical address called an IP Address Your machine came with a default IP address of 192 0 0 192 and you can verify this by printing out a Network Configuration Report In most cases a new IP address will be automatically assigned by a DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Server located on the network In a few situations the IP address must be set manually This is called a static IP and is often required in corporate Intranets for security reasons We have provided an easy to use utility program on the Printer Software CD ROM named SetIP that can change the address for you If your machine has a control panel you may also change the IP address using the control panel In an office environment we recommend that you contact a network administrator to set this address for you Wireless Networks e Infrastructure mode An Infrastructure mode network is the most common wireless network configuration in a home or office consisting of a wireless router or an access point that connects all the computers and other networked devices into a common local area network LAN The access point provides a special high speed connection to a Cable or DSL modem or other wide area network WAN device that connects the
202. eet the guidelines outlined in this user s guide may cause the following problems e Poor print quality e Increased paper jams e Premature wear on the machine Properties such as weight composition grain and moisture content are important factors that affect the machine s performance and the output quality When you choose print materials consider the following e The type size and weight of the print media for your machine are described later in this section e Desired outcome The print media you choose should be appropriate for your project e Brightness Some print media are whiter than others and produce sharper more vibrant images e Surface smoothness The smoothness of the print media affects how crisp the printing looks on the paper L e Some print media may meet all of the guidelines in this section and still not produce satisfactory results This may be the result of improper handling unacceptable temperature and humidity levels or other variables over which Samsung has no control e Before purchasing large quantities of print media ensure that it meets the requirements specified in this user s guide A Using print media that does not meet these specifications may cause problems requiring repairs Such repairs are not covered by Samsung s warranty or service agreements NN Make sure not to use the inkjet photo paper with this machine It could cause damage to the machine Loading originals and print m
203. eets of paper 75 g m 20 Ib bond for one job When you use the ADF e Inthe ADF Do not load paper smaller than 142 x 148 mm 5 6 x 5 8 inches or larger than 216 x 356 mm 8 5 x 14 inches Do not attempt to load the following types of paper carbon paper or carbon backed paper coated paper onion skin or thin paper wrinkled or creased paper curled or rolled paper torn paper e Remove all staples and paper clips before loading e Make sure any glue ink or correction fluid on the paper is completely dry before loading Do not load originals that include different sizes or weights of paper e Do not load booklets pamphlets transparencies or documents having other unusual characteristics 1 Flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages before loading originals Loading originals and print media_ 37 2 Load the original face up into the ADF Make sure that the bottom of the original stack matches the paper size marked on the document input tray Dust on the ADF glass may cause black lines on the printout Always keep it clean Be careful not to put your hands in the ADF roller You may get hurt 38 Loading originals and print media SELECTING PRINT MEDIA You can print on a variety of print media such as plain paper envelopes labels and transparencies Always use print media that meet the guidelines for use with your machine Print media that does not meet the guidelines outl
204. eight paper See Selecting print media on page 38 e Check the machine s environment very dry low humidity or high humidity higher than 80 RH conditions can increase the amount of background shading e Remove the old toner cartridge and install a new one See Replacing the toner cartridge on page 68 Toner smear AaBbCc AaBhCc AaBhCc AaBbCc AaBbCc e Clean the inside of the machine See Cleaning the inside on page 64 e Check the paper type and quality See Selecting print media on page 38 e Remove the toner cartridge and install a new one See Replacing the toner cartridge on page 68 AaBbCc AaBbCo AaBbCo AaBbG AaBboc Misformed e If characters are improperly formed and characters producing hollow images the paper stock may be too slick Try a different paper See AaBbCc Selecting print media on page 38 AaBbCc e If characters are improperly formed and AaBbCc producing a wavy effect the scanner unit AaBbCc may need service For service contact a AaBbCc service representative AaBbCc Page skew e Ensure that the paper is loaded properly e Check the paper type and quality See Selecting print media on page 38 e Ensure that the paper or other material is loaded correctly and the guides are not too tight or too loose against the paper stack Troubleshooting_ 81 CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS Curl or wave
205. emory devices are available with a variety of memory capacities to give you more room for storing documents presentations downloaded music and videos high resolution photographs or whatever other files you want to store or move You can do the following on your machine using a USB memory device Scan documents and save them on a USB memory device e Print data stored on a USB memory device e Back up Address Book Phone Book entries and the system settings of your machine e Restore backup files to the machine s memory e Format the USB memory device e Check the available memory space PLUGGING IN A USB MEMORY DEVICE The USB memory port on the front of your machine is designed for USB V1 1 and USB V2 0 memory devices Your machine supports USB memory devices with FAT16 FAT32 and sector size of 512 bytes Check your USB memory device s file system from your dealer You must use only an authorized USB memory device with an A plug type connector a R OC xX Use only a metal shielded USB memory device J 60 Using USB memory device e Backing up data e Managing USB memory e Printing directly from a digital camera Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on the front of your machine A e Do not remove the USB memory device while the machine is in operation or writing to or reading from USB memory The machine warranty does not cover damage caused by use s misuse e lf your USB memory
206. er minute See page 1 for more Used to guide users to the reference page for the additional detailed information See page 1 for more information information Features of your new laser product_3 FINDING MORE INFORMATION You can find information for setting up and using your machine from the following resources either as a print out or onscreen Quick Install Guide Provides information on setting up your machine and this requires that you follow the instructions in the guide to prepare the machine Online User s Guide Provides you with step by step instructions for using your machine s full features and contains information for maintaining your machine troubleshooting and installing accessories lt lt This user s guide also contains a Software section to provide you with information on how to print documents with your machine in various operating systems and how to use the included software utilities Printer Driver Help Provides you with help information on printer driver properties and instructions for setting up the properties for printing To access a printer driver help screen click Help from the printer properties dialog box Samsung website If you have Internet access you can get help support printer drivers manuals and order information from the Samsung website www samsungprinter com Z Open source information is available in Samsung website www samsung com
207. erlay List box If necessary click Confirm Page Overlay When Printing If this box is checked a message window appears each time you submit a document for printing asking you to confirm your wish to print an overlay on your document If this box is not checked and an overlay has been selected the overlay automatically prints with your document Click OK or Yes until printing begins The selected overlay downloads with your print job and prints on your document NOTE The resolution of the overlay document must be the same as that of the document you will print with the overlay Deleting a Page Overlay You can delete page overlays that you no longer use 1 2 3 In the printer properties window click the Extras tab Click the Edit button in the Overlay section Select the overlay you want to delete from the Overlay List box Click Delete Overlay When a confirming message window appears click Yes Click OK until you exit the Print window Sharing the Printer Locally You can connect the printer directly to a selected computer which is called host computer on the network The following procedure is for Windows XP For other Windows OS refer to the corresponding Windows User s Guide or online help NOTES e Check the Operating System s that are compatible with your printer Please refer to the OS Compatibility section of Printer Specifications in your Printer User s Guide
208. erver port number from 1 to 65535 The default port number is 25 Registering authorized users 1 Enter your machine s IP address as the URL in a browser and click Go to access the web site of your machine Click Machine Settings and User Authentication Click Add 4 Select index number corresponding to the location for storing the entry from 1 to 50 5 Enter user name auth ID password and e mail address You need to enter the registered user ID and password in the machine when you start scanning to email from the control panel 6 Click Apply o N Scanning to Email You can scan and send an image as an email attachment You first need to set up your email account in SyncThru Web Service See Setting up an e mail account on page 48 Before scanning you can set the scan options for your scan job See Changing the settings for each scan job on page 49 1 2 9 Make sure that your machine is connected to a network Place a single document face down on the document glass OR load the document s face up into the ADF For details about loading an original See Loading originals on page 37 Press Scan Email Press the left right arrow until Scan to Email appears on the bottom line of the display and press OK Z If you registered Auth Id Password and checked Enable Auth User in User Authentication on SyncThru Web Service My Log in ID and Password appear Enter in the Auth Id and Password to your
209. es do not have normal 13 amp plug sockets You need to buy a suitable plug adaptor Do not remove the moulded plug A If you cut off the moulded plug get rid of it straight away You cannot rewire the plug and you may receive an electric shock if you plug it into a socket Important warning You must earth this machine The wires in the mains lead have the following color code e Green and Yellow Earth e Blue Neutral e Brown Live If the wires in the mains lead do not match the colors marked in your plug do the following You must connect the green and yellow wire to the pin marked by the letter E or by the safety Earth symbol or colored green and yellow or green You must connect the blue wire to the pin which is marked with the letter N or colored black You must connect the brown wire to the pin which is marked with the letter L or colored red You must have a 13 amp fuse in the plug adaptor or at the distribution board DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY EUROPEAN COUNTRIES CE Approvals and Certifications The CE marking applied to this product symbolizes Samsung Electronics Co Ltd Declaration of Conformity with the following applicable 93 68 EEC Directives of the European Union as of the dates indicated The declaration of conformity may be consulted at www samsung com printer go to Support 5 Download center and enter your printer name to browse the EuDoC January 1 1995 Council Directive 200
210. ess OK The machine prints all of the faxes stored in memory Deactivating secure receiving mode 1 Access the Secure Receive menu by following steps 1 through 3 in Activating secure receiving mode 2 Press the left right arrow until Off appears and press OK 3 Enter the four digit password and press OK The mode is deactivated and the machine prints all faxes stored in memory 4 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Receiving faxes in memory Since your machine is a multi tasking device it can receive faxes while you are making copies or printing If you receive a fax while you are copying or printing your machine stores incoming faxes in its memory Then as soon as you finish copying or printing the machine automatically prints the fax Also your machine receives faxes and stores them in its memory when there is no paper in the tray or no toner in the installed toner cartridge 56 Faxing Forwarding faxes You can forward your incoming and outgoing faxes to another fax machine or email address Forwarding sent faxes to another fax machine You can set the machine to send copies of all outgoing faxes to a specified destination in addition to the fax numbers you entered 1 Press Fax 2 Press Menu until Fax Feature appears on the bottom line of the display and press OK Press the left right arrow until Forward appears and press OK Press OK when Fax appears Press the left right arrow until Send Forw
211. etters repeat step 1 If the next letter is printed on the same button move the cursor by pressing the left right arrow button and then press the button labeled with the letter you want The cursor will move to the right and the next letter will appear on the display You can enter a space by pressing 1 twice 3 When you have finished entering letters press OK Keypad letters and numbers KEY ASSIGNED NUMBERS LETTERS OR CHARACTERS 1 1 1 2 AB Cab c2 3 D E F de f3 4 GHIghi 4 36 Getting started KEY ASSIGNED NUMBERS LETTERS OR CHARACTERS 5 J K L j k 1 5 6 MN Om n o 6 7 P QRS p q rsrT 8 TUVt uv 8 9 WX Y Z w x y z 9 0 8 0 Correcting numbers or names If you make a mistake while entering a number or name press the left right arrow button to delete the last digit or character Then enter the correct number or character Inserting a pause With some telephone systems you must dial an access code 9 for example and listen for a second dial tone In such cases you must insert a pause in the telephone number You can insert a pause while you are setting up speed dial numbers To insert a pause press Redial Pause at the appropriate place while entering the telephone number A appears on the display at the corresponding location Using the save modes Power Save mode Power Save mode allows your machine to reduce power consumption
212. evice such as a digital camera camera phone and camcorder You do not need to connect it to a computer 1 Turn on the machine 2 Connect your PictBridge compatible device to the memory port on the front of the machine using the USB cable supplied with the device 3 Send an order to print images from the PictBridge compatible device L e Detailed information on how to print an image from a camera with PictBridge feature refer to the manual provided with your camera e Index print not support Not support date or file name print maintenance This chapter provides information for maintaining your machine and the toner cartridge This chapter includes Printing reports Clearing memory Cleaning your machine Maintaining the cartridge Replacing the toner cartridge PRINTING REPORTS Your machine can provide various reports with useful information you will need The following reports are available 64 Some reports may not appear in the display depending on options or models If so it is not applicable to your machine REPORT LIST DESCRIPTION This list shows the status of the user selectable options You may print this list to confirm your changes after changing settings Configuration This list shows the current status of consumables in your machine Supplies Info Address Book This list shows all of the fax numbers and email addresses currently stored in the machine s memory
213. ew waste toner container out of its package Maintenance_ 50 6 Insert the new container into position and then push it to make sure that it is firmly seated in place 7 Close the front cover firmly AN If the front cover is not completely closed the machine will not operate Please make sure all toner cartridges are installed properly If any toner cartridge is installed improperly the front cover do not close 8 Turn the machine on MAINTENANCE PARTS To avoid print quality and paper feed problems resulting from worn parts and to maintain your machine in top working condition the following condition the following items will need to be replaced after the specified number of pages or when the life span of each item has expired ITEMS YIELD AVERAGE Fuser unit Approx 100 000 black pages or 25 000 color pages Transfer roller Approx 100 000 pages Transfer unit ITB Approx 100 000 black pages or 25 000 color pages Pick up roller Approx 50 000 pages We highly recommend that this maintenance be performed by an authorized service provider dealer or the retailer where you bought the machine The warranty does not cover the replacement of the maintenance parts after their lifespan A The battery inside the machine is a service component Do not change it by yourself Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type Dispose used betteries according to the instructions Chec
214. f and on If the problem persists call for service Over Heat Error Cycle Power There is a problem in the fuser unit Turn the power switch off and on If the problem persists call for service Send Error There is a problemin Configure the AUTH SMTP authentication authentication setting Send Error There is a problemin Configure the DNS DNS DNS setting Troubleshooting_ 77 SUGGESTED MESSAGE MEANING SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS Transfer Belt Error A problem has occurred in the transfer belt in the machine Turn the power switch off and on If the problem persists call for service MESSAGE MEANING SOLUTIONS Send Error There is a problem in Configure the POP3 POP3 POP3 setting Send Error There is a problem in Change to the available SMTP SMTP server Send Error There is a problem on Configure your network Wrong Config the network interface card interface card correctly Tray Paper Empty There is no paper in the tray Load paper in the tray Stop Pressed Stop Clear has been pressed during an operation Try again Tray Paper Mismatch The paper size specified in the printer properties does not match the paper you are loading Load the correct paper in the tray Toner Empty v A toner cartridge has almost reached its estimated cartridge life Press OK to toggle the message to
215. folder or file you want appears and press OK IRN 4 If you see D in the front of a folder name there are one or more files or folders in the selected folder If you selected a file the display shows the size of the file for about 2 seconds Go to the next step If you selected a folder press the left right arrow until the file you want to delete appears and press OK 6 Press OK when Yes appears to confirm your selection 7 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Formatting a USB memory device 1 Insert the USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine Press Direct USB Press the left right arrow until File Manage appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until Format appears and press OK Press OK when Yes appears to confirm your selection Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode oa PWN Viewing the USB memory status You can check the amount of memory space available for scanning and saving documents 1 Insert the USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine 2 Press Direct USB 3 Press the left right arrow until Check Space appears and press OK The available memory space appears on the display 4 Press Stop Clear to return to the ready mode 43 Using USB memory device PRINTING DIRECTLY FROM A DIGITAL CAMERA This machine supports the PictBridge feature You can print images directly from any PictBridge compatible device such as a digital camera camera phone a
216. ft right arrow until System Setup appears and press OK 3 Press the left right arrow until Report appears and press OK 4 Press the left right arrow until the report or list you want to print appears and press OK To print all reports and lists select All Report 5 Press OK when Yes appears to confirm printing The selected information prints out ADJUSTING THE COLOR CONTRAST Color menu allows you to adjust the color setting Press Menu and then OK Press the left right arrow until System Setup appears and press OK Press OK when Maintenance appears Press the left right arrow until Color appears and press OK Press OK when Custom Color appears Press the left right arrow until the color menu you want appears on display and press OK Allows you to adjust contrast color by color Default optimizes color automatically Manual Adjust allows you to manually adjust the color contrast for each cartridge Default setting is recommended for getting best color quality 1g If you have moved the machine it is strongly recommended to operate this menu manually oa rPwONs Replacing the imaging unit Replacing the waste toner container Maintenance parts Managing your machine from the website Checking the machine s serial number 7 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode CLEARING MEMORY You can selectively clear information stored in your machine s memory 1 Press Menu and then OK 2 Press the left right arrow
217. g Printer Settings Utility 2 0 A AEEA EERE EE AEA REA RA A AEE 27 Using Onscreen Help File wic coiscoietec en sdebleeaed Nap NANANA DINA Magee nd E AEAEE 27 Changing the Smart Panel Program Settings aa awasa anakan enna 27 Chapter 7 USING YOUR PRINTER IN LINUX Getting Started mama n EA EEE a pana AE AE R A o a a 28 Installing the Unified Linux Driver a saaan anan ann GN GANAN GN GAGANA EE nnn ne tener eres 28 Installing the Unified Linux Driver a rites 28 Uninstalling the Unified Linux Driver 2 2 aaaas asana nG GG NA eet 29 USING SEE P PRO QIAN i 2 ana a a Ka na Kang Aa a NA aya Sega akn Shean Sanne a Pa cx teens 30 Starting the Program maa a AKA e EEEE EEE E EENE EE D AA AA AA 30 Using the Unified Driver Configurator s sawaan aasawa Na BABE Ente EEEE 30 Opening the Unified Driver Configurator s sagasa eee 30 Printers Configuration aan AGA ANA NAMANA GA GA AA 31 Scanners Configuration aaa AN ma NATAN ANA 31 Ports Configuration aanak DNA En GG aa aap ahaha 32 Configuring Printer Properties aaa PA GAAN AA NANA ALBANIA ie eae 32 Printing a DOCUMEM kaman nh NG NG Ka NA AA AA ANG 33 Printing from Applications 21 7207x33 nn GANG NARARAPAT NANANG 33 Printing Riles na NA NN NABA Baha ah Ah a NAG 33 Scanning a Document EEE aii aiin nee eee KK KANA 34 Using the Image Manager aaaa tanta eaten 35 Chapter 8 USING YOUR PRINTER WITH A MACI
218. g printing e SetIP Use this program to set your machine s TCP IP addresses a Allows you to edit a scanned image in many ways using a powerful image editor and to send the image by email You can also open another image editor program like Adobe Photoshop from SmarThru For details refer to the onscreen help supplied on the SmarThru program PRINTER DRIVER FEATURES Your printer drivers support the following standard features e Paper orientation size source and media type selection e Number of copies In addition you can use various special printing features The following table shows a general overview of features supported by your printer drivers Printer driver FEATURE WINDOWS LINUX MACINTOSH Color mode O O Machine quality option O O O Poster printing O X X Multiple pages per sheet O O 2 4 O N up Fit to page printing O X 02 Scale printing O X O Watermark O X Overlay O X X a This feature is supported only MAC OS X 10 4 10 6 Introduction 22 getting started This chapter gives you step by step instructions for setting up the machine This chapter includes e Setting up the hardware e System requirements Setting up the network CLX 3175N only SETTING UP THE HARDWARE This section shows the steps to set up the hardware which is explained in the Quick Install Guide Make sure you read Quick Install Guide and complete following steps
219. ght arrow until the option you want appears and press OK 5 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Z The darkness setting is applied to the current fax job To change the default setting see Changing the default document settings on page 58 Sending a fax automatically 1 Press Fax 2 Load originals face up into the ADF or place a single original face down on the scanner glass For details about loading an original See Loading originals on page 37 Ready to Fax appears on the top line of the display 3 Adjust the resolution and the darkness to suit your fax needs See Adjusting the document settings on page 52 4 Enter the receiving fax machine s number You can use speed dial numbers or group dial numbers For details about storing and searching for a number see Setting up Address Book on page 58 5 Press Color Start or Black Start If an original is placed on the scanner glass select Yes to add another page Load another original and press OK 6 When you have finished select No at the Another Page prompt After the number is dialed the machine begins sending the fax when the receiving fax machine answers When you want to cancel a fax job press Stop Clear at any time while sending Sending a fax manually 1 Press Fax 2 Load originals face up into the ADF or place a single original face down on the scanner glass For details about loading an original See Loading originals on page 37
220. ginal does not feed into the machine the ADF rubber pad may require to be replaced Contact a service representative The paper keeps jamming There is too much paper in the tray Remove excess paper from the tray If you are printing on special materials use the manual feeder e An incorrect type of paper is being used Use only paper that meets the specifications required by the machine See Selecting print media on page 38 e There may be debris inside the machine Open the front cover and remove the debris e If an original does not feed into the machine the ADF rubber pad may require to be replaced Contact a service representative Envelopes skew or fail to feed correctly Ensure the paper guides are against both sides of the envelopes POSSIBLE CONDITION CAUSE SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS The machine The machine is not Check the power cord does not print receiving power connections Check the power switch and the power source The machine is not selected as the default printer Select Samsung CLX 3170 Series as your default printer in your Windows Check the machine for the following e The front cover or rear cover is not closed Close the cover e Paper is jammed Clear the paper jam See Clearing paper jams on page 73 e No paper is loaded Load paper e The toner cartridge is not installed Install the toner cartridge e Ifa system error occurs contact your
221. guide and slide it to the edge of the paper stack without causing it to bend For paper smaller than Letter sized return the paper guides to their original positions and adjust the paper length guide and paper width guide If the paper that you need to print is shorter than length 222 mm 8 74 inches press and unlatch the guide lock in the tray push the tray in manually Adjust the paper length guide and paper width guide 64 e Donot push the paper width guides far enough to cause the materials to warp e If you do not adjust the paper width guides it may cause paper jams 6 Slide the tray 1 back into the machine The tray is preset to Letter or A4 size depending on your country To 7 After loading paper set the paper type and size for the tray See Setting change the size to A4 or Letter you must adjust the lever and paper width the paper size and type on page 33 guide properly K gt Due to insufficient paper in the tray the paper length guide can be 1 Pull the tray out of the machine Open the paper cover and remove pushed to inside load enough paper e If you experience problems with paper feed load a paper into the tray one by one e You can load previously printed paper The printed side should be 2 si pu kaha al ba ne Ek hold the lever at thie DacK orhe facing up with an uncurled edge at the front If you experience problems with paper feed turn the paper around Note that
222. h any other antenna or transmitter Operation of this device is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Wireless devices are not user serviceable Do not modify them in any way Modification to a wireless device will void the authorization to use it Contact manufacturer for service FCC Statement for Wireless LAN use While installing and operating this transmitter and antenna combination the radio frequency exposure limit of 1mW cm2 may be exceeded at distances close to the antenna installed Therefore the user must maintain a minimum distance of 20cm from the antenna at all times This device cannot be colocated with another transmitter and transmitting antenna 9 Safety information FAX BRANDING The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device to send any message via a telephone facsimile machine unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission the following information 1 the date and time of transmission 2 identification of either business business entity or individual sending the message and 3 telephone number of either the sending machine business business entity or individual The Te
223. h exchange PABX is an automatic telephone switching system within a private enterprise PCL Printer Command Language PCL is a Page Description Language PDL developed by HP as a printer protocol and has become an industry standard Originally developed for early inkjet printers PCL has been released in varying levels for thermal matrix printer and page printers PDF Portable Document Format PDF is a proprietary file format developed by Adobe Systems for representing two dimensional documents in a device independent and resolution independent format PostScript PostScript PS is a page description language and programming language used primarily in the electronic and desktop publishing areas that is run in an interpreter to generate an image Printer Driver A program used to send commands and transfer data from the computer to the printer Print Media The media like paper envelopes labels and transparencies which can be used on a printer a scanner a fax or a copier PPM Pages Per Minute PPM is a method of measurement for determining how fast a printer works meaning the number of pages a printer can produce in one minute PRN file An interface for a device driver this allows software to interact with the device driver using standard input output system calls which simplifies many tasks Protocol A convention or standard that controls or enables the connection communication and data transfer between two
224. hat changes automatically at regular intervals WPA also uses TKIP Temporal Key Integrity Protocol and AES Advanced Encryption Standard for data encryption Custom mode 1 Enter the SSID the name that identifies a wireless network when Edit SSID appears on the top line of the display SSID is case sensitive so you need to enter it carefully Press OK Select the type of wireless connections Press the left right arrow to select the method of Operation Mode you want and press OK Ad hoc Allows wireless devices to communicate directly with each other in a peer to peer environment Go to step 4 Infrastructure Allows wireless devices to communicate with each other through an access point Go to step 5 Press the left right arrow to select the method of Channel you want and press OK If you select Auto the wireless network interface card on your machine will automatically adjust the channels Press the left right arrow to select the method of WLAN Security you want and press OK None This is used when the validation of a wireless device s identity and data encryption are not required for your network Open system is used for IEEE 802 11 authentication Static WEP This uses the WEP Wired Equivalent Privacy algorithm 32 Getting started c 5 suggested by IEEE 802 11 standard for security Static WEP security mode requires a proper WEP key for data encryption decryption and IEEE 802 11 authentication Press the lef
225. he altitude value find the altitude where you are using the machine 2 000 m 1 Normal 1 000 m 5 2 High 1 3 High 2 4 High3 0 1 Ensure that you have installed the printer driver with the provided Printer Software CD 2 Double click the Smart Panel icon on the Windows task bar or Notification Area in Linux You can also click Smart Panel on the status bar in Mac OS X Click Printer Setting 4 Click Setting gt Altitude Adjustment Select the appropriate value from the dropdown list and then click Apply Z If your machine is connected to a network SyncThru Web Service screen appears automatically Click Machine Settings gt Setup or Machine Setup gt Adj Select the appropriate altitude value and then click Apply ka Changing the display language To change the language that appears on the control panel follow these steps 1 Press Menu until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the display and press OK 2 Press OK when Machine Setup appears 3 Press the left right arrow until Language appears and press OK 4 Press the left right arrow until the language you want appears and press OK 5 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Setting the date and time The current date and time are shown on the display when your machine is on and ready to work For the CLX 3170FN CLX 3175FN CLX 3175FW all of your faxes will have the date and time printed on them 1 Press Menu un
226. he client transmits an email message to the server Glossary_ 70 Subnet Mask The subnet mask is used in conjunction with the network address to determine which part of the address is the network address and which part is the host address TCP IP The Transmission Control Protocol TCP and the Internet Protocol IP the set of communications protocols that implement the protocol stack on which the Internet and most commercial networks run TCR Transmission Confirmation Report TCR provides details of each transmission such as job status transmission result and number of pages sent This report can be set to print after each job or only after failed transmissions TIFF Tagged Image File Format TIFF is a variable resolution bitmapped image format TIFF describes image data that typically come from scanners TIFF images make use of tags keywords defining the characteristics of the image that is included in the file This flexible and platform independent format can be used for pictures that have been made by various image processing applications Toner Cartridge A kind of bottle within a machine like printer which contains toner Toner is a powder used in laser printers and photocopiers which forms the text and images on the printed paper Toner can be melted by the heat of the fuser causing it to bind to the fibers in the paper TWAIN An industry standard for scanners and software By using a TWAIN compliant scanner
227. her 2 Load originals face up into the ADF or place a single original face down on the scanner glass For details about loading an original See Loading originals on page 37 3 Press Scan Email Ready to Scan appears on the top line of the display 4 Press the left right arrow until Scan to PC appears on the bottom line of the display and press OK Scanning 47 5 Press the left right arrow until Local PC appears on the bottom line of the display and press OK If the machine connected to a network select Network PC and press OK If you see Not Available message check the port connection If you selected Network PC select your registered user ID and enter the PIN Press OK e ID is the same ID as the registered ID for Samsung Scan Manager e PIN is the 4 digit number registered for Samsung Scan Manager 6 From Scan Destination press the left right arrow until the application program you want appears then press OK Default setting is My Documents 69 To add or delete the folder where the scanned file is saved add or delete the application program in Samsung Scan Manager gt Set Scan Button 7 Press the left right button until the setting you want appears then press OK e Resolution Sets the image resolution Scan Color Sets the color mode e Scan Format Sets the file format in which the image is to be saved e Scan Size Sets the image size L e Scan Format appears only when you selected the Scan Destinati
228. ht arrow until the fax reception mode you want appears In Fax mode the machine answers an incoming fax call and immediately goes into the fax reception mode e In Tel mode you can receive a fax by pressing On Hook Dial and then Color Start or Black Start You can also pick up the handset of the extension phone and then press the remote receive code See Receiving manually using an extension telephone on page 55 e In Ans Fax mode an answering machine attached to your machine answers an incoming call and the caller can leave a message on the answering machine If the fax machine senses a fax tone on the line the machine automatically switches to Fax mode to receive the fax See Receiving automatically in Ans Fax mode on page 55 e In DRPD mode you can receive a call using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection DRPD feature Distinctive Ring is a telephone company service which enables an user to use a single telephone line to answer several different telephone numbers For further details see Receiving faxes using DRPD mode on page 55 6 Press OK to save your selection 7 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode IZ e To use the Ans Fax mode attach an answering machine to the EXT socket on the back of your machine e If you do not want other people to view your received documents you can use secure receiving mode In this mode all of the received faxes are stored in memory For further details see Receiving in s
229. ide e Labels Print side up and top short edge entering the machine first e Preprinted paper Design side up with the top edge toward the machine e Card stock Print side up and the short edge entering the machine first e Previously printed paper Previously printed side down with an uncurled edge toward the machine 2 When you print in application start the print menu Before you print open printer properties 4 Press the Paper tab in printer properties and select an appropriate paper type Z If you want to use a label set the paper type to Label ad 5 Select Manual Feeder in paper source then press OK 6 Start printing in application 7 Press the Color Start or Black Start button on the machine to start feeding then the machine starts printing IZ e Ifyou are printing multiple pages load the next sheet after first page prints out and press the Color Start or Black Start button Repeat this step for every page to be printed e The settings you change remain in effect only while you are using the current application 33 Loading originals and print media SETTING THE PAPER SIZE AND TYPE After loading paper in the paper tray you need to set the paper size and type using the control panel buttons These settings will apply to Copy mode For PC printing you need to select the paper size and type in the application program you use on your PC 1 Press Menu and then OK Press the left right arrow unti
230. ie eo 5 CLX 3175N Click the model name of your machine CLX 31 aN CLX 3175FN CLX 3175FW Multi Functional Printer User s Guide i imagine the possibilities Thank you for purchasing a Samsung product SAM SUN features of your new laser product Your new machine is equipped with a number of special features that improve the quality of the documents you print With the machine you can SPECIAL FEATURES at Print with excellent quality and speed You can print in a full range of colors using cyan magenta yellow and black You can print with a resolution of up to 2400 x 600 dpi See Software section Your machine prints A4 sized paper at up to 16 ppm and letter sized paper at up to 17 ppm In Color mode your machine prints A4 sized or letter sized paper at up to 4 ppm Handle many different types of printable material The 150 sheet tray supports plain paper in various sizes letterhead envelopes labels custom sized media postcards and heavy paper Create professional documents Print Watermarks You can customize your documents with words such as Confidential See Software section Print Posters The text and pictures of each page of your document are magnified and printed across the sheet of paper and can then be taped together to form a poster See Software section You can use preprinted forms and letterhead with plain paper See Software se
231. ily Replace the paper in the tray with paper from a new package In high humidity areas do not leave paper in the machine for extended periods of time Frequent copy paper jams occur Fan the stack of paper then turn it over in the tray Replace the paper in the tray with a fresh supply Check adjust the paper guides if necessary Ensure that the paper is the proper paper weight 75 g m 20 Ib bond paper is recommended Check for copy paper or pieces of copy paper remaining in the machine after a paper jam has been cleared Toner cartridge produces fewer copies than expected before running out of toner Your originals may contain pictures solids or heavy lines For example your originals may be forms newsletters books or other documents that use more toner The machine may be turned on and off frequently The scanner lid may be left open while copies are being made 61 _ Troubleshooting The unit scans very slowly Check if the machine is printing received data If so scan the document after the received data has been printed Graphics are scanned more slowly than text Communication speed slows in scan mode because of the large amount of memory required to analyze and reproduce the scanned image Set your computer to the ECP printer mode through BIOS setting It will help to increase the speed For details about how to set BIOS refer to your computer user s guide Message a
232. ine s serial number Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode go PON Maintenance_ 71 troubleshooting This chapter gives helpful information for what to do if you encounter an error This chapter includes e Tips for avoiding paper jams e Clearing document jams e Clearing paper jams TIPS FOR AVOIDING PAPER JAMS By selecting the correct media types most paper jams can be avoided When a paper jam occurs follow the steps outlined on page 72 Follow the procedures on page 42 Ensure that the adjustable guides are positioned correctly e Donot overload the tray Ensure that the paper level is below the paper capacity mark on the inside of the tray Do not remove paper from the tray while your machine is printing Flex fan and straighten paper before loading Do not use creased damp or highly curled paper Do not mix paper types in a tray Use only recommended print media See Setting the paper size and type on page 43 Ensure that the recommended side of the print media is facing up in the tray and manual feeder CLEARING DOCUMENT JAMS When an original jams while passing through the ADF Document Jam appears on the display 1 Remove any remaining pages from the ADF 2 Open the ADF cover 1 ADF cover 72 Troubleshooting e Understanding display messages Solving other problems 3 Pull the jammed paper gently out of the ADF This illustration may differ from y
233. ine on the list click Update to refresh the list or select Add TCP IP Port to add your machine to the network To add the machine to the network enter the port name and the IP address for the machine e To verify your machine s IP address or the MAC address print a Network Configuration Report page See Printing reports on page 63 5 After the installation is finished a window appears asking you to print a test page and to register yourself as a user of Samsung machines in order to receive information from Samsung If you wish to do so select the corresponding checkbox es and click Finish If your machine does not work properly after the installation verify your network settings and try reinstalling the printer driver Congratulations you have installed your Samsung wireless network printer Print another copy of the Configuration report and keep it for future reference You are now ready to use your new Samsung wireless printer on your network 34 _Getting started MACHINE S BASIC SETTINGS After installation is complete you may want to set the machine s default settings Refer to the next section if you would like to set or change values Altitude adjustment The print quality is affected by atmospheric pressure which is determined by the height of the machine above sea level The following information will guide you on how to set your machine to the best print quality or best quality of print Before you set t
234. ined in this user s guide may cause the following problems e Poor print quality e Increased paper jams e Premature wear on the machine Properties such as weight composition grain and moisture content are important factors that affect the machine s performance and the output quality When you choose print materials consider the following e The type size and weight of the print media for your machine are described later in this section e Desired outcome The print media you choose should be appropriate for your project e Brightness Some print media are whiter than others and produce sharper more vibrant images e Surface smoothness The smoothness of the print media affects how crisp the printing looks on the paper L e Some print media may meet all of the guidelines in this section and still not produce satisfactory results This may be the result of improper handling unacceptable temperature and humidity levels or other variables over which Samsung has no control e Before purchasing large quantities of print media ensure that it meets the requirements specified in this user s guide A Using print media that does not meet these specifications may cause problems requiring repairs Such repairs are not covered by Samsung s warranty or service agreements Make sure not to use the inkjet photo paper with this machine It could cause damage to the machine B Specifications on print media
235. ing the sharper the clarity of printed characters and graphics The higher setting also may increase the time it takes to print a document Color Mode You can choose color options Setting to Color typically produces the best possible print quality for color documents If you want to print a color document in grayscale select Grayscale If you want to adjust the color options manually select Manual and click the Color Adjust or Color Matching button e Copies Setting In order to use this option first you need to set total number of copies from Paper tab When you make several copies and if you want to print some copies in color and some in grayscale use this option and select the number of copies in grayscale Basic Printing 15 Color Adjust You can adjust the appearance of images by changing the settings in the Levels option e Color Matching You can adjust the appearance of images by changing the settings in the Settings option Advanced Options You can set advanced settings by clicking the Advanced Options button Print All Text To Black When the Print All Text To Black option is checked all text in your document prints solid black regardless of the color it appears on the screen Print All Text To Darken When the Print All Text To Darken option is checked all text in your document is allowed to print darker than on a normal document Grayscale Enhancement Press the Smart Color tab It allow
236. ing a wired network If you use your network printer in the wireless network refer to Using a wireless network Windows CLX 3175FW only on page 27 Supported operation environments The following table shows the network environments supported by the machine ITEM REQUIREMENTS Network interface e Ethernet 10 100 Base TX e 802 11 b g Wireless LAN CLX 3175FW only Windows 2000 XP 2003 2008 Vista 7 Server 2008 R2 e Various Linux OS MAC OS 10 3 10 6 Network operating system TCP IP Standard TCP IP LPR IPP HTTP Bonjour DHCP BOOTP Network protocols Wireless Security e Authentication Open System Shared Key WPA Personal WPA2 Personal PSK e Encryption WEP64 WEP128 TKIP AES USING A WIRED NETWORK You must set up the network protocols on your printer to use it on your network This chapter will show you how this is easily accomplished Printing Configuration report You can print a Network Configuration Report from the machine s control panel that will show the current machine s network settings This will help you to set up a network and troubleshooting problems Please review your machines User s Guide to learn of more details Using this Network Configuration Report you can find your machine s MAC address and IP address For example MAC Address 00 15 99 41 A2 78 IP Address 192 0 0 192 Setting IP address Firstly you have to set up an IP address for network prin
237. ings are right Click Next For the DHCP method If the IP address assignment method is DHCP check if DHCP is shown in the window However if it shows Static click Change TCP IP to change the assignment method to DHCP For the Static method If the IP address assignment method is Static check if Static is shown in the window However if it shows DHCP click Change TCP IP to enter the IP address and other network configuration values for the printer Before entering the IP address for the printer you must know the computeris network configuration information If the computer is set to DHCP you must contact the network administrator to get the static IP address Example If computer s network information is as below IP address 169 254 133 42 Subnet Mask 255 255 0 0 Printer s network information should be as below IP address 169 254 133 43 Use computer s IP address with changed last three digits Subnet Mask 255 255 0 0 Use the computer s subnet mask Gateway 169 254 133 1 Change the last three digits from IP address of your printer to 1 10 The wireless network is connecting according to the network configuration 11 When the wireless network setting is completed disconnect the USB cable between the computer and machine 12 Select the components to be installed After selecting the components you can also change the printer name set the printer to be shared on the network set the printer as the def
238. intaining the cartridge Toner cartridge storage Handling instructions Use of non Samsung and refilled toner cartridge Estimated cartridge life Redistributing toner Replacing the toner cartridge Replacing the imaging unit Replacing the waste toner container Maintenance parts Checking replaceables Managing your machine from the website To access SyncThru Web Service Checking the machine s serial number contents TROUBLESHOOTING ORDERING SUPPLIES SPECIFICATIONS GLOSSARY INDEX 72 72 72 73 73 73 73 74 76 79 79 79 80 82 83 84 84 85 86 87 87 Tips for avoiding paper jams Clearing document jams Exit misfeed Roller misfeed Clearing paper jams In the tray 1 In the fuser unit area In the paper exit area Understanding display messages Solving other problems Paper feeding Printing problems Printing quality problems Copying problems Scanning problems Fax problems Common Windows problems Common Linux problems Common Macintosh problems Supplies How to purchase General specifications Printer specifications Scanner specifications Copier specifications Facsimile specifications Contents_17 Introduction These are the main components of your machine This chapter includes Machine overview Control panel overview Understanding the Status LED MACHINE OVERVIEW Acknowledging the status of the toner cartridge e Menu overview e Supplied software e Printer driver fea
239. inux clones Using Your Printer in Linux 28 Installing the Unified Linux Driver Installing the Unified Linux Driver 1 Make sure that you connect your machine to your computer Turn both the computer and the machine on 2 When the Administrator Login window appears type in root in the Login field and enter the system password NOTE You must log in as a super user root to install the printer software If you are not a super user ask your system administrator 3 From the Samsung website download and unpack the Unified Linux Driver package to your computer 4 Click the J icon at the bottom of the desktop When the Terminal screen appears type in root localhost root tar zxf FilePath UnifiedLinuxDriver tar gz root localhost root cd FilePath cdroot Linux root localhost Linux install sh NOTE If you do not use the graphical interface and failed to install the software you have to use the driver in the text mode Follow the steps 3 to 4 and then follow the instructions on the terminal screen 5 When the welcome screen appears click Next m Unified Linux Driver Installer Welcome to the Unified Linux Driver installation wizard This program will install all necessary software for printers and MFP devices Click Next to continue with the Setup program Help Next gt Cancel 6 When the installation is complete click Finish ES Unified Linux Driver Installer
240. ion A ends before transmission to station B begins or between redial attempts 1 Press Fax 2 Load originals face up into the ADF or place a single original face down on the scanner glass For details about loading an original See Loading originals on page 37 3 Adjust the document resolution and darkness to suit your fax needs See Adjusting the document settings on page 52 4 Press Menu until Fax Feature appears on the bottom line of the display and press OK Press the left right arrow until Priority Send appears and press OK 6 Enter the number of the receiving machine You can use speed dial numbers or group dial numbers For details see Setting up Address Book on page 58 Press OK to confirm the number 8 Enter the job name you want and press OK The original is scanned into memory before transmission The display shows memory capacity and the number of pages being stored in memory 9 If an original is placed on the scanner glass select Yes to add another page Load another original and press OK When you have finished select No at the Another Page prompt The machine shows the number being dialed and begins sending the fax o N RECEIVING A FAX Changing receiving modes 1 Press Fax 2 Press Menu until Fax Setup appears on the bottom line of the display and press OK 3 Press the left right arrow until Receiving appears and press OK Press OK when Receive Mode appears P 5 Press the left rig
241. ions 5 Click OK and print the document Fitting Your Document to a Selected Paper Size This printer feature allows you to scale your print job to any selected paper size regardless of the digital document size This can be useful when you want to check fine details on a small document 1 To change the print settings from your software application access printer properties See Printing a Document on page 12 2 From the Paper tab select Fit to Page in the Printing Type drop down list 3 Select the correct size from the Output size drop down list 4 Select the paper source size and type in Paper Options 5 Click OK and print the document Using Watermarks The Watermark option allows you to print text over an existing document For example you may want to have large gray letters reading DRAFT or CONFIDENTIAL printed diagonally across the first page or all pages of a document There are several predefined watermarks that come with the printer and they can be modified or you can add new ones to the list Using an Existing Watermark 1 To change the print settings from your software application access printer properties See Printing a Document on page 12 2 Click the Extras tab and select the desired watermark from the Watermark drop down list You will see the selected watermark in the preview image 3 Click OK and start printing NOTE The preview image shows how the page
242. is transmitter must not be collocated or operation in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter Some circumstances require restrictions on wireless devices Examples of common restrictions are listed below Radio frequency wireless communication can interfere with equipment on commercial aircraft Current aviation regulations require wireless devices to be turned off while traveling in an airplane IEEE 802 11 also known as wireless Ethernet and Bluetooth communication devices are examples of devices that provide wireless communication In environments where the risk of interference to other devices or services is harmful or perceived as harmful the option to use a wireless device may be restricted or eliminated Airports Hospitals and Oxygen or flammable gas laden atmospheres are limited examples where use of wireless devices may be restricted or eliminated When in environments where you are uncertain of the sanction to use wireless devices ask the applicable authority for authorization prior to use or turning on the wireless device Every country has different restrictions on the use of wireless devices Since your system is equipped with a wireless device when traveling between countries with your system check with the local Radio Approval authorities prior to any move or trip for any restrictions on the use of a wireless device in the destination country If your system came equipped with an internal embedded wireless device do not oper
243. k Next Select Printer Port am Select a port that will be used for your printer TCP IP Pott C Shared Printer UNC Add TCP IP Port Select a printer from the list below If you don t see your printer below click Update to refresh the list Printer Name IP Port Name NOTE If a firewall has been enabled on this PC this may be preventing the installer from Update detecting the printer Temporarily disable the firewall on this PC before continuing with the installation lt Back re Cancel If you do not see your printer on the list click Update to refresh the list or select Add TCP IP Port to add your printer to the network To add the printer to the network enter the port name and the IP address for the printer To verify your printer s IP address or the MAC address print a Network Configuration page e To find a shared network printer UNC Path select Shared Printer UNC and enter the shared name manually or find a shared printer by clicking the Browse button NOTE If you cannot find your machine in network please turn off the firewall and click Update For Windows operating system click Start Control Panel and start windows firewall and set this option unactivated For other operating system refer to its on line guide Installing Printer Software in Windows 6 After the installation is finished a window appears asking you to print a test page and to register your
244. k Preview to see your preferences affect the picture 5 Click Scan Using Smart Panel Smart Panel is a program that monitors and informs you of the status of the printer and allows you to customize the printer s settings If you are a Windows or Macintosh OS user Smart Panel is installed automatically when you install the printer software If you are a Linux OS user download Smart Panel from the Samsung website www samsung com printer and install NOTES e To use this program you need To check for Operating System s that are compatible with your printer refer to Printer Specifications in your Printer User s Guide Mac OS X 10 3 or higher Linux To check for Linux systems that are compatible with your printer refer to Printer Specifications in your Printer User s Guide Internet Explorer version 5 0 or higher for flash animation in HTML Help If you need to know the exact name of your printer you can check the supplied CD ROM Understanding Smart Panel If an error occurs while printing Smart Panel appears automatically showing the error You can also launch Smart Panel manually Double click the Smart Panel icon on the Windows task bar in Windows or Notification Area in Linux You can also click it on the status bar in Mac OS X Double click this icon in Windows B 11 09 PM Click this icon in Mac OS X oa d Click this icon in Linux z all Using Smart Panel
245. k the type of toner cartridge for your machine See on page 87 1 Turn the machine off then wait a few minutes for the machine to cool 2 Using the handle completely open the front cover 3 Grasp the handles on the toner cartridge and pull to remove the cartridge from the machine 4 Take a new toner cartridge out of its package C A e Don t use sharp objects such as a knife or scissors to open the toner cartridge package You could damage the surface of the toner cartridge 5 Holding both handles on the toner cartridge thoroughly rock it from side to side to evenly distribute the toner 6 Place the toner cartridge on a flat surface as shown and remove the protecting cover Z If toner gets on your clothing wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash it in cold water Hot water sets toner into fabric 7 Make sure that the color of the toner cartridge matches the color slot and then grasp the handles on the toner cartridge Insert the cartridge until it clicks into place 68 _Maintenance 8 Close the front cover Make sure the cover is securely latched and then turn the machine on N If the front cover is not completely closed the machine will not operate REPLACING THE IMAGING UNIT When the life span of the imaging unit has expired the Smart Panel program window appears on the computer indicating the imaging unit needs to be replaced Otherwise your machine stops printing 1 Turn th
246. king replaceables If you experience frequent paper jams or printing problems check the number of pages the machine has printed or scanned Replace the corresponding parts if necessary Press Menu and then OK Press the left right arrow until System Setup appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until Maintenance appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until Supplies Life appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until the item you want appears and press OK NAONS 51 Maintenance Supplies Info Prints the supply information page e Total Displays the total number of pages printed e Platen Scan Displays the number of pages scanned using the scanner glass Imaging Unit Transfer Belt Fuser TransferRoller Tray1 Roller displays the number of pages printed each item 6 If you selected to print a supply information page press OK to confirm 7 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode MANAGING YOUR MACHINE FROM THE WEBSITE If you have connected your machine to a network and set up TCP IP network parameters correctly you can manage the machine via Samsung s SyncThru Web Service an embedded web server Use SyneThru Web Service to View the machine s device information and check its current status Change TCP IP parameters and set up other network parameters Change the printer properties Set the machine to send email notifications to let you know the machine s status e Get s
247. l System Setup appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until Paper Setup appears and press OK Press OK when Paper Size appears Press the left right arrow until the paper size you are using appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until Paper Type appears and press OK 7 Press the left right arrow until the paper type you are using appears and press OK 8 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Z If you want to use special sized paper such as billing paper select Custom in the Paper tab in the printer properties See Software section IRON o copying This chapter gives you step by step instructions for copying documents This chapter includes e Copying e Changing the settings for each copy e Changing the default copy settings COPYING 1 Place a single original face down on the scanner glass For details about loading an original See Loading originals on page 28 Enter the number of copies using the left right arrow if necessary 3 If you want to customize the copy settings including copy size darkness and original type by using the control panel buttons See Changing the settings for each copy on page 34 If necessary you can use special copy features such as 2 up or 4 up copying 4 Press Color Start to begin color copying Or press Black Start to begin black and white copying Z You can cancel the copy job during an operation Press Stop Clear and the copying wil
248. l applications should be closed on your computer before beginning installation If your IP assignment method is DHCP and IP address can be changed whenever machine is turned on we recommend you to use the Bonjour program Go to the http developer apple com networking bonjour download select the program Bonjour for Windows according to your computer operating system and install the program In case of Mac OS X this program might be already installed in your PC This program will allow you to fix the network parameter automatically This Bonjour program does not support Linux If your IP assignment method is static follow the steps below 1 Insert the Printer Software CD ROM into your CD ROM drive The CD ROM should automatically run and an installation window appears 2 Click Next Getting started_ 33 e Ifthe installation window does not appear click Start gt Run Type X Setup exe replacing X with the letter which represents your drive and click OK e If you use Windows vista Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2 click Start gt All Programs gt Accessories gt Run and type X Setup exe 64 The installation window may slightly differ if you are reinstalling the driver 3 Select Typical installation for a network printer and then click Next 4 The list of machines available on the network appears Select the printer you want to install from the list and then click Next L e If you do not see your mach
249. l for querying and modifying directory services running over TCP IP LED A Light Emitting Diode LED is a semiconductor device that indicates the status of a machine MAC address Media Access Control MAC address is a unique identifier associated with a network adapter MAC address is a unique 48 bit identifier usually written as 12 hexadecimal characters grouped in pairs e g 00 00 0c 34 11 4e This address is usually hard coded into a Network Interface Card NIC by its manufacturer and used as an aid for routers trying to locate machines on large networks MFP Multi Function Peripheral MFP is an office machine that includes the following functionality in one physical body so as to have a printer a copier a fax a scanner and etc MH Modified Huffman MH is a compression method for decreasing the amount of data that needs to be transmitted between the fax machines to transfer the image recommended by ITU T T 4 MH is a codebook based run length encoding scheme optimized to efficiently compress white space As most faxes consist mostly of white space this minimizes the transmission time of most faxes MMR Modified Modified READ MMR is a compression method recommended by ITU T T 6 Modem A device that modulates a carrier signal to encode digital information and also demodulates such a carrier signal to decode transmitted information MR Modified Read MR is a compression method recommended by ITU
250. l stop N CHANGING THE SETTINGS FOR EACH COPY Your machine provides default settings for copying so that you can quickly and easily make a copy However if you want to change the options for each copy use the copy function buttons on the control panel 64 If you press Stop Clear while setting the copy options all of the options you have set for the current copy job will be canceled and returned to their default status Or they will automatically return to their default status after the machine completes the copy in progress Darkness If you have an original containing faint markings and dark images you can adjust the brightness to make a copy that is easier to read Press Menu Press OK when Copy Menu appears Press OK when Copy Feature appears Press the left right arrow until Darkness appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until the contrast mode you want appears and press OK Light Works well with dark print e Normal Works well with standard typed or printed originals Dark Works well with light print 6 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode oP ONS 34 Copying e Using special copy features e Setting copy timeout Original Type The original type setting is used to improve the copy quality by selecting the document type for the current copy job 1 Press Menu Press OK when Copy Menu appears Press OK when Copy Feature appears Press the left right arrow until Original Type appears
251. l the automatic redialing press Stop Clear To change the time interval between redials and the number of redial attempts See Sending options on page 57 Redialing the last number To redial the number you called last 1 Press Redial Pause 2 When an original is loaded in the ADF the machine automatically begins to send If an original is placed on the scanner glass select Yes to add another page Load another original and press OK When you have finished select No at the Another Page prompt Sending a fax to multiple destinations You can use the Multiple Send feature which allows you to send a fax to multiple locations Originals are automatically stored in memory and sent to a remote station After transmission the originals are automatically erased from memory You cannot send a color fax using this feature 1 Press Fax 2 Load originals face up into the ADF or place a single original face down on the scanner glass For details about loading an original See Loading originals on page 37 3 Adjust the document resolution and darkness to suit your fax needs See Adjusting the document settings on page 52 4 Press Menu until Fax Feature appears on the bottom line of the display and press OK 5 Press the left right arrow until Multi Send appears and press OK 6 Enter the number of the first receiving fax machine and press OK You can press speed dial numbers or select Group Dial Number using Address Book Button F
252. lder Printers Samsung Your printer model name Set P Double click the Seti PApplet html file The certificate window appears click Trust Click Kk in the SetlP window to open the TCP IP configuration window Enter the network card s MAC address IP address subnet mask default gateway and then click Apply when you enter the MAC address enter it without colon The machine prints the network information Confirm all the settings are correct 8 Close the SetIP program ukhW N N 38 Setting Up the Printer Set up for your printer will be different depending on which cable you use to connect the printer to your computer the network cable or the USB cable For a Network connected NOTE Some printers do not support a network interface Before connecting your printer make sure that your printer supports a network interface by referring to Printer Specifications in your Printer User s Guide 1 Follow the instructions on Installing Software on page 37 to install the PPD and Filter files on your computer 2 Open the Applications folder Utilities and Print Setup Utility For MAC OS 10 5 10 6 open System Preferences from the Applications folder and click Printer amp Fax 3 Click Add on the Printer List For MAC OS 10 5 10 6 press the icon then a display window will pop up 4 For MAC OS 10 3 select the IP Printing tab For MAC OS 10 4 click IP Prin
253. le transmissions JBIG Joint Bi level Image Experts Group JBIG is an image compression standard with no loss of accuracy or quality which was designed for compression of binary images particularly for faxes but can also be used on other images JPEG Joint Photographic Experts Group JPEG is a most commonly used standard method of lossy compression for photographic images It is the format used for storing and transmitting photographs on the World Wide Web LDAP The Lightweight Directory Access Protocol LDAP is a networking protocol for querying and modifying directory services running over TCP IP LED A Light Emitting Diode LED is a semiconductor device that indicates the status of a machine MAC address Media Access Control MAC address is a unique identifier associated with a network adapter MAC address is a unique 48 bit identifier usually written as 12 hexadecimal characters grouped in pairs e g 00 00 0c 34 11 4e This address is usually hard coded into a Network Interface Card NIC by its manufacturer and used as an aid for routers trying to locate machines on large networks MFP Multi Function Peripheral MFP is an office machine that includes the following functionality in one physical body so as to have a printer a copier a fax a scanner and etc MH Modified Huffman MH is a compression method for decreasing the amount of data that needs to be transmitted between the fax machines to
254. lection 7 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode When you make a reduced copy black lines may appear at the bottom of your copy CHANGING THE DEFAULT COPY SETTINGS The copy options including darkness original type copy size and number of copies can be set to those most frequently used When you copy a document the default settings are used unless they have been changed by using the corresponding buttons on the control panel 1 Press Copy 2 Press Menu until Copy Setup appears on the bottom line of the display and press OK 3 Press OK when Change Default appears 4 Press the left right arrow until the setup option you want appears and press OK 5 Press the left right arrow until the setting you want appears and press OK 6 Repeat steps 4 through 5 as needed 7 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode While you are setting copy options pressing Stop Clear cancels the changed settings and restores the defaults ID CARD COPYING Your machine can print 2 sided originals on one sheet of A4 Letter Legal Folio Oficio Executive B5 A5 or A6 sized paper The machine prints one side of the original on the upper half of the paper and the other side on the lower half without reducing the size of the original This feature is helpful for copying a small sized item such as a business card Z The original must be placed on the scanner gl
255. lem is caused because Mac OS cannot create the font during the Cover page printing English alphabet and numbers are displayed normally at the Cover page Refer to Mac OS User s Guide that came with your computer for further information on Mac OS error messages Troubleshooting_ 64 ordering supplies This chapter provides information on purchasing cartridges and accessories available for your machine This chapter includes Supplies Z The optional parts or features may differ by countries Contact your sales representatives whether the part you want is available in your country SUPPLIES When the toner runs out you can order the following type of toner cartridge for your machine TYPE AVERAGE YIELD PART NUMBER Standard yield toner cartridge Average continuous black cartridge yield 1 500 standard pages Black Average continuous colored cartridge yield 1 000 standard pages Yellow Magenta Cyan CLT K409S Black CLT C409S Cyan CLT M409S Magenta CLT Y409S Yellow Region A CLT K4092S Black CLT C4092S Cyan CLT M4092S Magenta CLT Y4092S Yellow Imaging unit Approx 24 000 images CLT R409 Waste toner container Approx 10 000 images Full color 5 image CLT W409 a Declared yield value in accordance with ISO IEC 19798 b Region A Albania Austria Belgium Bosnia Bulgaria Croatia Cyprus Czech Republic Denmark Finland F
256. lephone Company may make changes in its communications facilities equipment operations or procedures where such action is reasonably required in the operation of its business and is not inconsistent with the rules and regulations in FCC Part 68 If such changes can be reasonably expected to render any customer terminal equipment incompatible with telephone company communications facilities or require modification or alteration of such terminal equipment or otherwise materially affect its use or performance the customer shall be given adequate notice in writing to allow the customer an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted service RINGER EQUIVALENCE NUMBER The Ringer Equivalence Number and FCC Registration Number for this machine may be found on the label located on the bottom or rear of the machine In some instances you may need to provide these numbers to the telephone company The Ringer Equivalence Number REN is a measure of the electrical load placed on the telephone line and is useful for determining whether you have overloaded the line Installing several types of equipment on the same telephone line may result in problems making and receiving telephone calls especially ringing when your line is called The sum of all Ringer Equivalence Numbers of the equipment on your telephone line should be less than five in order to assure proper service from the telephone company In some cases a sum of five may not be usable on your line If a
257. less devices Since your system is equipped with a wireless device when traveling between countries with your system check with the local Radio Approval authorities prior to any move or trip for any restrictions on the use of a wireless device in the destination country If your system came equipped with an internal embedded wireless device do not operate the wireless device unless all covers and shields are in place and the system is fully assembled Wireless devices are not user serviceable Do not modify them in any way Modification to a wireless device will void the authorization to use it Contact manufacturer for service Only use drivers approved for the country in which the device will be used See the manufacturer System Restoration Kit or contact manufacturer Technical Support for additional information 12_Safety information OPENSSL LICENSE Copyright c 1998 2001 The OpenSSL Project All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use
258. ll from the list and then click Next Select Printer Port Select a port that will be used for your printer TCP IP Port C Shared Printer UNC Add TCP IP Port Select a printer from the list below If you don t see your printer below click Update to refresh the list Printer Name IP Port Name NOTE If a firewall has been enabled on this PC this may be preventing the installer from Update detecting the printer Temporarily disable the firewall on this PC before continuing with the installation e If you do not see your machine on the list click Update to refresh the list or select Add TCP IP Port to add your machine to the network To add the machine to the network enter the port name and the IP address for the machine To verify your machine s IP address or the MAC address print a Network Configuration page See Printing reports on page 44 e To find a shared network printer UNC Path select Shared Printer UNC and enter the shared name manually or find a shared printer by clicking the Browse button If you are not sure of the IP address contact your network administrator or print network information See Printing reports on page 44 7 After the installation is finished a window appears asking you to print a test page and to register yourself as a user of Samsung machines in order to receive information from Samsung If you wish to do so select the corresponding checkbox es and click Finish
259. ller displays the number of pages printed each item 5 If you selected to print a supply information page press OK to confirm 6 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode MANAGING YOUR MACHINE FROM THE WEBSITE If you have connected your machine to a network and set up TCP IP network parameters correctly you can manage the machine via Samsung s SyncThru Web Service an embedded web server Use SyneThru Web Service to e View the machine s device information and check its current status e Change TCP IP parameters and set up other network parameters e Change the printer properties e Set the machine to send email notifications to let you know the machine s status e Get support for using the machine To access SyncThru Web Service 1 Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer from Windows 2 Enter the machine IP address http xxx xxx xxx xxx in the address field and press the Enter key or click Go Your machine s embedded website opens CHECKING THE MACHINE S SERIAL NUMBER When you call for service or register as a user on the Samsung website the machine s serial number may be required You can check the serial number by taking the following steps 1 Press Menu until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the display and press OK Press the left right arrow until Maintenance appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until Serial Number appears and press OK Check your mach
260. ltitude adjustment Changing the display language Setting the date and time Changing the clock mode Changing the default mode Setting sounds Entering characters using the number keypad Using the save modes Auto continue Loading originals On the scanner glass In the ADF Selecting print media Specifications on print media Media sizes supported in each mode contents COPYING SCANNING BASIC PRINTING FAXING 52 52 52 53 53 53 53 53 53 54 54 55 Guidelines for special print media Changing the size of the paper in the paper tray Printing on special print materials Feeding the print material manually Setting the paper size and type Copying Changing the settings for each copy Darkness Original Type Reduced or enlarged copy Changing the default copy settings ID card copying Using special copy features 2 up or 4 up copying Poster copying Clone copying Erasing background images Gray enhance copying Setting copy timeout Scanning basics Scanning from the control panel Setting scan information in Samsung Scan Manager Scanning to application programs Scanning by a network connection Scanning to Email Changing the settings for each scan job Changing the default scan settings Setting up Address Book Registering speed email numbers Configuring group email numbers Using Address Book entries Searching Address Book for an entry Printing Address Book Printing a document Canceling a print job Sending a fax
261. machine If the access point has an available LAN port you may connect your machine directly to the access point Then print the Network Configuration Report as explained above If the report shows that the IP address has changed the assignment was successful You will see the new IP address in the report Leave the machine attached to the network Static IP assignment Use Set P program to change the IP address from your computer If your machine has a control panel you can also change IP address using the machine s control panel In an office environment we recommend that you contact a network administrator to set this address for you IP setting using control panel 1 Press Menu on the control panel until you see Network on the bottom line of the display and press OK Press the left right arrow until TCP IP appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until Static appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until IP Address appears and press OK Enter a byte between 0 and 255 using the number keypad and press the left right arrow to move between bytes Repeat this to complete the address from the 1st byte to the 4th byte When you have finished press OK 8 Repeat steps 6 and 7 to configure the other TCP IP parameters subnet mask and gateway address IP setting using Set P program The following procedure is based on Windows XP This program is for manually setting the network IP address of your machine using i
262. machine Go to step 6 When From apprears on the top line of the display enter the sender s email address and press OK When DestinationEmail appears on the top line of the display enter the recipient s email address and press OK If you have set up Address Book you can use a speed button or a speed email or group email number to retrieve an address from memory See Setting up Address Book on page 49 To enter additional addresses press OK when Yes appears and repeat step 6 To continue to the next step press the left right arrow to select No and press OK If the display asks if you want to send the email to your account press the left right arrow to select Yes or No and press OK 64 This prompt does not appear if you have activated the Auto Send To Self option in the email account setup Enter an email subject and press OK 10 Press the left right arrow until the file format you want appears and press OK or Start The machine begins scanning and then sends the email 11 If the machine asks if you want to log off your account press the left right arrow to select Yes or No and press OK 12 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Naa THE SETTINGS FOR EACH SCAN Your machine provides you with the following setting options to allow you to customize your scan jobs e Scan Size Sets the image size e Original Type Sets the original document s type e Resolution Sets the image resolution e Scan Color Set
263. machine to apply settings Configuring the machine s wireless network Before starting you will need to know the SSID of your wireless network and the Network Key if it is encrypted This information was set when the access point was installed If you do not know about your wireless environment please ask the person who has set up your network To configure wireless parameters you can use both control panel and SyncThru Web Service If your machine has control panel refer to Using the control panel Otherwise refer to Using SyncThru Web Service Using the control panel 1 Press Menu on the control panel until you see Network on the Network parameter setting You can also set up the various network settings through the network 2 administration programs bottom line of the display and press OK Press the left right arrow until Wireless appears and press OK 3 Press the left right arrow until WLAN Setting appears and press OK Getting started_ 31 Press the left right arrow to select the setup method you want appears and press OK Wizard The wireless network interface card in your printer searches for wireless networks in the area and shows the results Custom You can configure the wireless settings according to your needs Wizard mode 1 2 The wireless network interface card on your machine searches for wireless network in the area and shows the results Press the left right arrow to select a ne
264. machine to the EXT socket on the back of your machine If the caller leaves a message the answering machine stores the message as it would normally If your machine detects a fax tone on the line it automatically starts to receive the fax L e Ifyou have set your machine to Ans Fax mode and your answering machine is switched off or no answering machine is connected to EXT socket your machine automatically goes into Fax mode after a predefined number of rings e If your answering machine has a user selectable ring counter set the machine to answer incoming calls within 1 ring e Ifyou are in Tel mode manual reception when the answering machine is connected to your machine you must switch off the answering machine or the outgoing message from the answering machine will interrupt your phone conversation Receiving faxes using DRPD mode Distinctive Ring is a telephone company service which enables an user to use a single telephone line to answer several different telephone numbers The particular number someone uses to call you is identified by different ringing patterns which consist of various combinations of long and short ringing sounds This feature is often used by answering services who answer telephones for many different clients and need to know which number someone is calling in on to properly answer the phone Using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection DRPD feature your fax machine can learn the ring pattern you design
265. maging unit e Be careful not to scratch the surface of the imaging unit To prevent damage do not expose the imaging unit to light for more than a few minutes Cover it with a piece of paper to protect it if necessary 7 Holding the groove on the front of the imaging unit push imaging unit in to the machine 8 Insert the waste toner container into position and then push it to make sure that it is firmly seated in place 10 Close the front cover firmly AN If the front cover is not completely closed the machine will not operate Please make sure all toner cartridges are installed properly If any toner cartridge is installed improperly the front cover do not close 11 Turn the machine on L It may takes few minutes for your machine to get ready REPLACING THE WASTE TONER CONTAINER When the life span of the waste toner container has expired the Smart Panel program window appears on the computer indicating the waste toner container needs to be replaced Otherwise your machine stops printing 1 Turn the machine off then wait a few minutes for the machine to cool 2 Using the handle completely open the front cover L Make sure that you lay the waste toner container on a flat surface so that the toner does not spill 4 Remove the container s cap from the container as shown below and use it to close the waste toner container opening A Do not tilt or turn over the container 5 Take a n
266. may be affected by operating environment printing interval media type and media size c It varies depending on the product configuration d May be affected by operating environment optional printing interval media type and media size PRINTER SPECIFICATIONS SCANNER SPECIFICATIONS ITEM DESCRIPTION Printing method Color laser beam printing Printing speed Black amp White Up to 16 ppm A4 17 ppm Letter Color Up to 4 ppm A4 4 ppm Letter First print out time Black amp From ready Less than 14 seconds White e From coldboot Less than 45 seconds Color From ready Less than 26 seconds From coldboot Less than 57 seconds Print resolution Max 2 400 x 600 dpi class Printer language SPL C OS compatibility Windows 2000 XP 2003 2008 Vista 7 Server 2008 R2 Linux Red Hat 8 0 9 0 Mandrake 9 2 10 1 SuSE 8 2 9 2 Fedora Core 1 4 Macintosh Mac OS X 10 3 10 6 Universal Mac Interface High speed USB 2 0 Ethernet 10 100 Base TX embedded type a lt will be affected by operating system used computing performance application software connecting method media type media size and job complexity b Visit www samsungprinter com to download the latest software version c CLX 3175N only 67 Specifications ITEM DESCRIPTION Compatibility TWAIN standard WIA standard Scanning method Color CIS Res
267. med paper or if there is any resistance when you pull stop and go to the next step 3 Open the rear cover 4 If you see the jammed paper pull it straight up Skip to step 8 If you still do not see the paper go to the next step 5 Pull up the fuser lever 1 fuser lever 9 Pull down the fuser lever 10 Close the rear cover Printing automatically resumes 6 Open the scan unit 7 Carefully take the jammed paper out of the machine closed Make sure that it is securely latched 8 Lowering down the scan unit gently and slowly until it is completely Be careful not to pinch your fingers Troubleshooting_ 75 UNDERSTANDING DISPLAY MESSAGES Messages appear on the control panel display to indicate the machine s status or errors Refer to the tables below to understand the messages meaning and correct the problem if necessary Messages and their meanings are listed in alphabetical order 1 If the message is not in the table cycle the power and try the job again If the problem persists call for service e When you call for service it is very convenient to provide the service representative with the contents of display message e xxx indicates the media type SUGGESTED MESSAGE MEANING SOLUTIONS ADC Not A problem has Turn the power switch Confirm Error occurred in the ADC in the machine off and on If the problem persists call for service SUGGES
268. media e Changing the size of the paper in the paper tray LOADING ORIGINALS You can use the scanner glass or ADF to load an original for copying scanning and sending a fax On the scanner glass Make sure that no originals are in the ADF If an original is detected in the ADF the machine gives it priority over the original on the scanner glass To get the best scan quality especially for colored or gray scaled images use the scanner glass 1 Lift and open the scanner lid 2 Place the original face down on the scanner glass and align it with the registration guide at the top left corner of the glass e Printing on special print materials e Setting the paper size and type 3 Close the scanner lid A e Be careful not to break the scan glass You may get hurt e Be careful not to let the scan cover fall over your hands You may get hurt e When scanning or copying do not look at the light inside the scanner It is harmful for your eyes and it can be dangerous 64 e Leaving the scanner lid open while copying may affect copy quality and toner consumption e Dust on the scanner glass may cause black spots on the printout Always keep it clean e If you are copying a page from a book or magazine lift the scanner lid until its hinges are caught by the stopper and then close the lid If the book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm start copying with the lid open In the ADF Using the ADF you can load up to 15 sh
269. minimize human contact during normal operation As a general guideline a separation of 20 cm 8 inches between the wireless device and the body for use of a wireless device near the body this does not include extremities is typical This device should be used more than 20 cm 8 inches from the body when wireless devices are on and transmitting This transmitter must not be collocated or operation in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter Some circumstances require restrictions on wireless devices Examples of common restrictions are listed below Radio frequency wireless communication can interfere with equipment on commercial aircraft Current aviation regulations require wireless devices to be turned off while traveling in an airplane IEEE 802 11 also known as wireless Ethernet and Bluetooth communication devices are examples of devices that provide wireless communication In environments where the risk of interference to other devices or services is harmful or perceived as harmful the option to use a wireless device may be restricted or eliminated Airports Hospitals and Oxygen or flammable gas laden atmospheres are limited examples where use of wireless devices may be restricted or eliminated When in environments where you are uncertain of the sanction to use wireless devices ask the applicable authority for authorization prior to use or turning on the wireless device Every country has different restrictions on the use of wire
270. modes Power Save mode Power Save mode allows your machine to reduce power consumption when it is not in actual use You can turn this mode on and select a length of time for which the machine waits after a job is printed before it switches to a reduced power state 1 Press Menu and then OK 2 Press the left right arrow until System Setup appears and press OK 3 Press OK when Machine Setup appears 4 Press the left right arrow until Power Save appears and press OK 5 Press the left right arrow until the time setting you want appears and press OK 6 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Auto continue This is the option to set the machine to continue printing or not in case the paper size you have set and the paper within the tray mismatches 1 Press Menu and then OK Press the left right arrow until System Setup appears and press OK Press OK when Machine Setup appears Press the left right arrow until Auto Continue appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until the binding option you want appears e On Automatically prints after set time passes when the paper size mismatches the tray paper size e Off Waits until you press Black Start or Color Start on the control panel when the paper size mismatches the tray paper size 6 Press OK to save your selection 7 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode go PON loading orginals and print media This chapter introduces you how to load originals a
271. mputer e Printer Software CD ROM that provided with your machine e Wireless network printer your machine e USB cable Creating the Ad Hoc network in Windows When items are ready follow the next procedure 1 Connect the USB cable provided with your machine 2 Turn on your computer and printer 3 Put the provided Printer Software CD ROM into your CD ROM drive The CD ROM starts automatically and the welcome message shows on the window Select a language from the drop down list and click Next Select the Wireless Setup option and click Next 6 The software searches the wireless network devices nA Z If the searching has failed you may check if the USB cable is connected between the computer and printer properly and follow the instruction on the window 7 After searching the window shows the wireless network devices Select the name SSID of your wireless computer and click Next 64 When you set the wireless configuration manually click Advanced Setting e Network Name Type the SSID of wireless computer the SSID is case sensitive e Operation Mode Select Ad hoc e Channel Select the channel Auto Setting or 2412 MHz to 2467 MHz e Authentication Select an authentication type Open System Authentication is not used and encryption may or may not be used depending on the need for data security Shared Key Authentication is used A device that has a proper WEP key which can access the network e Encryptio
272. mputer appears Click Continue When the uninstallation is done click Quit OCONOUBRW N Using Seti P program This program is for the network IP setting using the MAC address which is the hardware serial number of the network printer card or interface Especially it is for the network administrator to set several network IPs at the same time You can only use Setli P program when your machine is connected to a network SetI P program should be automatically installed during the printer driver installation NOTE If you select Typical installation for a network printer during the printer driver installation the SetIP program automatically runs after the installation Follow the below instruction 1 The certificate window appears click Trust 2 Print the machine s network information report which includes your machine s MAC address 3 Click Kk in the SetIP window to open the TCP IP configuration window 4 Enter the network card s MAC address IP address subnet mask default gateway and then click Apply NOTE when you enter the MAC address enter it without colon 5 The machine prints the network information Confirm all the settings are correct 6 Close the SetIP program Starting the program If you want to change your network printer IP setting follow the below instruction 1 Print the machine s network information report which includes your machine s MAC address Open the Library fo
273. n Select the encryption None WEP64 WEP 128 e Network Key Enter the encryption network key value e Confirm Network Key Confirm the encryption network key value WEP Key Index It is enabled when WEP is set for Encryption after selecting Open System or Shared Key Enter the WEP key After setting in Advanced Setting go to the step 9 8 The wireless network security window appears Select Open System or Shared Key for the authentication and click Next e WEP Wired Equivalent Privacy is a security protocol preventing unauthorized access to your wireless network WEP encrypts the data portion of each packet exchanged on a wireless network using a 64 bit or 128 bit WEP encryption key NG The wireless network security window does not appear when the Ad hoc network has no security setting Getting started 27 9 10 11 12 13 The window shows the wireless network setting and check if settings are right Click Next For the DHCP method If the IP address assignment method is DHCP check if DHCP is shown in the window However if it shows Static click Change TCP IP to change the assignment method to DHCP For the Static method If the IP address assignment method is Static check if Static is shown in the window However if it shows DHCP click Change TCP IP to enter the IP address and other network configuration values for the printer Before entering the IP address for the printer you must know the comp
274. n automatically redial a remote fax machine if it was busy You can set an interval between attempts Prefix Dial You can set a prefix of up to five digits This number dials before any automatic dial number is started It is useful for accessing a PABX exchange ECM Mode This mode helps with poor line quality and makes sure any faxes you send are sent smoothly to any other ECM equipped fax machine Sending a fax using ECM may take more time Auto Reduction When receiving a fax containing pages as long as or longer than the paper loaded in the paper tray the machine can reduce the size of the original to fit the size of the paper loaded in the machine Turn on this feature if you want to automatically reduce an incoming page With this feature set to Off the machine cannot reduce the original to fit onto one page The original will be divided and printed in actual size on two or more pages Faxing_ 57 OPTION DESCRIPTION Discard Size When receiving a fax containing pages as long as or longer than the paper in your machine you can set the machine to discard a specific length from the end of the received fax The machine will print the received fax on one or more sheets of paper minus the data that would have been on the specified discard segment When the received fax contains pages larger than the paper in your machine and Auto Reduction has been turned on the machine will reduce the fax to fit on the
275. n its surface Try a different brand of paper See Selecting print media on page 28 e The paper lot is bad The manufacturing processes can cause some areas to reject toner Try a different kind or brand of paper e Change the printer option and try again Go to printer properties click Paper tab and set type to Thick Paper Refer to the Software section for details If these steps do not correct the problem contact a service representative Vertical repetitive defects AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc_ AaBbCc If marks repeatedly appear on the printed side of the page at even intervals e The toner cartridge may be damaged If a repetitive mark occurs on the page print a cleaning sheet several times to clean the cartridge After the printout if you still have the same problems remove the toner cartridge and install a new one See Replacing the toner cartridge on page 48 e Parts of the machine may have toner on them If the defects occur on the back of the page the problem will likely correct itself after a few more pages e The fusing assembly may be damaged Contact a service representative White Spots Anite spots appear on the page The paper is too rough and a lot of dirt from the paper falls to the inner devices within the machine which means the transfer belt may be dirty Clean the inside of your machine Contact a service representative e The paper path may need cleaning Conta
276. n mode because of the large amount of memory required to analyze and reproduce the scanned image Set your computer to the ECP printer mode through BIOS setting It will help to increase the speed For details about how to set BIOS refer to your computer user s guide Message appears on your computer screen e Device can t be set to the H W mode you want e Portis being used by another program e Port is Disabled e Scanner is busy receiving or printing data When the current job is completed try again e Invalid handle Scanning has failed There may be a copying or printing job in progress When that job is complete try your job again The Selected port is currently being used Restart your computer and try again The printer cable may be improperly connected or the power may be off The scanner driver is not installed or the operating environment is not set up properly Ensure that the machine is properly connected and the power is on Then restart your computer The USB cable may be improperly connected or the power may be off Troubleshooting_ 83 Fax problems CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS The machine is not working there is no display and the buttons are not working e Unplug the power cord and plug it in again e Ensure that there is power to the electrical outlet Blank areas
277. n permission please contact openssl core openssl org 6 Products derived from this software may not be called OpenSSL nor may OpenSSL appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project 7 Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT AS IS AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com This product includes software written by Tim Hudson tih cryptsoft com a ORIGINAL SSLEAY LICENSE Copyright C 1995 1998 Eric Young eay cryptsoft com All rights reserved This package is an SSL implemen
278. n the front of your machine A e Do not remove the USB memory device while the machine is in operation or writing to or reading from USB memory The machine warranty does not cover damage caused by use s misuse e lf your USB memory device has certain features example security key security partition booting disk password settings and so forth do not use the USB memory device with your machine The files stored in the USB memory device may be corrupted or the machine may not automatically detect it For details about these features see device s User s Guide SCANNING TO A USB MEMORY DEVICE You can scan a document and save the scanned image onto a USB memory device There are two ways of doing this you can scan to the device using the default settings or you can customize your own scan settings A e If your USB memory device has certain features example security key security partition booting disk password settings and so forth do not use the USB memory device with your machine The files stored in the USB memory device may be corrupted or the machine may not automatically detect it For details about these features see device s User s Guide Scanning 1 Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine 2 Place a single original face down on the scanner glass For details about loading an original See Loading originals on page 28 3 Press Scan to 4 Press OK when Scan to
279. nd camcorder You do not need to connect it to a computer 1 Turn on the machine 2 Connect your PictBridge compatible device to the memory port on the front of the machine using the USB cable supplied with the device 3 Send an order to print images from the PictBridge compatible device L e Detailed information on how to print an image from a camera with PictBridge feature refer to the manual provided with your camera e Index print not support e Not support date or file name print maintenance This chapter provides information for maintaining your machine and the toner cartridge This chapter includes Printing reports Clearing memory Cleaning your machine Maintaining the cartridge Replacing the toner cartridge PRINTING REPORTS Your machine can provide various reports with useful information you will need The following reports are available 64 Some reports may not appear in the display depending on options or models If so it is not applicable to your machine REPORT LIST DESCRIPTION This list shows the status of the user selectable options You may print this list to confirm your changes after changing settings Configuration This list shows the current status of consumables in your machine Supplies Info Network Info This list shows information on your machine s network connection and configuration Printing a report 1 Press Menu and then OK 2 Press the le
280. nd print media into your machine This chapter includes e Loading originals e Selecting print media e Changing the size of the paper in the paper tray LOADING ORIGINALS You can use the scanner glass to load an original for copying and scanning On the scanner glass 1 Lift and open the scanner lid 2 Place the original face down on the scanner glass and align it with the registration guide at the top left corner of the glass e Printing on special print materials e Setting the paper size and type 3 Close the scanner lid A e Be careful not to break the scan glass You may get hurt e Be careful not to let the scan cover fall over your hands You may get hurt e When scanning or copying do not look at the light inside the scanner It is harmful for your eyes and it can be dangerous 64 e Leaving the scanner lid open while copying may affect copy quality and toner consumption e Dust on the scanner glass may cause black spots on the printout Always keep it clean e If you are copying a page from a book or magazine lift the scanner lid until its hinges are caught by the stopper and then close the lid If the book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm start copying with the lid open SELECTING PRINT MEDIA You can print on a variety of print media such as plain paper envelopes labels and transparencies Always use print media that meet the guidelines for use with your machine Print media that does not m
281. ng Flex fan and straighten paper before loading Do not use creased damp or highly curled paper Do not mix paper types in a tray Use only recommended print media See Setting the paper size and type on page 33 Ensure that the recommended side of the print media is facing up in the tray and manual feeder CLEARING PAPER JAMS When a paper jam occurs the warning message appears on the display screen Refer to the table below to locate and clear the paper jam MESSAGE LOCATION OF JAM GO TO Paper Jam 0 Open Close Door In the paper feed area and inside the machine See In the tray 1 on page 52 In the fuser unit area on page 52 Paper Jam 1 Inside the machine See In the tray 1 on Check Inside page 52 In the fuser unit area on page 52 Paper Jam 2 Inside the machine and See In the tray 1 on Check Inside in the fuser area page 52 In the fuser unit area on page 52 Some messages may not appear in the display depending on options or models A To avoid tearing the paper pull the jammed paper out gently and slowly Follow the instructions in the following sections to clear the jam 52 _Troubleshooting e Understanding display messages Solving other problems In the tray 1 1 Open and close the front cover The jammed paper is automatically ejected from the machine If the paper does not exit go to the next step 2 Pull the tray 1 out of the m
282. ng Using Help Printing a Document NOTES Your printer driver Properties window that appears in this User s Guide may differ depending on the printer in use However the composition of the printer properties window is similar Check the Operating System s that are compatible with your printer Please refer to the OS Compatibility section of Printer Specifications in your Printer User s Guide If you need to know the exact name of your printer you can check the supplied CD ROM When you select an option in printer properties you may see an exclamationmark or mark An exclamation mark means you can select that certain option but it is not recommended and mark means you cannot select that option due to the machineis setting or environment The following procedure describes the general steps required for printing from various Windows applications The exact steps for printing a document may vary depending on the application program you are using Refer to the User s Guide of your software application for the exact printing procedure Basic Printing 12 1 Open the document you want to print 2 4 Select Print from the File menu The Print window is displayed It may look slightly different depending on your application The basic print settings are selected within the Print window These settings include the number of copies and print range amp Print EAEg General Select Printer x a
283. ng as well as managing print jobs media size resolution and so forth IPP can be used locally or over the Internet to hundreds of printers and also supports access control authentication and encryption making it a much more capable and secure printing solution than older ones IPX SPX IPX SPX stands for Internet Packet Exchange Sequenced Packet Exchange It is a networking protocol used by the Novell NetWare operating systems IPX and SPX both provide connection services similar to TCP IP with the IPX protocol having similarities to IP and SPX having similarities to TCP IPX SPX was primarily designed for local area networks LANs and is a very efficient protocol for this purpose typically its performance exceeds that of TCP IP on a LAN ISO The International Organization for Standardization ISO is an international standard setting body composed of representatives from national standards bodies It produces world wide industrial and commercial standards ITU T The International Telecommunication Union is an international organization established to standardize and regulate international radio and telecommunications Its main tasks include standardization allocation of the radio spectrum and organizing interconnection arrangements between different countries to allow international phone calls A T out of ITU T indicates telecommunication ITU T No 1 chart Standardized test chart published by ITU T for document facsimi
284. ng disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com The word cryptographic can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic related 4 Ifyou include any Windows specific code or a derivative thereof from the apps directory application code you must include an acknowledgement This product includes software written by Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUC
285. nsist of a smaller number of dots HDD Hard Disk Drive HDD commonly referred to as a hard drive or hard disk is a non volatile storage device which stores digitally encoded data on rapidly rotating platters with magnetic surfaces IEEE The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IEEE is an international non profit professional organization for the advancement of technology related to electricity IEEE 1284 The 1284 parallel port standard was developed by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IEEE The term 1284 B refers to a specific connector type on the end of the parallel cable that attaches to the peripheral for example a printer 69 Glossary Intranet A private network that uses Internet Protocols network connectivity and possibly the public telecommunication system to securely share part of an organization s information or operations with its employees Sometimes the term refers only to the most visible service the internal website IP address An Internet Protocol IP address is a unique number that devices use in order to identify and communicate with each other on a network utilizing the Internet Protocol standard IPM The Images Per Minute IPM is a way of measuring the speed of a printer An IPM rate indicates the number of single sided sheets a printer can complete within one minute IPP The Internet Printing Protocol IPP defines a standard protocol for printi
286. nsparency Letter A4 Refer to the Plain paper section 138 to 146 g m 37 to 39 Ib bond 1 sheet for manual feeding in Glossy paper Letter A4 Refer to the Plain paper section 160 g m 44 Ib bond the tray Minimum size custom 76 x 160 mm 3 x 6 3 inches Maximum size custom 216 x 356 mm 8 5 x 14 inches 60 to 163 g m 16 to43 Ib bond a lf media weight is over 105 g m 28 Ib bond load a paper into the tray one by one b Maximum capacity may differ depending on media weight thickness and environmental conditions c Smoothness 100 to 250 sheffield d Recommended media Transparency for a Color Laser Printers by 3M such as PP2500 e Recommended media Glossy paper Letter for this machine by HP Brochure Paper Product Q6611A only f Recommended media Glossy paper A4 for this machine by HP Superior Paper 160 glossy Product Q6616A only Loading originals and print media_ 39 Media sizes supported in each mode MEDIA TYPE GUIDELINES Envelopes Continue Envelopes with a peel off adhesive strip or with more than one flap that folds over to seal must use adhesives compatible with the machine s fusing temperature for 0 1 second Check your machine s specification to view the fusing temperature see Printer specifications on page 89 The extra flaps and strips might cause wrinkling creasing or jams and may even damage the fuser
287. nter with a Macintosh Graphics The Graphics tab provides options for selecting Quality and Color Mode Select Graphics form the Presets drop down list to access the graphic features Printer 127 0 0 1 Presets Standard Graphics aay Quality O Best S Normal O Draft Color Mode ii Color O Grayscale ar ELECTRONICS C PDFv Preview Cancel C Print A Mac OS 10 4 Quality You can select the printing resolution The higher the setting the sharper the clarity of printed characters and graphics The higher setting also may increase the time it takes to print a document Color Mode You can set the color options Setting to Color typically produces the best possible print quality for color documents If you want to print a color document in grayscale select Grayscale Paper Set Paper Type to correspond to the paper loaded in the tray from which you want to print This will let you get the best quality printout If you load a different type of print material select the corresponding paper type Printer I3 Presets Standard 3 Paper 3 Paper Type Printer Default B 2 C PDF Preview Came A Mac OS 10 4 Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet of Paper You can print more than one page on a single sheet of paper This feature provides a cost effective way to print draft pages 1 From your Macintosh application select P
288. nterface Ethernet 10 100 Base TX wired LAN e Included Blank Not Available ABOUT THIS USER S GUIDE This user s guide provides information about basic understanding of the machine as well as detailed explanation on each step during the actual usage Both novice users and professional users can refer to this guide for installing and using the machine Some terms in this guide are used interchangeably as below e Document is synonymous with original e Paper is synonymous with media or print media Following table offers the conventions of this guide CONVENTION DESCRIPTION EXAMPLE Bold Used for texts on the display or actual prints on the machine Start Note Used to provide additional information or detailed specification of the machine z The date format may differ from function and feature Z country to country Caution Used to give users information to protect the machine from possible mechanical Do not touch the green underside of damage or malfunction A the toner cartridge Footnote Used to provide more detailed information on certain words or a phrase a pages per minute See page 1 for more Used to guide users to the reference page for the additional detailed information See page 1 for more information information Features of your new laser product_3 FINDING MORE INFORMATION You can find information for setting up and using your machine from the following resources
289. nternal damage and toner spillage Use of non Samsung and refilled toner cartridge Samsung Electronics does not recommend or approve the use of non Samsung brand toner cartridges in your printer including generic store brand refilled or remanufactured toner cartridges A e Samsung s printer warranty does not cover damage to the machine caused by the use of a refilled remanufactured or non Samsung brand toner cartridge Estimated cartridge life Estimated cartridge life the life of the toner cartridge yield depends on the amount of toner that print jobs require The actual print out number may vary depending on the print density of the pages you print on operating environment printing interval media type and or media size For example if you print a lot of graphics the consumption of the toner is high and you may need to change the cartridge more often Redistributing toner When a toner is low faded or light areas may appear It is possible that colored images may be printed with incorrect colors due to flawed mixing of toner colors when one of the colored toner cartridges is low on toner You can temporarily improve print quality by redistributing the toner e The toner related message saying that the toner is low may appear on the display 47 _Maintenance Using the handle completely open the front cover Grasp the handles on the toner cartridge and pull to remove four cartridges from the machine
290. nts all pages from the last page to the first page Print Odd Pages Your printer prints only the odd numbered pages of the document Print Even Pages Your printer prints only the even numbered pages of the document Basic Printing 16 About Tab Use the About tab to display the copyright notice and the version number of the driver If you have an Internet browser you can connect to the Internet by clicking on the web site icon See Printing a Document on page 12 for more information about accessing printer properties Using a Favorite Setting The Favorites option which is visible on each properties tab allows you to save the current properties settings for future use To save a Favorites item 1 Change the settings as needed on each tab 2 Enter a name for the item in the Favorites input box A4 210 x 297 mm mm C inch Quality Normal Favorites Untitled pa Save 2 OK Cancel Jl Apply Jl Help 3 Click Save When you save Favorites all current driver settings are saved To use a saved setting select the item from the Favorites drop down list The printer is now set to print according to the Favorites setting you selected To delete a Favorites item select it from the list and click Delete You can also restore the printer driver s default settings by selecting Printer Default from the list Using Help Your printer has a help screen that can be activate
291. ny of your telephone equipment is not operating properly you should immediately remove it from your telephone line as it may cause harm to the telephone network A FCC Regulations state that changes or modifications to this equipment not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the user s authority to operate this equipment In the event that terminal equipment causes harm to the telephone network the telephone company should notify the customer that service may be stopped However where prior notice is impractical the company may temporarily cease service providing that they a promptly notify the customer b give the customer an opportunity to correct the equipment problem c inform the customer of the right to bring a complaint to the Federal Communication Commission pursuant to procedures set out in FCC Rules and Regulations Subpart E of Part 68 You should also know that e Your machine is not designed to be connected to a digital PBX system e Ifyou intend to use a computer modem or fax modem on the same phone line as your machine you may experience transmission and reception problems with all the equipment It is recommended that no other equipment except for a regular telephone share the line with your machine e If your area experiences a high incidence of lightning or power surges we recommend that you install surge protectors for both the power and the telephone lines Surge protectors can be purchased from your d
292. ocument You can scan a document using the Unified Driver Configurator window 1 Double click the Unified Driver Configurator on your desktop Click the o button to switch to Scanners Configuration Select the scanner on the list K Unified Driver Configurator r Scanners configuration Click your scanner KS Vendor Model Type Selected scanner lt a Exit mecos When you have only one MFP device and it is connected to the computer and turned on your scanner appears on the list and is automatically selected If you have two or more scanners attached to your computer you can select any scanner to work at any time For example while acquisition is in progress on the first scanner you may select the second scanner set the device options and start the image acquisition simultaneously Click Properties Load the document to be scanned face up into the ADF Automatic Document Feeder or face down on the document glass Click Preview in the Scanner Properties window Using Your Printer in Linux 34 The document is scanned and the image preview appears in the Preview Pane Preview Scan Image Quality Color Composition Color 16 Million Colors x Resolution dpi 300 gt Scan Area z Page Format f AA 210x297 mm x NE I Aavaneea Drag the pointer to
293. of background shading e Remove the old toner cartridge and install a new one See Replacing the toner cartridge on page 48 Misformed characters AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc e If characters are improperly formed and producing hollow images the paper stock may be too slick Try a different paper See Selecting print media on page 28 e If characters are improperly formed and producing a wavy effect the scanner unit may need service For service contact a service representative Toner smear AaBbCc AaBhCc AaBhCc AaBbCc AaBbCc e Clean the inside of the machine See Cleaning the inside on page 45 e Check the paper type and quality See Selecting print media on page 28 e Remove the toner cartridge and install a new one See Replacing the toner cartridge on page 48 Page skew AaBbCc AaBbCo AaBbCo AaBbG AaBboc e Ensure that the paper is loaded properly e Check the paper type and quality See Selecting print media on page 28 e Ensure that the paper or other material is loaded correctly and the guides are not too tight or too loose against the paper stack 59 Troubleshooting CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS Curl or wave Ensure that the paper is loaded properly Check the paper type and quality Both high temperature and humidity can cause paper curl See Selecting print media on page 28
294. of this software must display the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org 4 The names OpenSSL Toolkit and OpenSSL Project must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission For written permission please contact openssl core openssl org 6 Products derived from this software may not be called OpenSSL nor may OpenSSL appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project 7 Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT AS IS AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE
295. olution TWAIN 1 200 x 1 200 dpi standard Up to 4 800 x 4 800 dpi WIA Up to 1 200 x 1 200 dpi standard Scan to 100 200 300 dpi USB Scan to 75 150 200 300 600 dpi PC Network Scan PDF BMP TIFF JPEG File format Effective Max 289 mm 11 4 inches scanning length Effective Max 208 mm 8 2 inches scanning width Color bit depth 24 bit Mono bit depth 1 bit for black amp white mode 8 bit for gray scale a Due to the applications for scanning the maximum resolution might differ b CLX 3175N only c JPEG is not available when you select the mono mode in scan color COPIER SPECIFICATIONS ITEM DESCRIPTION Copy e Black amp White Up to 16 cpm A4 17 cpm Letter Speed Region A Up to 12 cpm A4 e Color Up to 4 cpm A4 4 cpm Letter Copy Scan glass up to 600 x 600 text text photo resolution magazine up to 1200 x 1200 photo Zoom Scanner glass 25 to 400 range a Copy speed is based on Single Document Multiple Copy b Region A Albania Austria Belgium Bosnia Bulgaria Croatia Cyprus Czech Republic Denmark Finland France Germany Greece Herzegovina Hungary Ireland Italy Luxemburg Macedonia Montenegro Netherlands Norway oland Portugal Romania Serbia Slovakia Slovenia Spain Sweden Switzerland UK glossary 4 The following glossary helps you get familiar with the product by understanding the terminologies c
296. omized See Customizing Scan to USB on page 61 Your machine begins scanning the original and then asks if you want to scan another page Press OK when Yes appears to scan more pages Load an original and press Color Start or Black Start Regardless of the button you press the color mode is decided as customized See Customizing Scan to USB on page 61 Otherwise press the left right arrow to select No and press OK After scanning is complete you can remove the USB memory device from the machine Customizing Scan to USB You can specify image size file format or color mode for each scanning to USB job Ws 2 3 o Press Scan Email Press Menu until Scan Feature appears on the bottom line of the display and press OK Press OK when USB Feature appears Press the left right arrow until the setting option you want appears and press OK You can set the following options e Scan Size Sets the image size Original Type Sets the original document s type e Resolution Sets the image resolution e Scan Color Sets the color mode If you select Mono in this option you cannot select JPEG in Scan Format Scan Format Sets the file format in which the image is to be saved When you select TIFF or PDF you can select to scan multiple pages If you select JPEG in this option you cannot select Mono in Scan Color Press the left right arrow until the desired status appears and press OK Repeat ste
297. ommonly used with printing as well as mentioned in this user s guide ADF An Automatic Document Feeder ADF is a mechanism that will automatically feed an original sheet of paper so that the machine can scan some amount of the paper at once AppleTalk AppleTalk is a proprietary suite of protocols developed by Apple Inc for computer networking It was included in the original Macintosh 1984 and is now deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP IP networking BIT Depth A computer graphics term describing the number of bits used to represent the color of a single pixel in a bitmapped image Higher color depth gives a broader range of distinct colors As the number of bits increases the number of possible colors becomes impractically large for a color map 1 bit color is commonly called as monochrome or black and white BMP A bitmapped graphics format used internally by the Microsoft Windows graphics subsystem GDI and used commonly as a simple graphics file format on that platform BOOTP Bootstrap Protocol A network protocol used by a network client to obtain its IP address automatically This is usually done in the bootstrap process of computers or operating systems running on them The BOOTP servers assign the IP address from a pool of addresses to each client BOOTP enables diskless workstation computers to obtain an IP address prior to loading any advanced operating system CCD Charge Coupled Device CCD is a hardware
298. ompliant with all of the relevant advisory notes contained in this document 10 Safety information European Radio Approval Information for products fitted with EU approved radio devices Low power Radio LAN type devices radio frequency RF wireless communication devices operating in the 2 4 GHz 5 GHz band may be present embedded in your printer system which is intended for home or office use This section is only applicable if these devices are present Refer to the system label to verify the presence of wireless devices Wireless devices that may be in your system are only qualified for use in the European Union or associated areas if a CE mark with CE a Notified Body Registration Number and the Alert Symbol is on the system label The power output of the wireless device or devices that may be embedded in you printer is well below the RF exposure limits as set by the European Commission through the R amp TTE directive European States qualified under wireless approvals EU Austria Belgium Cyprus Czech Republic Denmark Estonia Finland France with frequency restrictions Germany Greece Hungary Ireland Italy Latvia Lithuania Luxembourg Malta The Netherlands Poland Portugal Slovakia Slovenia Spain Sweden and the U K EEA EFTA countries Iceland Liechtenstein Norway and Switzerland European States with restrictions on use EU In France the frequency range is restricted to 2446 5 2483 5 MHz for devices above 1
299. on Allows you to adjust the brightness or i contrast of the image or to invert the Hi image Shows the properties of the image Properties For further details about the Image Manager application refer to the onscreen help 36 Using Your Printer in Linux 8 Using Your Printer with a Macintosh Your printer supports Macintosh systems with a built in USB interface or 10 100 Base TX network interface card When you print a file from a Macintosh computer you can use the CUPS driver by installing the PPD file NOTE Some printers do not support a network interface Make sure that your printer supports a network interface by referring to Printer Specifications in your Printer User s Guide This chapter includes e Installing Software e Uninstalling software e Using SetlP program e Setting Up the Printer e Printing e Scanning Installing Software The CD ROM that came with your printer provides you with the PPD file that allows you to use the CUPS driver or Apple LaserWriter driver only available when you use a printer which supports the PostScript driver for printing on a Macintosh computer Also it provides you with the Twain driver for scanning on a Macintosh computer Make sure that you connect your printer to the computer Turn on your computer and printer Insert the CD ROM which came with your printer into the CD ROM drive Double click CD ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh de
300. on WPA Pre Shared Key This uses a shared secret key generally called Pre Shared Key passphrase which is manually configured on the access point and each of its clients e Encryption Select the encryption None WEP64 WEP 128 TKIP AES TKIP AES e Network Key Enter the encryption network key value e Confirm Network Key Confirm the encryption network key value WEP Key Index It is enabled when WEP is set for Encryption after selecting Open System or Shared Key Enter the WEP key After setting in Advanced Setting go to the step 9 8 The wireless network security window appears The window may differ according to its security mode WEP or WPA In case of WEP Select Open System or Shared Key for the authentication and enter WEP security key Click Next WEP Wired Equivalent Privacy is a security protocol preventing unauthorized access to your wireless network WEP encrypts the data portion of each packet exchanged on a wireless network using a 64 bit or 128 bit WEP encryption key In case of WPA Enter the WPA shared key and click Next WPA authorizes and identifies users based on a secret key that changes automatically at regular intervals WPA also uses TKIP Temporal Key Integrity Protocol and AES Advanced Encryption Standard for data encryption The wireless network security window does not appear when the access point has no security setting The window shows the wireless network setting and check if sett
301. on to My Documents e If you want to scan from the default setting press Color Start or Black Start 8 Scanning begins IZ Scanned image is saved in computer s My Documents gt My Pictures gt Samsung folder e You can use Twain driver to scan quickly in Samsung Scan Manager program e You can also scan by pressing Window s Start gt Control Panel gt Samsung Scan Manager gt Quick Scan SCANNING BY A NETWORK CONNECTION If you have connected your machine to a network and set up network parameters correctly you can scan and send images over the network Setting up an e mail account To scan and send an image as an email attachment you need to set up network parameters using SyncThru Web Service 1 Enter your machine s IP address as the URL in a browser and click Go to access the web site of your machine Click Machine Settings and E mail Setup Select IP Address or Host Name Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name Enter the server port number from 1 to 65535 The default port number is 25 6 Check the box next to SMTP Requires Authentication to require authentication 7 Enter the SMTP server login name and password oO PON 48 Scanning 8 Click Apply L If the authentication method of SMTP server is POP3 before SMTP check the box next to SMTP Requires POP3 Before SMTP Authentication a Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name b Enter the s
302. oner blown into the air may be harmful Cleaning the outside Clean the cabinet of the machine with a soft lint free cloth You can dampen the cloth slightly with water but be careful not to let any water drip onto or into the machine Cleaning the inside During the printing process paper toner and dust particles can accumulate inside the machine This buildup can cause print quality problems such as toner specks or smearing Cleaning the inside of the machine clears or reduces these problems 1 Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord Wait for the machine to cool down 2 Using the handle completely open the front cover 3 Grasp the handles on the toner cartridge and pull to remove four cartridges from the machine 45 Maintenance 4 Pull the waste toner container out of the machine using its handle 5 Pull the imaging unit out of the machine using the groove on the front of the imaging unit A e Do not touch the green surface the imaging unit with your hands or any other material e Be careful not to scratch the surface of the imaging unit e If you leave the front cover open for more than a few minutes the imaging unit can be exposed to light This will cause damage to the imaging unit Close the front cover should the installation need to be halted for any reason 6 With a dry lint free cloth wipe away any dust and spilled toner from the toner cartridges area and their cavities A e
303. or details see Setting up Address Book on page 58 7 Enter the second fax number and press OK The display asks you to enter another fax number to send the document 8 To enter more fax numbers press OK when Yes appears and repeat steps 6 and 7 You can add up to 10 destinations Z Once you entered a group dial number you cannot enter another group dial numbers anymore Faxing_ 53 10 When you have finished entering fax numbers press the left right arrow to select No at the Another No prompt and press OK The original is scanned into memory before transmission The display shows memory capacity and the number of pages being stored in memory If an original is placed on the scanner glass select Yes to add another pages Load another original and press OK When you have finished select No at the Another Page prompt The machine begins sending the fax to the numbers you entered in the order in which you entered them Sending a delayed fax You can set your machine to send a fax at a later time when you will not be present You cannot send a color fax using this feature 1 2 o 10 11 12 Press Fax Load originals face up into the ADF or place a single original face down on the scanner glass For details about loading an original See Loading originals on page 37 Adjust the document resolution and darkness to suit your fax needs See Adjusting the document settings on page 52 Press Menu
304. ot see your printer on the list click Update to refresh the list or select Add TCP IP Port to add your printer to the network To add the printer to the Installing Printer Software in Windows network enter the port name and the IP address for the the network set the printer as the default printer and printer change the port name of each printer Click Next To verify your printer s IP address or the MAC address ed print a Network Configuration page Set Printer a Change printer settings to be installed To find a shared network printer UNC Path select Shared Printer UNC and enter the shared name manually or find a shared printer by clicking the Browse button l Printer Name Default Printer Shared Name You can change the printer name by selecting the name and entering a new name in the Printer 1 Name Field If you want other users on the network to access this printer click the check box in Share Name field and enter a share name that users will easily identify If you want this printer to be the default printer click the button in Default field NOTE If you cannot find your machine in network please turn off the firewall and click Update For Windows operating system click Start gt Control Panel and start windows firewall and set this option unactivated For aunta pineon aenar other operating system refer to its on line guide ay To install this softwa
305. ou may go to Configuring the machine s wireless network part directly Otherwise you have to follow all steps from Checking your Network Environments part Checking your Network Environments IP address Every device in a network is identified by a unique numerical address called an IP Address Your machine came with a default IP address of 192 0 0 192 and you can verify this by printing out a Network Configuration Report In most cases a new IP address will be automatically assigned by a DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Server located on the network In a few situations the IP address must be set manually This is called a static IP and is often required in corporate Intranets for security reasons We have provided an easy to use utility program on the Printer Software CD ROM named SetIP that can change the address for you If your machine has a control panel you may also change the IP address using the control panel In an office environment we recommend that you contact a network administrator to set this address for you Wireless Networks Infrastructure mode An Infrastructure mode network is the most common wireless network configuration in a home or office consisting of a wireless router or an access point that connects all the computers and other networked devices into a common local area network LAN The access point provides a special high speed connection to a Cable or DSL modem or other wide area network WA
306. ou may notice a reduction in print quality See the table below to clear the problem CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS Light or faded print AabbCc AaBbCc AabbCc AaBbCc AabbCc on the page printer driver cleaning If a vertical white streak or faded area appears e The toner supply is low You may be able to temporarily extend the toner cartridge life See Replacing the toner cartridge on page 68 If this does not improve the print quality install a new toner cartridge e The paper may not meet paper specifications for example the paper is too moist or too rough See Selecting print media on page 38 e Ifthe entire page is light the print resolution setting is too low Adjust the print resolution See the help screen of the e Acombination of faded or smeared defects may indicate that the toner cartridge needs e The surface of the LSU part inside the machine may be dirty Clean the LSU contact a service representative Toner specks AaBbCe Aa3bCe AaskCc AaBbCo AabpCe page 38 e The paper may not meet specifications for example the paper is too moist or too rough See Selecting print media on e The paper path may need cleaning See Cleaning the inside on page 64 CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS Dropouts AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbOc If faded areas gene
307. our machine depending on its model 4 Close the ADF cover Then load the removed page s if any back into the ADF 64 To prevent document jams use the scanner glass for thick thin or mixed paper type originals Exit misfeed 1 Remove any remaining pages from the ADF 2 Seize the misfeed paper and remove the paper from the document output tray by carefully pulling it to the right using both hands 3 Load the removed pages back into the ADF Roller misfeed 1 Open the scanner lid 2 Seize the misfeed paper and remove the paper from the feed area by carefully pulling it to the right using both hands 3 Close the scanner lid Then load the removed pages back into the ADF CLEARING PAPER JAMS When a paper jam occurs the warning message appears on the display screen Refer to the table below to locate and clear the paper jam MESSAGE LOCATION OF JAM GO TO Paper Jam 0 Open Close Door In the paper feed area and inside the machine See In the tray 1 on page 73 In the fuser unit area on page 73 Paper Jam 1 Check Inside Inside the machine See In the tray 1 on page 73 In the fuser unit area on page 73 Paper Jam 2 Check Inside Inside the machine and in the fuser area See In the tray 1 on page 73 In the fuser unit area on page 73 64 Some messages may not appear in the display depending on options or models AN To avoid tearing th
308. ow until Paper Setup appears and press OK 3 Press OK when Paper Size appears 4 Press the left right arrow until the paper size you are using appears and press OK 5 Press the left right arrow until Paper Type appears and press OK 6 Press the left right arrow until the paper type you are using appears and press OK 7 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode 4 If you want to use special sized paper such as billing paper select Custom in the Paper tab in the printer properties See Software section Loading originals and print media_ 43 copying This chapter gives you step by step instructions for copying documents This chapter includes e Copying e Changing the settings for each copy e Changing the default copy settings COPYING 1 Press Copy Ready to Copy appears on the top line of the display 2 Load originals face up into the ADF or place a single original face down on the scanner glass For details about loading an original See Loading originals on page 37 Enter the number of copies using the number keypad if necessary 4 Ifyou want to customize the copy settings including copy size darkness and original type by using the control panel buttons See Changing the settings for each copy on page 44 If necessary you can use special copy features such as 2 up or 4 up copying 5 Press Color Start to begin color copying Or press Black Start to begin black and white copying 1g You can
309. owed to gain control over the device The other consumer will encounter device busy response This can usually happen while starting scan procedure and appropriate message box appears To identify the source of the problem you should open ports configuration and select the port assigned to your scanner port s symbol dev mfp0 corresponds to LP 0 designation displayed in the scanners options dev mfp1 relates to LP 1 and so on USB ports start at dev mfp4 so scanner on USB 0 relates to dev mfp4 respectively and so forth sequentially In the Selected port pane you can see if the port is occupied by some other application If this is the case you should wait for completion of the current job or should press Release port button if you are sure that the present port s owner is not functioning properly 86 _ Troubleshooting CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS The machine does not scan Check if a document is loaded into the machine Check if your machine is connected to the computer Make sure if it is connected properly if 1 O error is reported while scanning Check if the port is not busy Since functional components of MFP printer and scanner share the same I O interface port the situation of simultaneous access of different consumer application to the same port is possible To avoid possible conflicts only one of them at a time is allowed to gain control over the device The other
310. pears and press OK 3 Press the left right arrow until the sound option you want appears and press OK 4 Press the left right arrow until the desired status or volume for the sound you have selected appears and press OK 5 If necessary repeat steps 3 through 5 to set other sounds 6 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Speaker volume for On Hook Dial 1 Press On Hook Dial A dial tone sounds from the speaker 2 Press the left right arrow until you hear the volume you want 3 Press Stop Clear to save the change and return to ready mode You can adjust the speaker volume only when the telephone line is connected Entering characters using the number keypad As you perform various tasks you may need to enter names and numbers For example when you set up your machine you enter your name or your company s name and the fax number When you store fax numbers or email addresses in memory you may also enter the corresponding names Entering alphanumeric characters 1 When you are prompted to enter a letter locate the button labeled with the character you want Press the button until the correct letter appears on the display For example to enter the letter O press 6 labeled with MNO Each time you press 6 the display shows a different letter M N O m n o and finally 6 You can enter special characters such as space plus sign and etc For details see the below section 2 To enter additional l
311. performance N 14 Adjust only those controls covered by the operating instructions Improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and may require extensive work by a qualified service technician to restore the machine to normal operation BA 15 Avoid using this machine during a lightning storm There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning If possible unplug the AC power and telephone cord for the duration of the lightning storm 16 The Power cord supplied with your machine should be used for safe operation If you are using a cord which is longer than 2 m with 110 V machine then it should be 16 AWG or bigger 17 Use only No 26 AWG or larger telephone line cord 18 SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS 19 This machine can be operated only in the country you have purchased Due to different voltage telecommunication configuration and etc a AWG American Wire Gauge LASER SAFETY STATEMENT The printer is certified in the U S to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR chapter 1 Subchapter J for Class I 1 laser products and elsewhere is certified as a Class laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC 825 Class laser products are not considered to be hazardous The laser system and printer are designed so there is never any human access to laser radiation above a Class level during normal operation user maintenance or prescribed service condition WARNING Never operate or service the p
312. please separate batteries from other types of waste and recycle them through your local free battery return system Safety information 7 RADIO FREQUENCY EMISSIONS FCC Information to the User This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference and e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures e Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna e Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver e Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected
313. plorer Safari or Firefox and enter your machine s new IP address in the browser window For example When the SyncThru Web Service window opens click Network Settings 3 Click Wireless and Select Wizard Then click Next Wizard will help you setup the wireless network configuration However if you want to set the wireless network directly select Custom ie tumagos Manes baang tess etra Maremare prad tore aw IPP Leer mp S itang es id Catan Let Lamprage Waw TOPP LPRJPP or ds lew Ope ter Mosa Chae Me eomm 1 Do aa Ad hac 10 y Asstt kd noc 0 baal Dialed LI a wean tecture 1 Engeat Ad hoc Mabenta LI Remeve Ban tist Comet e SSID SSID Service Set Identifier is a name that identifies a wireless network Access points and wireless devices attempting to connect to a specific wireless network must use the same SSID The SSID is case sensitive e Operation Mode Operation Mode refers to the type of wireless connections Ad hoc allows wireless devices to communicate directly with each other in a peer to peer environment Infrastructure allows wireless devices to communicate with each other through an access point If your network s operation mode is Infrastructure select the SSID of the access point If the operation mode is Ad hoc select the machine s SSID Note that airportthru is the default SSID of your machine 5 Click Next If wirele
314. ppears instead of the Printer Settings Utility window This program is supported in Windows MAC OS X But in Linux it is supported only in certain software such as Internet Explorer 5 5 or higher Safari 1 3 or higher Mozilla FireFox 1 5 or higher Driver Setting Only for Windows You can use the printer properties window which allows you to access all of the printer options you need for using your Changing the Smart Panel printer For details See Printer Settings on page 13 Prog ram Settings Right click in Windows or Linux or click in Mac OS X the Smart Panel icon and select Options Select the settings you want from the Options window Opening the Troubleshooting Guide Using the troubleshooting guide you can view solutions for error status problems Right click in Windows or Linux or click in Mac OS X the Smart Panel icon and select Troubleshooting Guide Using Printer Settings Utility Using the Printer Settings Utility you can configure and check print settings 1 Right click in Windows or Linux or click in Mac OS X the Smart Panel icon and select Printer Setting i 2 Change the settings 3 To send the changes to the printer click the Apply button NOTES If your printer is connected to a network the SyncThru Web Service window appears instead of the Printer Settings Utility window Using Onscreen Help File For more information about Printer Settings Utility
315. ppears on your computer screen e Device can t be set to the H W mode you want e Port is being used by another program e Port is Disabled e Scanner is busy receiving or printing data When the current job is completed try again e Invalid handle Scanning has failed There may be a copying or printing job in progress When that job is complete try your job again The Selected port is currently being used Restart your computer and try again The printer cable may be improperly connected or the power may be off The scanner driver is not installed or the operating environment is not set up properly Ensure that the machine is properly connected and the power is on Then restart your computer The USB cable may be improperly connected or the power may be off Common Windows problems Common Linux problems CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS File in Use message appears during installation Exit all software applications Remove all software from the StartUp Group then restart Windows Reinstall the printer driver General Protection Fault Exception OE Spool32 or Illegal Operation messages appear Close all other applications reboot Windows and try printing again Fail To Print A printer timeout error occurred messages appear These messages may appear during printing Just keep waiting un
316. pple com networking bonjour download select the program Bonjour for Windows due to your computer operating system and install the program This program will allow you to fix the network parameter automatically Follow the instruction in the installation window This Bonjour program does not support Linux Configuring network protocol via the machine You can set up TCP IP network parameters follow the steps listed below 1 Make sure your machine is connected to the network with an RJ 45 Ethernet cable Make sure you have turned on the machine Press Menu and then OK Press the left right arrow until Network appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until TCP IP appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until Static appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until IP Address appears and press OK NO oP oN Enter a byte between 0 and 255 using the left right arrow and press OK Repeat this to complete the address from the 1st byte to the 4th byte 8 Repeat steps 7 to configure the other TCP IP parameters subnet mask and gateway address 9 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode 64 Contact the network administrator if you are not sure how to configure 25 Getting started You can also set up the network settings through the network administration programs e SyncThru Web Admin Service Web based printer management solution for network administrators SyncThruTM Web Admin Service provides you
317. print quality is not guaranteed paper from the tray if necessary 3 Squeeze the paper width guide and slide it to the edge of the lever Z If you want to change the size to A4 first move the paper width guide to left and rotate the lever counterclockwise If you force the lever it could damage the tray Loading originals and print media_ 32 PRINTING ON SPECIAL PRINT MATERIALS The machine can hold special sizes and types of print material such as postcards note cards and envelopes Especially it is useful for single page printing on letterhead or colored paper Feeding the print material manually Load only one size of print media at a time in the tray To prevent paper jams do not add paper when there is still paper in the tray This also applies to other types of print media e Print media should be loaded face up with the side you want to print and the top edge going into the tray first Place print materials in the center of the tray e Always load only the specified print media to avoid paper jams and print quality problems See Selecting print media on page 28 e Flatten any curl on postcards envelopes and labels before loading them into the tray 1 Load the paper See Changing the size of the paper in the paper tray on page 31 L Depending on the media type you are using keep the following loading guidelines e Envelopes Flap side down and with the stamp area on the top left s
318. print documents e SANE Use this driver to scan documents e Smart Panel This program allows you to monitor the machine s status and alerts you when an error occurs during printing SetIP Use this program to set your machine s TCP IP addresses Macintosh e Printer driver Use this driver to take full advantage of your printer s features Scanner driver TWAIN driver is available for scanning documents on your machine Smart Panel This program allows you to monitor the machine s status and alerts you when an error occurs during printing e SetIP Use this program to set your machine s TCP IP addresses a Allows you to edit a scanned image in many ways using a powerful image editor and to send the image by email You can also open another image editor program like Adobe Photoshop from SmarThru For details refer to the onscreen help supplied on the SmarThru program 22 Introduction PRINTER DRIVER FEATURES Your printer drivers support the following standard features e Paper orientation size source and media type selection e Number of copies In addition you can use various special printing features The following table shows a general overview of features supported by your printer drivers Printer driver FEATURE WINDOWS LINUX MACINTOSH Color mode O O Machine quality option O O O Poster printing O X X Multiple pages per sheet O O 2 4 O N up Fit
319. printer driver help screen A print job is extremely slow The job may be very complex Reduce the complexity of the page or try adjusting the print quality settings The printer does not print PDF file correctly Some parts of graphics text or illustrations are missing Incompatibility between the PDF file and the Acrobat products Printing the PDF file as an image may solve this problem Turn on Print As Image from the Acrobat printing options It will take longer to print when you print a PDF file as an image Half the page is blank The page orientation setting may be incorrect Change the page orientation in your application See the printer driver help screen The print quality of photos is not good Images are not clear The resolution of the photo is very low Reduce the photo size If you increase the photo size in the software application the resolution will be reduced The paper size and the paper size settings do not match Ensure that the paper size in the printer driver settings matches the paper in the tray Or ensure that the paper size in the printer driver settings matches the paper selection in the software application settings you use The machine prints but the text is wrong garbled or incomplete The printer cable is loose or defective Disconnect the printer cable and reconnect Try a print job that you have already printed
320. printer properties may be incorrect applications the paper source selection is found under the Thin Paper tab within the printer properties Select the correct paper source See the printer driver help screen A print job is extremely slow The job may be very complex Reduce the complexity of the page or try adjusting the print quality settings The printer does not print PDF file correctly Some parts of graphics text or illustrations are missing Incompatibility between the PDF file and the Acrobat products Printing the PDF file as an image may solve this problem Turn on Print As Image from the Acrobat printing options It will take longer to print when you print a PDF file as an image Half the page is blank The page orientation setting may be incorrect Change the page orientation in your application See the printer driver help screen The print quality of photos is not good Images are not clear The resolution of the photo is very low Reduce the photo size If you increase the photo size in the software application the resolution will be reduced The paper size and the paper size settings do not match Ensure that the paper size in the printer driver settings matches the paper in the tray Or ensure that the paper size in the printer driver settings matches the paper selection in the software application settings you use The machine prin
321. printer system which is intended for home or office use This section is only applicable if these devices are present Refer to the system label to verify the presence of wireless devices Wireless devices that may be in your system are only qualified for use in the European Union or associated areas if a CE mark with CE a Notified Body Registration Number and the Alert Symbol is on the system label The power output of the wireless device or devices that may be embedded in you printer is well below the RF exposure limits as set by the European Commission through the R amp TTE directive European States qualified under wireless approvals EU Austria Belgium Cyprus Czech Republic Denmark Estonia Finland France with frequency restrictions Germany Greece Hungary Ireland Italy Latvia Lithuania Luxembourg Malta The Netherlands Poland Portugal Slovakia Slovenia Spain Sweden and the U K EEA EFTA countries Iceland Liechtenstein Norway and Switzerland European States with restrictions on use EU In France the frequency range is restricted to 2446 5 2483 5 MHz for devices above 10 mW transmitting power such as wireless In Italiy if used outside of own premises general authorization is required In Russian only for indoor applications EEA EFTA countries No limitations at this time Safety information_12 REGULATORY COMPLIANCE STATEMENTS AN Wireless Guidance Low power Radio LAN type devices radio frequency R
322. produced or translated to produce others but which is not itself copied or derived from something else OSI Open Systems Interconnection OSI is a model developed by the International Organization for Standardization ISO for communications OSI offers a standard modular approach to network design that divides the required set of complex functions into manageable self contained functional layers The layers are from top to bottom Application Presentation Session Transport Network Data Link and Physical PABX A private automatic branch exchange PABX is an automatic telephone switching system within a private enterprise PCL Printer Command Language PCL is a Page Description Language PDL developed by HP as a printer protocol and has become an industry standard Originally developed for early inkjet printers PCL has been released in varying levels for thermal matrix printer and page printers PDF Portable Document Format PDF is a proprietary file format developed by Adobe Systems for representing two dimensional documents in a device independent and resolution independent format PostScript PostScript PS is a page description language and programming language used primarily in the electronic and desktop publishing areas that is run in an interpreter to generate an image Printer Driver A program used to send commands and transfer data from the computer to the printer Print Media The media like paper en
323. ps 4 and 5 to set other setting options 7 When you have finished press Stop Clear to return to ready mode You can change the default scan settings For details see Changing the default scan settings on page 49 PRINTING FROM A USB MEMORY DEVICE You can directly print files stored on a USB memory device You can print TIFF BMP JPEG and PRN files Direct Print option supported file types A PRN Only files created by provided driver with your machine are compatible PRN files can be created by selecting the Print to file check box when you print a document The document will be saved as a PRN file rather than printed on paper Only PRN files created in this fashion can be printed directly from USB memory See Software section to learn how to create a PRN file BMP BMP Uncompressed TIFF TIFF 6 0 Baseline JPEG JPEG Baseline If your USB memory device has certain features example security key security partition booting disk password settings and so forth do not use the USB memory device with your machine The files stored in the USB memory device may be corrupted or the machine may not automatically detect it For details about these features see device s User s Guide To print a document from a USB memory device 1 2 3 Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine If one has already been inserted press Direct USB Press OK when USB Print appears Your machine
324. ption problems with all the equipment It is recommended that no other equipment except for a regular telephone share the line with your machine e If your area experiences a high incidence of lightning or power surges we recommend that you install surge protectors for both the power and the telephone lines Surge protectors can be purchased from your dealer or telephone and electronic specialty stores e When programming emergency numbers and or making test calls to emergency numbers use a non emergency number to advise the emergency service dispatcher of your intentions The dispatcher will give you further instructions on how to actually test the emergency number e This machine may not be used on coin service or party lines e This machine provides magnetic coupling to hearing aids You may safely connect this equipment to the telephone network by means of a standard modular jack USOC RJ 11C Safety information 9 REPLACING THE FITTED PLUG FOR UK ONLY Important The mains lead for this machine is fitted with a standard BS 1363 13 amp plug and has a 13 amp fuse When you change or examine the fuse you must re fit the correct 13 amp fuse You then need to replace the fuse cover If you have lost the fuse cover do not use the plug until you have another fuse cover Contact the people from you purchased the machine The 13 amp plug is the most widely used type in the UK and should be suitable However some buildings mainly old on
325. py Feature appears on the bottom line of the display and press OK 3 Press the left right arrow until Original Type appears and press OK 4 Press the left right arrow until the image mode you want appears and press OK e Text Use for originals containing mostly text e Text Photo Use for originals with mixed text and photographs e Photo Use when the originals are photographs e Magazine Use when the originals are magazines 5 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Reduced or enlarged copy You can reduce or enlarge the size of a copied image from 25 to 400 when you copy original documents from the scanner glass or from 25 to 100 from the ADF To select from the predefined copy sizes 1 Press Copy 2 Press Menu until Copy Feature appears on the bottom line of the display and press OK 3 Press the left right arrow until Reduce Enlarge appears and press OK 4 Press the left right arrow until the size setting you want appears and press OK To scale the copy by directly entering the scale rate 1 Press Copy 2 Press Menu until Copy Feature appears on the bottom line of the display and press OK 3 Press the left right arrow until Reduce Enlarge appears and press OK 4 Press the left right arrow until Custom appears and press OK 5 Press the left right arrow to enter the copy size you want Pressing and holding the button allows you to quickly scroll to the number you want 6 Press OK to save the se
326. r In some countries you are required by law to indicate your fax number on any fax you send The Machine ID containing your telephone number and name or company name will be printed at the top of each page sent from your machine 1 Press Menu until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the display and press OK 2 Press OK when Machine Setup appears 3 Press OK when Machine ID appears 4 Enter your name or the company name using the number keypad You can enter alphanumeric characters using the number keypad and include special symbols by pressing the 0 button For details on how to enter alphanumeric characters see Entering characters using the number keypad on page 36 Press OK to save the ID Enter your fax number using the number keypad and press OK Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode ON Om 52 Faxing Press the left right arrow until Machine Fax No appears and press OK e Fax setup Adjusting the document settings Before starting a fax change the following settings according to your original s status to get the best quality Resolution The default document settings produce good results when using typical text based originals However if you send originals that are of poor quality or contain photographs you can adjust the resolution to produce a higher quality Fax 1 Press Fax 2 Press Menu and then OK when Fax Feature appears on the bottom line of the display 3 Press OK
327. r DRPD has been set up call your fax number again to verify that the machine answers with a fax tone Then have a call placed to a different number assigned to that same line to be sure the call is forwarded to the extension telephone or answering machine plugged into the EXT socket Receiving in secure receiving mode You may need to prevent your received faxes from being accessed by unauthorized people You can turn on secure receiving mode to restrict printing of received faxes when the machine is unattended In secure receiving mode all incoming faxes go into memory When the mode is deactivated any stored faxes are printed Activating secure receiving mode 1 Press Fax 2 Press Menu and then press OK when Fax Feature appears on the bottom line of the display Press the left right arrow until Secure Receive appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until On appears and press OK Enter a four digit password you want to use and press OK Re enter the password to confirm it and press OK Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode When a fax is received in secure receiving mode your machine stores it in memory and shows Secure Receive to let you know that there is a fax received NO A0 Printing received faxes 1 Access the Secure Receive menu by following steps 1 through 3 in Activating secure receiving mode 2 Press the left right arrow until Print appears and press OK 3 Enter the four digit password and pr
328. r avoiding paper jams Clearing paper jams In the tray 1 In the fuser unit area In the paper exit area Understanding display messages Solving other problems Paper feeding Printing problems Printing quality problems Copying problems Scanning problems Common Windows problems Common Linux problems Common Macintosh problems Supplies How to purchase General specifications Printer specifications Scanner specifications Copier specifications Introduction These are the main components of your machine This chapter includes e Machine overview e Menu overview e Control panel overview e Supplied software e Understanding the Status LED e Printer driver features Acknowledging the status of the toner cartridge MACHINE OVERVIEW Front view Rear view a SE 1 Network port 4 Power receptacle 2 USB port 5 Rear cover 3 Handle 6 Power switch a CLX 3175N only Scanner lid USB memory port Control panel Toner cartridge Output support Imaging unit Front cover Waste toner container Front cover handle Scanner glass HAH HBGOO0 Tray 1 Scan unit 18 Introduction CONTROL PANEL OVERVIEW a Qa 2 Aes ee Display Shows the current status and prompts during an operation Toner colors The toner colors shown below the LCD display co works with the display messages See Status LED with the toner cartridge mes
329. r cartridge on a flat surface as shown and remove the protecting cover Z If toner gets on your clothing wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash it in cold water Hot water sets toner into fabric 7 Make sure that the color of the toner cartridge matches the color slot and then grasp the handles on the toner cartridge Insert the cartridge until it clicks into place 8 Close the front cover Make sure the cover is securely latched and then turn the machine on N If the front cover is not completely closed the machine will not operate Maintenance 48 REPLACING THE IMAGING UNIT When the life span of the imaging unit has expired the Smart Panel program window appears on the computer indicating the imaging unit needs to be replaced Otherwise your machine stops printing 1 Turn the machine off then wait a few minutes for the machine to cool 2 Using the handle completely open the front cover 3 Grasp the handles on the toner cartridge and pull to remove four cartridges from the machine 49 Maintenance 5 Pull the imaging unit out of the machine using the groove on the front of the imaging unit 6 Take a new imaging unit out of its package Remove the protective devices on both sides of the imaging unit and the paper protecting the surface of the imaging unit A e Don t use sharp objects such as a knife or scissors to open the imaging unit package You could damage the surface of the i
330. r connecting cable is damaged or frayed e If liquid has been spilled into the machine e f the machine has been exposed to rain or water e If the machine does not operate properly after instructions have been followed e Ifthe machine has been dropped or the cabinet appears damaged e Ifthe machine exhibits a sudden and distinct change in performance N 14 Adjust only those controls covered by the operating instructions Improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and may require extensive work by a qualified service technician to restore the machine to normal operation BA 15 Avoid using this machine during a lightning storm There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning If possible unplug the AC power and telephone cord for the duration of the lightning storm 16 The Power cord supplied with your machine should be used for safe operation If you are using a cord which is longer than 2 m with 110 V machine then it should be 16 AWG or bigger 17 Use only No 26 AWG or larger telephone line cord 18 SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS 19 This machine can be operated only in the country you have purchased Due to different voltage telecommunication configuration and etc a AWG American Wire Gauge LASER SAFETY STATEMENT The printer is certified in the U S to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR chapter 1 Subchapter J for Class I 1 laser products and elsewhere is certified as a Class laser p
331. r s Subnet Mask e Default Gateway Enter this exactly the same as the computer s Default Gateway 6 Click Apply and then click OK The machine will automatically print the Configuration report Confirm that all the settings are correct 7 Click Exit to close the SetIP program 8 If necessary restart the computer s firewall Network parameter setting You can also set up the various network settings through the network administration programs e SyncThru Web Admin Service Web based printer management solution for network administrators SyncThru Web Admin Service provides you with an efficient way of managing network devices and lets 26 Getting started you remotely monitor and troubleshoot network machines from any site with corporate internet access Download this program from http solution samsungprinter com SyncThru Web Service Web server embedded on your network print server which allows you to A Configure the network parameters necessary for the machine to connect to various network environments B Customize machine settings Installing the driver software You must install the printer driver software for printing The software includes drivers applications and other user friendly programs 64 The following procedure is based on Windows XP The procedure and popup window which appears during the installation may differ depending on the operating system machine features or the interface in us
332. r to Understanding display messages on page 55 to solve the problem e Atoner cartridge has reached its estimated cartridge life See Understanding display messages on page 55 Always check the message on the display to solve the problem The instruction in the Troubleshooting section will guide you to operate the machine properly See Understanding display messages on page 55 for more information ACKNOWLEDGING THE STATUS OF THE TONER CARTRIDGE The status of toner cartridges is indicated by the Status LED and the LCD display If the toner cartridge is low or needs to be replaced the Status LED turns red and the display shows the message However the arrow mark shows which color toner is of concern or may be installed with a new cartridge Example y The above example shows the yellow cartridge status indicated by the arrow Check the message to find out what the problem is and how to solve it See Understanding display messages on page 55 to browse the detailed information on error messages 64 Estimated cartridge life means the expected or estimated toner cartridge life which indicates the average capacity of print outs and is designed pursuant to ISO OEC 19798 See Specifications on page 88 The number of pages may be affected by operating environment printing interval media type and media size Some amount of toner may remain in the cartridge even when Toner Exhausted appears
333. r to return to ready mode 4 You cannot adjust the copy size using the Reduce Enlarge menu for making a 2 or 4 up copy Poster copying Your machine can print an image onto 9 sheets of paper 3x3 You can paste the printed pages together to make one poster sized document This copy feature is available only when you place originals on the scanner glass 1 Press Copy 2 Press Menu until Copy Feature appears on the C bottom line of the display and press OK 3 Press the left right arrow until Layout appears and press OK 4 Press the left right arrow until Poster Copy appears and press OK y Je a 5 _ AIRES NE Copying_ 45 5 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Your original is divided into 9 portions Each portion is scanned and printed one by one in the following order Ee Clone copying Your machine can print multiple image copies from the original document on a single page The number of images is automatically determined by the original image and paper size This copy feature is available only when you place originals on the scanner glass 1 Press Copy 2 Press Menu until Copy Feature appears on the amp bottom line of the display and press OK y 3 Press the left right arrow until Layout appears and press OK Day 4 Press the left right arrow until Clone Copy appears BUSY and press OK P F
334. rally rounded occur randomly on the page e A single sheet of paper may be defective Try reprinting the job e The moisture content of the paper is uneven or the paper has moist spots on its surface Try a different brand of paper See Selecting print media on page 38 e The paper lot is bad The manufacturing processes can cause some areas to reject toner Try a different kind or brand of paper e Change the printer option and try again Go to printer properties click Paper tab and set type to Thick Paper Refer to the Software section for details If these steps do not correct the problem contact a service representative Vertical repetitive defects AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc_ AaBbCc If marks repeatedly appear on the printed side of the page at even intervals e The toner cartridge may be damaged If a repetitive mark occurs on the page print a cleaning sheet several times to clean the cartridge After the printout if you still have the same problems remove the toner cartridge and install a new one See Replacing the toner cartridge on page 68 e Parts of the machine may have toner on them If the defects occur on the back of the page the problem will likely correct itself after a few more pages e The fusing assembly may be damaged Contact a service representative White Spots Anite spots appear on the page The paper is too rough and a lot of dirt from the paper falls to th
335. rance Germany Greece Hungary Italy Macedonia Netherlands Norway Poland Portugal romania Serbia Slovakia Slovenia Spain Sweden Switzerland UK c Image counts based on one color on each in full color yan Magenta Yellow Black 0 reduced by Mh e If you print documents e life of this item will be A When purchasing new print cartridges or other supplies these must be purchased in the same country where the machine was purchased Otherwise print cartridges or other supplies will be incompatible with your machine as configurations of print cartridges and other supplies vary depending on the specific country e How to purchase HOW TO PURCHASE To order Samsung authorized supplies or accessories contact your local Samsung dealer or the retailer where you purchased your machine or visit www samsung com supplies and select your country region to obtain information on calling for technical support Ordering supplies_ 65 specifications This chapter guides you about this machine s specifications such as various features This chapter include e General specifications e Printer specifications GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS 64 The symbol optional feature depending on machines ITEM DESCRIPTION Paper input Tray 150 sheets for plain paper 75 g m 20 Ib bond capacity Paper output capacity Face down 80 sheets 75 g m 20 Ib bond Power rating AC 110 127V or AC 220 240 V
336. re a lot of Linux applications that you are allowed to print from using Common UNIX Printing System CUPS You can print on your machine from any such application 1 2 From the application you are using select Print from the File menu Select Print directly using Ipr In the LPR GUI window select the model name of your machine from the Printer list and click Properties amp LPR GUI Printer 163 Properties Click Status idle accepting jobs Location Description Set as Default rm Page Selection Copies All pages Copies 1 100 1 Even pages gt Odd pages Ji Reverse All Pages 3 2 1 gt Some pages Enter page numbers and or groups of pages to print separated by commas 1 2 5 10 12 17 1 3 Help OK Cancer 4 Change the printer and print job properties amp Properties General Text Graphics Device r Paper Options Paper Size A4 Paper Type Printer Default z Paper Orientation HHH tua Portrait 3 D Landscape me Banners m Pages per Side N Up Start None x Normal 1 Up End None gt 2 Up O 4 Up Help ok Cancer VA 33 Using Your Printer in Linux The following four tabs display at the top of the window General allows you to change the paper size the paper type and the orientation of the documents enables the duplex fe
337. re advanced networking solutions for your business Basic features of this machine include FEATURES CLX 3170FN CLX 3175FN CLX 3175FW USB 2 0 e e e USB Memory Interface e e e PictBridge e e e ADF Automatic Document Feeder e e e Network Interface Ethernet 10 100 Base TX wired LAN e e e Network interface 802 11b g wireless LAN e FAX O e Included Blank Not Available ABOUT THIS USER S GUIDE This user s guide provides information about basic understanding of the machine as well as detailed explanation on each step during the actual usage Both novice users and professional users can refer to this guide for installing and using the machine Some terms in this guide are used interchangeably as below e Document is synonymous with original e Paper is synonymous with media or print media Following table offers the conventions of this guide CONVENTION DESCRIPTION EXAMPLE Bold Used for texts on the display or actual prints on the machine Start Note Used to provide additional information or detailed specification of the machine z The date format may differ from function and feature Z country to country Caution Used to give users information to protect the machine from possible mechanical Do not touch the green underside of damage or malfunction A the toner cartridge Footnote Used to provide more detailed information on certain words or a phrase a pages p
338. re is paper in the tray e Check to see if the display shows any error message If it does clear the problem Fail To Print A printer timeout error occurred messages appear These messages may appear during printing Just keep waiting until the machine finishes printing If the message appears in ready mode or after printing has been completed check the connection and or whether an error has occurred The machine does not send e Make sure that the original is loaded in the ADF or on the scanner glass e Sending should show up on the display e Check the fax machine you are sending to to see if it can receive your fax The incoming fax has blank spaces or is of poor quality e The fax machine sending you the fax may be faulty e A noisy phone line can cause line errors e Check your machine by making a copy The toner cartridge may be empty Replace the toner cartridge referring to page 68 Some of the words on an incoming fax are stretched The fax machine sending you the fax had a temporary document jam There are lines on the originals you send Check your scan unit for marks and clean it See Cleaning the scan unit on page 66 The machine dials a number but a connection with the other fax machine fails The other fax machine may be turned off out of paper or cannot answer incoming calls Speak with the other machine operator and ask her him to sort
339. re on a server select the Setting up TIP If you want to set a specific IP address on a specific this printer on a server checkbox network printer click the Set IP Address button The Set IP Address window appears Do as follows 7 After the installation is finished a window appears asking you to print a test page and to register yourself as a user of Samsung Printers in order to receive information from Set IP Address Samsung If you so desire select the corresponding You can set or change IP address for the network printer checkbox es and click Fi nish R Otherwise just click Finish 3 Setup Completed Information Update Printer MAC Address IP Address You cabaret f letters with exclusive ti S Ou WI jet ie Oppo uty to receive free newsletters with exclusive tips s Configure and rotations Ako teh val get more customer care ubnet Mask 5 R 7 Default Gateway P 5 Would you like to register for the Samsung Printer Membership Do mwe Wew __ Cancel I Fes like to register se T I dlik it J a Select a printer to be set with a specific IP address from the ERORE list b Configure an IP address subnet mask and gateway for the printer manually and click Configure to set the specific IP address for the network printer i c Click Next e You can also set the network printer via SyncThruTM Web Service an embedded web server Click Launch SWS on NOTE After setup is complete if
340. reater than 40 C 104 F Humidity range less than 20 and not greater than 80 An environment with extreme changes in humidity or temperature Direct sunlight or room light Dusty places Acar for a long period of time An environment where corrosive gases are present An environment with salty air Handling instructions e Do not touch the surface of the photosensitive drum in the cartridge e Donot expose the cartridge to unnecessary vibrations or shock e Never manually rotate the drum especially in the reverse direction this can cause internal damage and toner spillage Use of non Samsung and refilled toner cartridge Samsung Electronics does not recommend or approve the use of non Samsung brand toner cartridges in your printer including generic store brand refilled or remanufactured toner cartridges A e Samsung s printer warranty does not cover damage to the machine caused by the use of a refilled remanufactured or non Samsung brand toner cartridge Estimated cartridge life Estimated cartridge life the life of the toner cartridge yield depends on the amount of toner that print jobs require The actual print out number may vary depending on the print density of the pages you print on operating environment printing interval media type and or media size For example if you print a lot of graphics the consumption of the toner is high and you may need to change the cartridge more often Redistribu
341. required by the machine See Selecting print media on page 28 The paper keeps jamming There is too much paper in the tray Remove excess paper from the tray If you are printing on special materials use the manual feeder An incorrect type of paper is being used Use only paper that meets the specifications required by the machine See Selecting print media on page 28 There may be debris inside the machine Open the front cover and remove the debris Envelopes skew or fail to feed correctly Ensure the paper guides are against both sides of the envelopes 57 _ Troubleshooting POSSIBLE CONDITION CAUSE SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS The machine The machine is not Check the power cord does not print receiving power connections Check the power switch and the power source The machine is not selected as the default printer Select Samsung CLX 3170 Series as your default printer in your Windows Check the machine for the following The front cover or rear cover is not closed Close the cover e Paper is jammed Clear the paper jam See Clearing paper jams on page 52 e No paper is loaded Load paper e The toner cartridge is not installed Install the toner cartridge e Ifa system error occurs contact your service representative The connection cable between the computer and the machine is not connected properly Disconnect the printer cable and reconnec
342. ress the left right arrow until Timeout appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until the time setting you want appears Selecting Off means that the machine does not restore the default settings until you press Black Start or Color Start to begin copying or Stop Clear to cancel 6 Press OK to save your selection 7 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode go PON gt Copying_ 36 scanning Scanning with your machine lets you turn pictures and text into digital files that can be stored on your computer This chapter includes Scanning basics Scanning from the control panel The maximum resolution that can be achieved depends upon various factors including computer speed available disk space memory the size of the image being scanned and bit depth settings Thus depending on your system and what you are scanning you may not be able to scan at certain resolutions especially using enhanced resolution SCANNING BASICS You can scan the originals with your machine via an USB cable or the network e Samsung Scan Manager You just walk to the machine with the originals and scan them from the control panel then the scanned data will be stored in the connected computers My Documents folder When the setup installation is completed then you have installed the Samsung Scan Manager on your computer already This feature can be used via the local connection or the network connection See next section
343. rint from the File menu 2 Select Layout Printer 5 Presets Standard 3 Layout Pages per Sheet 1 B Layout Direction 2 u paj Border None he Preview Save As PDF C Fax Cancel J A Mac OS 10 3 3 Select the number of pages you want to print on one sheet of paper on the Pages per Sheet drop down list 4 Select the page order from the Layout Direction option To print a border around each page on the sheet select the option you want from the Border drop down list 5 Click Print and the printer prints the selected number of pages on one side of each page Using Your Printer with a Macintosh Scanning You can scan docoments using I mage Capture program Macintosh OS offers Image Capture program Scanning with USB 1 Make sure that your machine and computer are turned on and properly connected to each other 2 Place a single document face down on the document glass OR load the document s face up into the ADF or DADF 3 Start Applications and click Image Capture NOTE f No Image Capture device connected message appears disconnect the USB cable and reconnect it If the problem persists please refer to the Image Capture s help 4 Set the scan options on this program 5 Scan and save your scanned image NOTE e For more information about using Image Capture please refer to the Image Capture s help e If you
344. rinter with the protective cover removed from Laser Scanner assembly The reflected beam although invisible can damage your eyes When using this product these basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce risk of fire electric shock and injury to persons CAUTION CLASS 3B LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AVOID EXPOSURE TO THE BEAM DANGER LASER RADIATION AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM DANGER RADIATIONS INVISIBLES DU LASER EN CAS D OUVERTURE EVITER TOUTE EXPOSITION DIRECTE AU FAISCEAU VORSICHT UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG WENN ABDECKUNG GEOFFNET NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN ATTENZIONE RADIAZIONE LASER INVISIBILE IN CASO DI APERTURA EVITARE L ESPOSIZIONE AL FASCIO PRECAUCI N RADIACI N LASER INVISIBLE CUANDO SE ABRE EVITAR EXPONERSE AL RAYO PERIGO RADIA O LASER INVIS VEL AO ABRIR EVITE EXPOSI O DIRECTA AO FEIXE GEVAAR ONZICHTBARE LASERSTRALEN BIJ GEOPENDE KLEP DEZE KLEP NIET OPENEN ADVARSEL USYNLIG LASERSTR LNING VED BNING UNDG UDSAETTELSE FOR STR LNING ADVARSEL USYNLIG LASERSTR LNING N R DEKSEL PNES UNNG EKSPONERING FOR STRALEN VARNING OSYNLIG LASERSTR LNING N R DENNA DEL R PPEN STR LEN R FARLIG VAROITUS NAKYMATONTA LASERS TEILY AVATTAESSA VARO SUORAA ALTISTUMISTA SATEELLE B PRT GILAS 2l 0 SHE SH Aog LEA eE iig z x ps 7 Safety information OZONE SAFETY During normal operation this machine produces ozone The ozone produ
345. rinting Manual Double sided Printing allows you to print on both sides of paper e For details see Printing on Both Sides of Paper on page 19 Basic Printing 14 Layout Paper Graphic Extras About Copies 1 999 1 Ee Paper Options S Size Ad Bi Custom Source Auto Selection Type Printer Default zi f Scaling Printing Aa Printing Type None 210 x 297 mm mm inch Copies 1 Quality Normal Favorites Untitled X Save ELECTRONICS Ok Cancel Apply l Help Copies Copies allows you to choose the number of copies to be printed You can select 1 to 999 copies Paper Options Size Size allows you to set the size of paper you loaded in the tray If the required size is not listed in the Size box click Custom When the Custom Paper Setting window appears set the paper size and click OK The setting appears in the list so that you can select it Source Make sure that Source is set to the corresponding paper tray Use Manual Feeder when printing on special materials like envelopes and transparencies Type Set Type to correspond to the paper loaded in the tray from which you want to print This will let you get the best quality printout If not print quality may not be acheived as you want Thick Paper 24 Ib to 28 Ib 90 105 g m thick paper Thin Paper 16 Ib to 19 Ib 60 70 g m thin paper Cotton 20 Ib to 24 Ib 75 90 g m cotton paper such as Gilbert
346. roduct conforming to the requirements of IEC 825 Class laser products are not considered to be hazardous The laser system and printer are designed so there is never any human access to laser radiation above a Class level during normal operation user maintenance or prescribed service condition WARNING Never operate or service the printer with the protective cover removed from Laser Scanner assembly The reflected beam although invisible can damage your eyes When using this product these basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce risk of fire electric shock and injury to persons CAUTION CLASS 3B LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AVOID EXPOSURE TO THE BEAM DANGER LASER RADIATION AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM DANGER RADIATIONS INVISIBLES DU LASER EN CAS D OUVERTURE EVITER TOUTE EXPOSITION DIRECTE AU FAISCEAU VORSICHT UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG WENN ABDECKUNG GEOFFNET NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN ATTENZIONE RADIAZIONE LASER INVISIBILE IN CASO DI APERTURA EVITARE L ESPOSIZIONE AL FASCIO PRECAUCI N RADIACI N LASER INVISIBLE CUANDO SE ABRE EVITAR EXPONERSE AL RAYO PERIGO RADIA O LASER INVIS VEL AO ABRIR EVITE EXPOSI O DIRECTA AO FEIXE GEVAAR ONZICHTBARE LASERSTRALEN BIJ GEOPENDE KLEP DEZE KLEP NIET OPENEN ADVARSEL USYNLIG LASERSTR LNING VED BNING UNDG UDSAETTELSE FOR STR LNING ADVARSEL USYNLIG LASERSTR LNING N R DEKSEL PNES UNNG EKSPONERING FOR STRALEN VARNING
347. roperly See Understanding display messages on page 76 for more information 20 Introduction ACKNOWLEDGING THE STATUS OF THE TONER CARTRIDGE The status of toner cartridges is indicated by the Status LED and the LCD display If the toner cartridge is low or needs to be replaced the Status LED turns red and the display shows the message However the arrow mark shows which color toner is of concern or may be installed with a new cartridge Example y The above example shows the yellow cartridge status indicated by the arrow Check the message to find out what the problem is and how to solve it See Understanding display messages on page 76 to browse the detailed information on error messages 64 Estimated cartridge life means the expected or estimated toner cartridge life which indicates the average capacity of print outs and is designed pursuant to ISO OEC 19798 See Specifications on page 88 The number of pages may be affected by operating environment printing interval media type and media size Some amount of toner may remain in the cartridge even when Toner Exhausted appears and the printer stops printing A Samsung does not recommend using non genuine Samsung toner cartridge such as refilled or remanufactured Samsung cannot guarantee non genuine Samsung toner cartridge s quality Service or repair required as a result of using non genuine Samsung toner cartridges will not be covered under th
348. ropriate value from the dropdown list and then click Apply Z If your machine is connected to a network SyncThru Web Service screen appears automatically Click Machine Settings gt Setup or Machine Setup gt Adj Select the appropriate altitude value and then click Apply o Changing the display language To change the language that appears on the control panel follow these steps Press Menu and then OK Press the left right arrow until System Setup appears and press OK Press OK when Machine Setup appears Press the left right arrow until Language appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until the language you want appears and press OK 6 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode NAON Setting sounds You can control the following sounds e Key Sound Turns the key sound on or off With this option set to On a tone sounds each time a key is pressed Alarm Sound Turns the alarm sound on or off With this option set to On an alarm tone sounds when an error occurs 27 Getting started Key sound and alarm sound 1 Press Menu and then OK 2 Press the left right arrow until System Setup appears and press OK 3 Press the left right arrow until Sound Volume appears and press OK 4 Press the left right arrow until the sound option you want appears and press OK 5 Press the left right arrow until the desired status and press OK 6 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Using the save
349. rs and Cameras 3 Double click your scanner driver icon The Scanner and Camera Wizard launches Scanning 25 4 Choose your scanning preferences and click Preview to see how your preferences affect the picture 5 Click Next 6 Enter a picture name and select a file format and destination to save the picture 7 Follow the on screen instructions to edit the picture after it is copied to your computer Windows Vista 1 Place a single document face down on the document glass OR load the document s face up into the ADF or DADF 2 Click Start Control Panel Hardware and Sound gt Scanners and Cameras 3 Click on Scan a document or picture Then Windows Fax and Scan application is opened automatically NOTE To view scanners user can click on View scanners and cameras 4 Click Scan and then scan driver is opened 5 Choose your scanning preferences and click Preview to see your preferences affect the picture 6 Click Scan NOTE If you want to cancel the scan job press the Cancel button on the Scanner and Camera Wizard Windows 7 1 Load the document s face up into the DADF or ADF OR Place a single document face down on the document glass 2 Click Start Control Panel Hardware and Sound gt Devices and Printers 3 Click right button of mouse on device driver icon in Printers and Faxes Start Scan New Scan application appears 4 Choose your scanning preferences and clic
350. rt the situation of simultaneous access of different consumer application to the same port is possible To avoid possible conflicts only one of them at a time is allowed to gain control over the device The other consumer will encounter device busy response You should open ports configuration and select the port assigned to your printer In the Selected port pane you can see if the port is occupied by some other application If this is the case you should wait for completion of the current job or should press Release port button if you are sure that the present owner is not functioning properly e Check if your application has special print option such as oraw If oraw is specified in the command line parameter then remove it to print properly For Gimp front end select print gt Setup printer and edit command line parameter in the command item e The CUPS Common Unix Printing System version distributed with SuSE Linux 9 2 cups 1 1 21 has a problem with ipp Internet Printing Protocol printing Use the socket printing instead of ipp or install later version of CUPS cups 1 1 22 or higher Some color images come out in unexpected color This is a known bug in Ghostscript until GNU Ghostscript version 7 xx when the base color space of the document is indexed RGB color space and it is converted through CIE color space Because Postscript uses CIE color space for Color Matching S
351. rver networking protocol A DHCP server provides configuration parameters specific to the DHCP client host requesting generally information required by the client host to participate on an IP network DHCP also provides a mechanism for allocation of IP addresses to client hosts DIMM Dual Inline Memory Module DIMM a small circuit board that holds memory DIMM stores all the data within the machine like printing data received fax data DNS The Domain Name Server DNS is a system that stores information associated with domain names in a distributed database on networks such as the Internet Dot Matrix Printer A dot matrix printer refers to a type of computer printer with a print head that runs back and forth on the page and prints by impact striking an ink soaked cloth ribbon against the paper much like a typewriter DPI Dots Per Inch DPI is a measurement of resolution that is used for scanning and printing Generally higher DPI results in a higher resolution more visible detail in the image and a larger file size DRPD Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection Distinctive Ring is a telephone company service which enables a user to use a single telephone line to answer several different telephone numbers Duplex A mechanism that will automatically flip over a sheet of paper so that the machine can print or scan on both sides of the paper A printer equipped with a Duplex can print double sided of paper Duty Cycl
352. ry device 1 Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine If one has already been inserted press Direct USB 2 Press OK when USB Print appears Your machine automatically detects the device and reads data stored on it 3 Press the left right arrow until the folder or file you want appears and press OK If you see D in the front of a folder name there are one or more files or folders in the selected folder 4 If you selected a file skip to the next step If you selected a folder press the left right arrow until the file you want appears 5 Press the left right arrow to select the number of copies to be printed or enter the number 6 Press OK Color Start or Black Start to start printing the selected file There are two types of mode as following e OKor Color Start Color print e Black Start Black and White print After printing the file the display asks if you want to print another job 7 Press OK when Yes appears to print another job and repeat from step 2 Otherwise press the left right arrow to select No and press OK 8 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode BACKING UP DATA Data in the machine s memory can be accidentally erased due to power failure or storage failure Backup helps you protect the system settings by storing them as backup files on a USB memory device Backing up data 1 Insert the USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine Press Menu and then OK Press
353. s When selecting labels consider the following factors Adhesives The adhesive material should be stable at your machine s fusing temperature Check your machine s specification to view the fusing temperature see General specifications on page 88 Arrangement Only use labels with no exposed backing between them Labels can peel off sheets that have spaces between the labels causing serious jams Curl Prior to printing labels must lie flat with no more than 13 mm of curl in any direction Condition Do not use labels with wrinkles bubbles or other indications of separation Make sure that there is no exposed adhesive material between labels Exposed areas can cause labels to peel off during printing which can cause paper jams Exposed adhesive can also cause damage to machine components Do not run a sheet of labels through the machine more than once The adhesive backing is designed for only a single pass through the machine Do not use labels that are separating from the backing sheet or are wrinkled bubbled or otherwise damaged Card stock or custom sized materials Do not print on media smaller than 76 mm wide or 356 mm long In the software application set margins at least 6 4 mm away from the edges of the material 1 Acceptable 2 Unacceptable 40 _Loading originals and print media MEDIA TYPE GUIDELINES Preprinted Letterhead must be printed with hea
354. s copy feature removes the background color and can be helpful when copying an original containing color in the background such as a newspaper or a catalog Press Menu Press OK when Copy Menu appears Press OK when Copy Feature appears Press the left right arrow until Adjust Bkgd appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until the binding option you want appears e Off Does not use this feature e Auto Optimizes the background Enhance Lev 1 2 The higher the number is the more vivid the background is Erase Lev 1 4 The higher the number is the lighter the background is 6 Press OK to begin copying 7 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode a a N Gray enhance copying When you copy the original in gray scale use this feature for the better quality of copy output This feature is only for the copy in gray scale 1 Press Menu Press OK when Copy Menu appears Press OK when Copy Feature appears Press the left right arrow until Gray Enhance appears and press OK Press the left right arrow to select On Press OK to begin copying Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode NG AP ON SETTING COPY TIMEOUT You can set the time the machine waits before it restores the default copy settings if you do not start copying after changing them on the control panel Press Menu and then OK Press the left right arrow until System Setup appears and press OK Press OK when Machine Setup appears P
355. s gt Run and type X Setup exe If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows vista Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2 click Run Setup exe in Install or run program field and click Continue in the User Account Control window 3 Click Next x Select a language from the list below English X Cancel e If necessary select a language from the drop down list 4 Select Typical installation for a local printer Click Next Select Installation Type Select type that you want and click Next button Install default components for a device that is directly connected to user s computer s Teo fora install software for a device that is on network C Custom installation You can select installation options This option is recommended for professional users C Wireless setup Configure wireless setting using USB cable lt Back Cancel Installing Printer Software in Windows NOTE If your printer is not already connected to the computer the following window will appear x pising Connect Device Setup can not find a connected device Check connection between your computer and the printer Please refer to the following connection method 1 Connect the device to your computer 2 Turn on the power of the device 3 If New Hardware Wizard appears close it 4 Click Next lt Back i Cancel e After connecting the printer click Next e If you don t
356. s the color mode Scan Format Sets the file format in which the image is to be saved If you select TIFF or PDF you can select to scan multiple pages Depending on the selected scan type this option may not appear To customize the settings before starting a scan job 1 Press Scan Email 2 Press Menu until Scan Feature appears on the bottom line of the display and press OK 3 Press the left right arrow until the scan type you want appears and press OK 4 Press the left right arrow until the scan setting option you want appears and press OK 5 Press the left right arrow until the desired status appears and press OK gt Repeat steps 4 and 5 to set other setting options 7 When you have finished press Stop Clear to return to ready mode CHANGING THE DEFAULT SCAN SETTINGS To avoid having to customize the scan settings for each job you can set up default scan settings for each scan type 1 Press Scan Email 2 Press Menu until Scan Setup appears on the bottom line of the display and press OK 3 Press OK when Change Default appears 4 Press the left right arrow until the scan type you want appears and press OK 5 Press the left right arrow until the scan setting option you want appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until the desired status appears and press OK Repeat steps 5 and 6 to change other settings 8 To change the default settings for other scan types press Back and repeat from
357. s users to preserve the details of nature photos and improve contrast and readability among gray scaled colors when printing color documents in grayscale Fine Edge Press the Smart Color tab It allows users to emphasize edges of texts and fine lines for improving readability and align each color channel registration in color printing mode Extras Tab You can select output options for your document See Printing a Document on page 12 for more information about accessing the printer properties Click the Extras tab to access the following feature eae Layout Paper Graphic Extras About Watermark INo Watermark x Edit sH Overlay No Overlay pa Edit Output Options Print Subset Normal 1 2 3 Ei CU al Ad 210 x 297 mm C mm C inch Copies 1 Quality Normal Favorites Untitled X Save P nons OK Cancel Apply Help Watermark You can create a background text image to be printed on each page of your document For details see Using Watermarks on page 20 Overlay Overlays are often used to take the place of preprinted forms and letterhead paper For details see Using Overlays on page 21 Output Options Print Subset You can set the sequence in which the pages print Select the print order from the drop down list Normal 1 2 3 Your printer prints all pages from the first page to the last page Reverse All Pages 3 2 1 Your printer pri
358. sages See Acknowledging the status of the toner cartridge on page 20 Status Shows the status of your machine See Understanding the Status LED on page 20 Menu Enters Menu mode and scrolls through the available menus OK Confirms the selection on the screen ooeo O 6 Back Sends you back to the upper menu level O Left right arrow Scroll through the options available in the selected menu and increase or decrease values When entering characters use right key to add empty space ID Copy You can copy both sides of the ID Card like a driver s license to a single side of paper See ID card copying on page 35 a Scan to Allows you to access a list of your PC software programs that an image can be scanned to You must create the scan list using the Samsung software Printer Settings Utility provided with this machine For details see Software section par o Direct USB Allows you to directly print files stored on a USB Memory device when it is inserted into the USB memory port on the front of your machine See About USB memory on page 41 mb Stop Clear Stops an operation at any time In ready mode clears cancels the copy options such as the darkness the document type setting the copy size and the number of copies Black Start Starts a job in Black and White mode AG Color Start Starts a job in Color mode L e All
359. se in laser machines When selecting labels consider the following factors Adhesives The adhesive material should be stable at your machine s fusing temperature Check your machine s specification to view the fusing temperature see General specifications on page 66 Arrangement Only use labels with no exposed backing between them Labels can peel off sheets that have spaces between the labels causing serious jams Curl Prior to printing labels must lie flat with no more than 13 mm of curl in any direction Condition Do not use labels with wrinkles bubbles or other indications of separation Make sure that there is no exposed adhesive material between labels Exposed areas can cause labels to peel off during printing which can cause paper jams Exposed adhesive can also cause damage to machine components Do not run a sheet of labels through the machine more than once The adhesive backing is designed for only a single pass through the machine Do not use labels that are separating from the backing sheet or are wrinkled bubbled or otherwise damaged Card stock or custom sized materials Do not print on media smaller than 76 mm wide or 356 mm long In the software application set margins at least 6 4 mm away from the edges of the material 1 Acceptable 2 Unacceptable Loading originals and print media_ 30 MEDIA TYPE GUIDELINES Preprinted Letterhead must
360. select installation options This option is recommended for fessional users C Wireless setup Configure wireless setting using USB cable lt Back Cancel Change Destination Folder 5 Select your printer and click Next lt Back Cancel Select Printer Port em Select a port that will be used for your printer Local LER Pog NOTE You can change the desired installation folder by Shared Printer UNC ope C Add TCPAP Port clicking Browse Select a printer from the list below If you don t see your printer below click Update to refresh the list 7 After the installation is finished a window asking you to print a test page appears If you choose to print a test page select the checkbox and click Next Otherwise just click Next and skip to step 9 NOTE If firewall has been enabled on this PC this may be preventing the installer from Update detecting the printer Temporarily disable the firewall on this PC before continuing with the installation eae aa ana 8 Ifthe test page prints out correctly click Yes If not click No to reprint it 9 To register yourself as a user of Samsung Printers in order NOTA GUI DI HESE IS ee il connected to the to receive information from Samsung select the checkbox COMPULEN ME SONOMING WINGO wih APEEAE and click Finish You are now sent to the Samsung web site x Connect Device Otherwise just click Finish Bee
361. select the other mode and press OK Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode go PON Changing the default mode Your machine is preset to Copy mode You can switch this default mode between Fax mode and Copy mode 1 Press Menu until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the display and press OK 2 Press OK when Machine Setup appears 3 Press the left right arrow until Default Mode appears and press OK 4 Press the left right arrow until the default mode you want appears and press OK 5 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Setting sounds You can control the following sounds e Key Sound Turns the key sound on or off With this option set to On a tone sounds each time a key is pressed Alarm Sound Turns the alarm sound on or off With this option set to On an alarm tone sounds when an error occurs or fax communication ends e Speaker Turns on or off the sounds from the telephone line through the speaker such as a dial tone or a fax tone With this option set to Getting started_ 35 Comm which means Common the speaker is on until the remote machine answers Z You can adjust the volume level using On Hook Dial Ringer Adjusts the ringer volume For the ringer volume you can select Off Low Mid and High Speaker ringer key sound and alarm sound 1 Press Menu until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the display and press OK 2 Press the left right arrow until Sound Volume ap
362. self as a user of Samsung Printers in order to receive information from Samsung If you so desire select the corresponding checkbox es and click Finish Otherwise just click Finish Setup Completed On line Registration You will get the opportunity to receive free newsletters with exclusive tips and promotions Also you will get more customer care Would you like to register for the Samsung Printer Membership JT I dlike to print a test page NOTE After setup is complete if your printer driver doesn t work properly reinstall the printer driver See Reinstalling Printer Software on page 10 Custom Installation You can choose individual components to install and set a specific IP address 1 Make sure that the printer is connected to your network and powered on For details about connecting to the network see the supplied printer s User s Guide 2 Insert the supplied CD ROM into your CD ROM drive The CD ROM should automatically run and an installation window appears If the installation window does not appear click Start and then Run Type X Setup exe replacing X with the letter which represents your drive and click OK If you use Windows vista Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2 click Start All programs Accessories 5 Run and type X Setup exe If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows vista Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2 click Run Setup exe in Install
363. sing your printer When the printer properties are displayed you can review and change the settings needed for your print job Your printer properties window may differ depending on your operating system This Software User s Guide shows the Properties window for Windows XP Your printer driver Properties window that appears in this User s Guide may differ depending on the printer in use NOTES e Most Windows applications will override settings you specify in the printer driver Change all print settings available in the software application first and change any remaining settings using the printer driver e The settings you change remain in effect only while you are using the current program To make your changes permanent make them in the Printers folder e The following procedure is for Windows XP For other Windows OS refer to the corresponding Windows User s Guide or online help 1 Click the Windows Start button 2 Select Printers and Faxes 3 Select your printer driver icon 4 Right click on the printer driver icon and select Printing Preferences Change the settings on each tab click OK G7 Layout Tab The Layout tab provides options to adjust how the document appears on the printed page The Layout Options includes Multiple Pages per Side Poster Printing and Booklet Printing See Printing a Document on page 12 for more information on accessing printer properties Paper Tab
364. sktop Double click the MAC_ Installer folder Double click the Installer icon Enter the password and click OK The Samsung Installer window opens Click Continue Select Easy Install and click Install Easy Install is recommended for most users All components necessary for printer operations will be installed If you select Custom Install you can choose individual components to install ONOQURA WU N hk 37 9 The message which warns all application will close on your computer appears Click Continue 10 Select Typical installation for a local printer and then click OK NOTE If you select Typical installation for a network printer see Using SetlP program on page 38 after the installation is finished 11 After the installation is finished click Quit NOTE e If you have installed scan driver click Restart After the installation is finished see Setting Up the Printer on page 38 Uninstalling software Uninstall is required if you are upgrading the software or if installation fails 1 Insert the CD ROM which came with your printer into the CD ROM drive Double click CD ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh desktop Double click the MAC_ Installer folder Double click the Installer icon Enter the password and click OK The Samsung Installer window opens Click Continue Select Uninstall and click Uninstall The message which warns all application will close on your co
365. ss security setting window appears enter the registered password network key and click Next SyncThru Mara te Maree laang hetaz Letng Martenarce Depot un Sets gt Wireless gt Wi eid ety Oeners WPA Permenal Security Setup TCPEP ected Marasi matod a AIi eth o Ras TORR LPRFP Bp P Fanng Netenrh Payo match wth pour wireters networe ere n paa WEA Shared Kay var WE whens Pawa Engrah Dace Naa Cancer 6 Wizard Setup Confirmation window appears please check your wireless setup If the setup is right click Apply 7 Click OK N Disconnect the network cable standard or crossover Your machine should then start communicating wirelessly with the network In case of Ad hoc mode you can use a wireless LAN and wired LAN simultaneously If Operation Mode is Infrastructure you must disconnect the network cable to activate wireless network after completing the network setting Now go to Installing the driver software Installing the driver software You must install the printer driver software for printing The software includes drivers applications and other user friendly programs L e The following procedure is based on Windows XP The procedure and popup window which appears during the installation may differ depending on the operating system machine features or the interface in use e Make sure that the network setup for your machine is completed See Setting up the network on page 25 Al
366. ssistance Unplug the machine from the AC wall socket and or telephone jack before cleaning Do not use liquid or aerosol cleaners Use only a damp cloth for cleaning Do not place the machine on an unstable cart stand or table It may fall causing serious damage Your machine should never be placed on near or over a radiator heater air conditioner or ventilation duct Do not allow anything to rest on the power Do not locate your machine where the cords will be abused by persons walking on them Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords This can diminish performance and may result in the risk of fire or electric shock Do not allow pets to chew on the AC power telephone or PC interface cords Never push objects of any kind into the machine through case or cabinet openings They may touch dangerous voltage points 12 creating a risk of fire or shock Never spill liquid of any kind onto or into the machine To reduce the risk of electric shock do not disassemble the machine Take it to a qualified service technician when repair work is required Opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltages or other risks Incorrect reassembly could cause electric shock when the unit is subsequently used Safety information_5 13 Unplug the machine from the telephone jack PC and AC wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions e When any part of the power cord plug o
367. step 4 9 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode NG SETTING UP ADDRESS BOOK You can set up Address Book with the email addresses you use frequently via SyncThru Web Service and then easily and quickly enter email addresses by entering the location numbers assigned to them in Address Book Registering speed email numbers 1 Enter your machine s IP address as the URL in a browser and click Go to access the web site of your machine 2 Click Machine Settings and E mail Setup Click Local Address Book and Add 4 Select a location number and enter the user name and e mail address you want 5 Click Apply 64 You can also click Import and obtain your address book from your computer Configuring group email numbers Enter your machine s IP address as the URL in a browser and click Go to access the web site of your machine 1 Click Machine Settings and E mail Setup 2 Click Group Address Book and Add 3 Select a group number and enter the group name you want 4 Select speed email numbers that will be included in the group 5 Click Apply Using Address Book entries To retrieve an email address use the following ways Speed email numbers When you are prompted to enter a destination address while sending an email enter the speed email number at which you stored the address you want e Fora one digit speed email location press and hold the corresponding digit button from the number keypad e For
368. stributed database on networks such as the Internet Dot Matrix Printer A dot matrix printer refers to a type of computer printer with a print head that runs back and forth on the page and prints by impact striking an ink soaked cloth ribbon against the paper much like a typewriter DPI Dots Per Inch DPI is a measurement of resolution that is used for scanning and printing Generally higher DPI results in a higher resolution more visible detail in the image and a larger file size DRPD Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection Distinctive Ring is a telephone company service which enables a user to use a single telephone line to answer several different telephone numbers Duplex A mechanism that will automatically flip over a sheet of paper so that the machine can print or scan on both sides of the paper A printer equipped with a Duplex can print double sided of paper Duty Cycle Duty cycle is the page quantity which does not affect printer performance for a month Generally the printer has the lifespan limitation such as pages per year The lifespan means the average capacity of print outs usually within the warranty period For example if the duty cycle is 48 000 pages per month assuming 20 working days a printer limits 2 400 pages a day ECM Error Correction Mode ECM is an optional transmission mode built into Class 1 fax machines or fax modems It automatically detects and corrects errors in the fax transmission
369. structions in the window and complete the installation Po Setting network values 1 Print the machine s network configuration report to find your machine s MAC address See Printing reports on page 44 2 From the Windows Start menu select All Programs gt Samsung Network Printer Utilities gt SetIP gt SetIP 3 Click g to open the TCP IP configuration window 4 Enter the network card s MAC address IP address subnet mask default gateway and then click Apply when you enter the MAC address enter it without colon 5 Click OK then the machine prints the network information Confirm the settings are correct 6 Click Exit INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE You have to install the machine software for printing The software includes drivers applications and other user friendly programs The following procedure is based on Windows XP If you use Macintosh or Linux OS see Software section L e The following procedure is for when the machine is being used as a network machine If you want to connect a machine with a USB cable refer to Software section e The procedure and popup window which appear during the installation may differ depending on the operating system the printer feature or the interface in use Connect the network cable to your machine Make sure that the network setup for your machine is completed See Setting up the network CLX 3175N only on page 25 All applications should be closed
370. t guaranteed paper from the tray if necessary 3 Squeeze the paper width guide and slide it to the edge of the lever Z If you want to change the size to A4 first move the paper width guide to left and rotate the lever counterclockwise If you force the lever it could damage the tray 42 Loading originals and print media PRINTING ON SPECIAL PRINT MATERIALS The machine can hold special sizes and types of print material such as postcards note cards and envelopes Especially it is useful for single page printing on letterhead or colored paper Feeding the print material manually Load only one size of print media at a time in the tray To prevent paper jams do not add paper when there is still paper in the tray This also applies to other types of print media e Print media should be loaded face up with the side you want to print and the top edge going into the tray first Place print materials in the center of the tray e Always load only the specified print media to avoid paper jams and print quality problems See Selecting print media on page 38 e Flatten any curl on postcards envelopes and labels before loading them into the tray 1 Load the paper See Changing the size of the paper in the paper tray on page 41 L Depending on the media type you are using keep the following loading guidelines e Envelopes Flap side down and with the stamp area on the top left side e Labels Prin
371. t it The connection cable between the computer and the machine is defective If possible attach the cable to another computer that is working properly and print a job You can also try using a different printer cable The port setting is incorrect Check the Windows printer setting to make sure that the print job is sent to the correct port If the computer has more than one port make sure that the machine is attached to the correct one The machine may be configured incorrectly Check the printer properties to ensure that all of the print settings are correct The printer driver may be incorrectly installed Repair the printer software See Software section The machine is malfunctioning Check the display message on the control panel to see if the machine is indicating a system error The document size is so big that the hard disk space of the computer is not enough to access the print job Get more hard disk space and print the document again CONDITION POSSIBLE CAUSE SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS POSSIBLE CONDITION CAUSE SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS The machine The paper source For many software selects print materials from the wrong paper source selection in the printer properties may be incorrect applications the paper source selection is found under the Thin Paper tab within the printer properties Select the correct paper source See the
372. t notice Samsung Electronics is not responsible for any direct or indirect damages arising from or related to use of this user s guide e Samsung and Samsung logo are trademarks of Samsung Electronics Co Ltd e Microsoft Windows Windows Vista Windows 7 and Windows 2008 Server R2 are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation e UFST and MicroType are registered trademarks of Monotype Imaging Inc e TrueType LaserWriter and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Computer Inc All other brand or product names are trademarks of their respective companies or organizations e Refer to the LICENSE txt file in the provided CD ROM for the open source license information REV 3 00 Samsung Printer Software section SOFTWARE SECTION CONTENTS Chapter 1 INSTALLING PRINTER SOFTWARE IN WINDOWS Installing Printer SoftWare apa Aka NAAN AA BIR ine hime vines ANAN GA 4 Installing Software for Local Printing asasaaaa na kanan GAGANA NANG R GN NANANA NARE eee eee ene nanana 4 Installing Software for Network Printing sasa asana eee 7 Reinstalling Printer Software sasaaaa eee n tenet ee nanan 10 Removing Printer Software 22 2 EEE atten EAEAN 11 Installing mono printer driver ee ened eaten aetna tenes 11 Chapter 2 BASIC PRINTING Printing a Document Xa ee een GAGANA Gn AT Da APA eres ae 12 Printing toa tile PRN aanak Aa A aa AL Nan MAG
373. t resistant ink paper that will not melt vaporize or release hazardous emissions when subjected to the printer s fusing temperature for 0 1 second Check your machine s specification to view the fusing temperature see General specifications on page 88 e Letterhead ink must be non flammable and should not adversely affect printer rollers e Forms and letterhead should be sealed in a moisture proof wrapping to prevent changes during storage e Before you load preprinted paper such as forms and letterhead verify that the ink on the paper is dry During the fusing process wet ink can come off preprinted paper reducing print quality AN Using photographic paper or coated paper may cause problems requiring repairs Such repairs are not covered by Samsung s warranty or service agreements CHANGING THE SIZE OF THE PAPER IN THE PAPER TRAY To load longer sizes of paper such as Legal sized paper you need to adjust the paper guides to extend the paper tray To change the tray 1 size to other size you must adjust the paper length guide properly 1 Pull the tray 1 out of the machine Open the paper cover and remove paper from the tray 1 if necessary 2 Pressing and unlatching the guide lock in the top of the tray pull the tray out manually 4 Slide the paper length guide until it lightly touches the end of the paper stack Squeeze the paper width guide and slide it to the edge of the paper stack without c
374. t right arrow to select the setup method you want in Authentication and press OK Open System Authentication is not used and encryption may or may not be used depending on the need for data security Enter the WEP Key using number keypad after selecting Open System and then press OK SharedKey Authentication is used A device that has a proper WEP key can access the network Enter the WEP Key using number keypad after selecting SharedKey and then press OK WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK You can select WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK to authenticate the print server based on WPA Pre Shared Key This uses a shared secret key generally called Pre Shared Key passphrase which is manually configured on the access point and each of its clients Press OK when WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK appears on the bottom line of the display Press the left right arrow to select TKIP or AES in Encryption and press OK If you select WPA2 PSK press the left right arrow to select AES or TKIP AES in Encryption and press OK Enter the WPA Key using number keypad and press OK When you have finished press Stop Clear to return to the ready mode If you do not know about your wireless environment please ask the network administrator Now go to Installing the driver software Using SyncThru Web Service Before starting wireless parameter configuration make sure cable connection status Configuring the printer s wireless network 1 Start a web browser such as Internet Ex
375. t side up and top short edge entering the machine first e Preprinted paper Design side up with the top edge toward the machine e Card stock Print side up and the short edge entering the machine first e Previously printed paper Previously printed side down with an uncurled edge toward the machine 2 When you print in application start the print menu Before you print open printer properties 4 Press the Paper tab in printer properties and select an appropriate paper type Z If you want to use a label set the paper type to Label ad 5 Select Manual Feeder in paper source then press OK 6 Start printing in application 7 Press the Color Start or Black Start button on the machine to start feeding then the machine starts printing L e Ifyou are printing multiple pages load the next sheet after first page prints out and press the Color Start or Black Start button Repeat this step for every page to be printed e The settings you change remain in effect only while you are using the current application SETTING THE PAPER SIZE AND TYPE After loading paper in the paper tray you need to set the paper size and type using the control panel buttons These settings will apply to Copy and Fax modes For PC printing you need to select the paper size and type in the application program you use on your PC 1 Press Menu until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the display and press OK 2 Press the left right arr
376. t status STATUS DESCRIPTION Off e The machine is powered off line The machine is in power save mode When data is received or any button is pressed it switches to on line automatically e Wireless function can not be used Green Blinking When the green LED slowly blinks the machine is receiving data from the computer e When the green LED rapidly brinks the machine is printing data On e The machine is powered on and can be used Blue On e Wireless function can be used Red Blinking A minor error has occurred and the machine is waiting for the error to be cleared Check the display message and solve the problem referring to Understanding display messages on page 76 Small amount of toner is left in the cartridge The estimated cartridge life of toner is close You can temporarily improve print quality by redistributing the toner See Replacing the toner cartridge on page 68 On e A problem has occurred such as a paper jam cover is open or no paper in the tray so that the machine cannot continue the job Check the message on the display and refer to Understanding display messages on page 76 to solve the problem e A toner cartridge has reached its estimated cartridge life See Understanding display messages on page 76 Always check the message on the display to solve the problem The instruction in the Troubleshooting section will guide you to operate the machine p
377. t tab choose Multiple Pages per Side in the Layout Type drop down list 3 Select the number of pages you want to print per sheet 1 2 4 6 9 or 16 in the Pages per Side drop down list 4 Select the page order from the Page Order drop down list if necessary Check Print Page Border to print a border around each page on the sheet 5 Click the Paper tab select the paper source size and type 6 Click OK and print the document Printing Posters Printing Booklets This feature allows you to print a single page document onto 4 C 9 or 16 sheets of paper for the purpose of pasting the sheets together to form one poster size document amp 1 To change the print settings from your software C application access printer properties See Printing a D bA Document on page 12 This printer feature allows you to print your document on both sides of the paper and arranges the pages so that the paper can 2 Click the Layout tab select Poster Printing in the be folded in half after printing to produce a booklet L tT list AYoUETYpE Grop doi is 1 To change the print settings from your software 3 Configure the poster option application access the printer properties See Printing a You can select the page layout from Poster lt 2x2 gt Document on page 12 Poster lt 3x3 gt or Poster lt 4x4 gt If you select 2 Poster lt 2x2 gt the output will be autom
378. tall my Plug and Play printer then click Next Go to step 13 If your computer does not find the printer then follow the next step 8 Select Next in the Select a Printer Port window 9 Inthe Select a Printer Port window select Have Disk 10 Click Browse to find a mono driver for your printer 11 Select inf file and click Open 12 Click OK in the Install From Disk window 13 Select a mono driver in the Printers field and click Next NOTE If you have installed a mono driver before then the Use Existing Driver window Select as the window explains and click Next Also depending on your computer configuration the printer sharing window or the print the test page window may appear make the appropriate selection 14 Enter your printer name and click Next 15 Click Finish to start installing a mono printer driver NOTE If your printer is connected to a network go to printer s Properties and select the Ports tab then click Add Portand Standard TCP IP Port and create a new port to connect to the printer To create a new port follow the procedure laid out in the wizard window Installing Printer Software in Windows 2 Basic Printing this chapter explains the printing options and common printing tasks in windows This chapter includes Printing a Document Printing to a file PRN Printer Settings Layout Tab Paper Tab Graphics Tab Extras Tab About Tab Using a Favorite Setti
379. tation written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL This library is free for commercial and non commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution be it the RC4 RSA Ihash DES etc code not just the SSL code The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson tjnh cryptsoft com Copyright remains Eric Young s and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed If this package is used in a product Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation online or textual provided with the package Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement This product in
380. ter For MAC OS 10 5 10 6 click IP 5 Select Socket HP J et Direct in Printer Type WHEN PRINTING A DOCUMENT CONTAINING MANY PAGES PRINTING PERFORMANCE MAY BE ENHANCED BY CHOOSING SOCKET FOR PRINTER TYPE OPTION 6 Enter the printer s IP address in the Printer Address field 7 Enter the queue name in the Queue Name field If you cannot determine the queue name for your printer server try using the default queue first 8 For MAC OS 10 3 if Auto Select does not work properly select Samsung in Printer Model and your printer name in Model Name For MAC OS 10 4 if Auto Select does not work properly select Samsung in Print Using and your printer name in Model For MAC OS 10 5 10 6 if Auto Select does not work properly select Select a driver to use and your printer name in Print Using Your printer s P address appears on the Printer List and is set as the default printer 9 Click Add For a USB connected 1 2 Follow the instructions on Installing Software on page 37 to install the PPD and Filter files on your computer Open the Applications folder Utilities and Print Setup Utility For MAC OS 10 5 10 6 open System Preferences from the Applications folder and click Printer amp Fax Click Add on the Printer List For MAC OS 10 5 10 6 press the icon then a display window will pop up For MAC OS 10 3 select the USB tab For MAC OS 10 4 click Default Browser and find th
381. ternet or an intranet Fuser Unit The part of a laser printer that melts the toner onto the print media It consists of a hot roller and a back up roller After toner is transferred onto the paper the fuser unit applies heat and pressure to ensure that the toner stays on the paper permanently which is why paper is warm when it comes out of a laser printer Gateway A connection between computer networks or between a computer network and a telephone line It is very popular as it is a computer or a network that allows access to another computer or network Grayscale A shades of gray that represent light and dark portions of an image when color images are converted to grayscale colors are represented by various shades of gray Halftone An image type that simulates grayscale by varying the number of dots Highly colored areas consist of a large number of dots while lighter areas consist of a smaller number of dots HDD Hard Disk Drive HDD commonly referred to as a hard drive or hard disk is a non volatile storage device which stores digitally encoded data on rapidly rotating platters with magnetic surfaces IEEE The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IEEE is an international non profit professional organization for the advancement of technology related to electricity IEEE 1284 The 1284 parallel port standard was developed by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IEEE The term
382. the display and press OK 2 Press the left right arrow until Report appears and press OK 3 Press the left right arrow until the report or list you want to print appears and press OK To print all reports and lists select All Report 4 Press OK when Yes appears to confirm printing The selected information prints out ADJUSTING THE COLOR CONTRAST Color menu allows you to adjust the color setting 1 Press Menu until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the display and press OK Press OK when Maintenance appears Press the left right arrow until Color appears and press OK Press OK when Custom Color appears Press the left right arrow until the color menu you want appears on display and press OK Allows you to adjust contrast color by color Default optimizes color automatically Manual Adjust allows you to manually adjust the color contrast for each cartridge Default setting is recommended for getting best color quality Z If you have moved the machine it is strongly recommended to operate this menu manually go PWN 6 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Maintenance_ 63 CLEARING MEMORY You can selectively clear information stored in your machine s memory AN For CLX 3170FN CLX 3175FN CLX 3175FW users before clearing the memory make sure that all fax jobs have been completed or you will lose those jobs 1 Press Menu until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the display and press O
383. the left right arrow until System Setup appears and press OK Press OK when Machine Setup appears Press the left right arrow until Export Setting appears and press OK Press OK when Setup Data appears The data is backed up to the USB memory 7 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode DAAYN Restoring data 1 Insert the USB memory device on which the backup data is stored in to the USB memory port Press Menu and then OK Press the left right arrow until System Setup appears and press OK Press OK when Machine Setup appears Press the left right arrow until Import Setting appears and press OK Press OK when Setup Data appears DAAYN Using USB memory device 42 7 Press the left right arrow until the file containing the data you want to restore appears and press OK 8 Press OK when Yes appears to restore the backup file to the machine 9 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode MANAGING USB MEMORY You can delete image files stored on a USB memory device one by one or all at once by reformatting the device AN After deleting files or reformatting a USB memory device files cannot be restored Therefore confirm that you no longer need the data before deleting it Deleting an image file 1 Insert the USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine Press Direct USB Press the left right arrow until File Manage appears and press OK Press OK when Delete appears Press the left right arrow until the
384. the problem persists call for service Paper Jam 0 Paper has jammedin Clear the jam See In Open Close Door the feeding area of the tray the tray 1 on page 52 55 Troubleshooting Paper Jam 1 Check Inside Paper has jammed in the paper exit area Clear the jam See In the fuser unit area on page 52 MESSAGE MEANING SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS Paper Jam 2 Paper has jammed In Clear the jam See In Check Inside the fuser area or the paper exit area on around the toner cartridge page 53 MESSAGE MEANING SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS Refilled Toner vy The toner cartridge you have installed is not genuine or refilled The arrow indicates which color toner cartridge The print quality may get poor if the refilled toner cartridge is installed since its characteristics may significantly differ from the genuine We recommend Samsung genuine color toner cartridge Replace Toner This message Replace the toner h appears between cartridge with a new one Toner Empty and See Replacing the Toner Low status toner cartridge on page 48 Replace The life of the part Replace the part with a xxx expires totally new one Call for service Replace The life of the part See Checking xxx Soon expires soon replaceables on page 51 and call for service Replace Install Toner Waste Bin The life span of the waste toner tank has expired
385. til System Setup appears on the bottom line of the display and press OK Press OK when Machine Setup appears Press the left right arrow until Date amp Time appears and press OK 4 Enter the correct time and date using the number keypad Month 01 to 12 Day 01 to 31 Year requires four digits Hour 01 to 12 12 hour mode 00 to 23 24 hour mode Minute 00 to 59 The date format may differ from country to country 9 N You can also use the left right arrow to move the cursor under the digit you want to correct and enter a new number 5 To select AM or PM for 12 hour format press the or button or any number button When the cursor is not under the AM or PM indicator pressing the or button immediately moves the cursor to the indicator You can change the clock mode to 24 hour format e g 01 00 PM as 13 00 For details see the next section 6 Press OK to save the time and date When you enter a wrong number Out of Range appears and the machine does not proceed to the next step If this happens simply reenter the correct number 7 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Changing the clock mode You can set your machine to display the current time using either a 12 hour or 24 hour format 1 Press Menu until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the display and press OK Press OK when Machine Setup appears Press the left right arrow until Clock Mode appears and press OK Press the left right arrow to
386. til the machine finishes printing If the message appears in ready mode or after printing has been completed check the connection and or whether an error has occurred L Refer to the Microsoft Windows documentation that came with your computer for further information on Windows error messages CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS The machine does not print Check if the printer driver is installed in your system Open Unified Driver configurator and switch to the Printers tab in Printers configuration window to look at the list of available printers Make sure that your machine is displayed on the list If not invoke Add new printer wizard to set up your device e Check if the printer is started Open Printers configuration and select your machine on the printers list Look at the description in the Selected printer pane If its status contains stopped string press the Start button After that normal operation of the printer should be restored The stopped status might be activated when some problems in printing occurred For instance this could be an attempt to print document when port is claimed by a scanning application e Check if the port is not busy Since functional components of MFP printer and scanner share the same I O interface port the situation of simultaneous access of different consumer application to the same port is possible To avoid possible conflicts only one of them ata time is
387. ting and managements In most cases a new IP address will be automatically assigned by a DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Server located on the network In a few situations the IP address must be set manually This is called a static IP and is often required in corporate Intranets for security reasons e DHCP IP assignment Connect your machine to the network and wait a few minutes for the DHCP server to assign an IP address to the machine Then print the Network Configuration Report as explained above If the report shows that the IP address has changed the assignment was successful You will see the new IP address on the report Static IP assignment Use Set P program to change the IP address from your computer If your machine has a control panel you can also change IP address using the machine s control panel In an office environment we recommend that you contact a network administrator to set this address for you IP setting using the control panel 1 Press Menu on the control panel until you see Network on the bottom line of the display and press OK Press the left right arrow until TCP IP appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until Static appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until IP Address appears and press OK Enter a byte between 0 and 255 using the number keypad and press the left right arrow to move between bytes Repeat this to complete the address from the 1st byte to the 4th b
388. ting toner When a toner is low faded or light areas may appear It is possible that colored images may be printed with incorrect colors due to flawed mixing of toner colors when one of the colored toner cartridges is low on toner You can temporarily improve print quality by redistributing the toner e The toner related message saying that the toner is low may appear on the display Using the handle completely open the front cover Grasp the handles on the toner cartridge and pull to remove four cartridges from the machine Holding both handles on the toner cartridge thoroughly rock it from side to side to evenly distribute the toner L If toner gets on your clothing wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash it in cold water Hot water sets toner into fabric Maintenance_ 67 4 Slide four toner cartridges back into the machine 5 Close the front cover Make sure the cover is securely latched N If the front cover is not completely closed the machine will not operate REPLACING THE TONER CARTRIDGE The machine uses four colors and has a different toner cartridge for each one yellow Y magenta M cyan C and black K e The status LED and the toner related message on the display indicates which each individual toner cartridge should be replaced e For the CLX 3170FN CLX 3175FN CLX 3175FW incoming faxes are saved in memory At this stage the toner cartridge needs to be replaced Chec
389. to change other settings 9 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode oa PWN oN Scanning_ 38 39 Scanning basic printing This chapter explains common printing tasks This chapter includes e Printing a document PRINTING A DOCUMENT Your machine allows you to print from various Windows Macintosh or Linux applications The exact steps for printing a document may vary depending on the application you use For details about printing see Software section CANCELING A PRINT JOB If the print job is waiting in a print queue or print spooler such as the printer group in Windows delete the job as follows 1 Click the Windows Start menu 2 For Windows 2000 select Settings and then Printers For Windows XP 2003 select Printers and Faxes For Windows Vista 2008 select Control Panel 5 Hardware and Sound 5 Printers For Windows 7 select Control Panel 5 Hardware and Sound 5 Devices and Printers For Windows Server 2008 R2 select Control Panel 5 Hardware 5 Devices and Printers 3 For Windows 2000 XP 2003 2008 and Vista double click your machine 4 For Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2 right click your printer icon gt context menus gt See what s printing 5 From the Document menu select Cancel 1g You can also access this window by simply double clicking the printer icon at the bottom right corner of the Windows desktop You can also cancel the current job by pressing Stop Clear on the
390. toner cartridge with a Samsung genuine cartridge See Replacing the toner cartridge on page 48 Open Heat Error There is a problem in Turn the power switch Door Open The front cover or rear Close the cover until it cover is not securely locks into place latched Enter Again You entered an Enter the correct item unavailable item again File Format The selected file Use the correct file Not Supported format is not format supported Install The imaging unit is Install the imaging unit Imaging Unit not installed Install Toner The toner cartridge is Install the toner v not installed cartridge Cycle Power the fuser unit off and on If the problem persists call for service Operation You are in the Add Check the display to see Not Assigned Page Cancel Job if there are any operation but there scheduled jobs are no jobs stored Out Bin Full The output tray of the Remove paper machine is full of paper Invalid Toner The toner cartridge Install the a Samsung Over Heat Error There is a problem in Turn the power switch vV you have installed is genuine toner cartridge not for your machine designed for your machine IP Conflict The network IP Check the IP address address you have set is being used by someone else and reset it if necessary See Setting up the network CLX 3175N only on page 25 Cycle Power the fuser unit off and on If
391. tridge with a Samsung genuine cartridge See Replacing the toner cartridge on page 68 Not Assigned The speed button or Enter the number speed dial number manually using the you tried to use has number keypad or store no number assigned the number or address to it One Page is Single page data Reduce the resolution Too Large exceeds the and try again configured mail size Replace Install Toner Waste Bin The life span of the waste toner tank has expired and the printer will stop printing until a new waste toner tank is placed into the machine Replace the waste toner bank with a new one See Replacing the waste toner container on page 70 Open Heat Error There is a problem in Turn the power switch Retry Redial The machine is waiting for a specified time interval to redial a previously busy station You can press OK to immediately redial or Stop Clear to cancel the redial operation Scan Unit Open The scan unit is not securely latched Close the scan unit it locks into place Cycle Power the fuser unit off and on If the problem persists call for service Operation You are in the Add Check the display to see Not Assigned Page Cancel Job if there are any operation but there scheduled jobs are no jobs stored Out Bin Full The output tray of the Remove paper machine is full of paper Scanner locked The scanner module is locked Turn the power switch of
392. ts but the text is wrong garbled or incomplete The printer cable is loose or defective Disconnect the printer cable and reconnect Try a print job that you have already printed successfully If possible attach the cable and the machine to another computer and try a print job that you know works Finally try a new printer cable The wrong printer driver was selected Check the application s printer selection menu to ensure that your machine is selected The software application is malfunctioning Try printing a job from another application The operating system is malfunctioning Exit Windows and reboot the computer Turn the machine off and then back on again Pages print but are blank The toner cartridge is defective or out of toner Redistribute the toner if necessary See Redistributing toner on page 67 If necessary replace the toner cartridge The file may have blank pages Check the file to ensure that it does not contain blank pages Some parts such as the controller or the board may be defective Contact a service representative 80 _ Troubleshooting Before printing the machine emits vapor near the output tray Using damp paper can cause vapor during printing This is not a problem Just keep printing Printing quality problems If the inside of the machine is dirty or paper has been loaded improperly y
393. ts MAC address to communicate with the machine A MAC address is the hardware serial number of the network interface and can be found in the Network Configuration Report RPN NG e e You only need to run this program if your network requires a static IP address Otherwise you may proceed to the Configuring the machine s wireless network part of this document If you are unsure of this requirement ask the system administrator or the person who has set up your local network e You can only use the Set P program when your machine is connected to a network or directly connected to a PC with the crossover network cable included with your machine In most cases we recommend using the crossover cable You will be asked to connect this cable in a moment Installing the program 1 Insert the Printer Software CD ROM provided with your machine When the driver CD runs automatically close that window 2 Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer and open the X drive X represents your CD ROM drive Double click Application gt SetIP Double click Setup exe to install this program 5 Click OK If necessary select a language from the drop down list Po 6 Follow the instructions in the window and complete the installation Starting the program 1 Connect your machine and the computer using crossover network cable 2 Temporarily disable the computer firewall before continuing by doing the following SyncThru Web Admin
394. tures Front view Rear view Extension telephone socket EXT 5 Handle 2 Telephone line socket 6 Power receptacle 3 Network port Rear cover 4 USB port Power switch Document width guides 9 Document output tray ADF USB memory port Control panel 11 Toner cartridge Output support 12 Imaging unit Front cover 13 Waste toner container Front cover handle Scanner lid Tray 1 15 Scanner glass CO Oloilscc e Document input tray Scan unit 18 Introduction CONTROL PANEL OVERVIEW CEEECLELE TTETFETETEETTTEETEDA You can copy both sides of the ID Card like a ID Copy driver s license to a single side of paper See ID card copying on page 45 Allows you to directly print files stored on a USB Memory device when it is inserted into the USB operation Directe memory port on the front of your machine See About USB memory on page 60 Display Shows the current status and prompts during an Toner colors cartridge on page 20 The toner colors shown below the LCD display co works with the display messages See Status LED with the toner cartridge messages See Acknowledging the status of the toner Status Wireless Shows the status of your machine See Understanding the Status LED on page 20
395. twork you want to use in Search List and press OK You can select a network using SSID When WLAN Security None appears on the display press OK to save your selection go to step 6 If you see another messages go to the next step According to the network you select WLAN security encryption type will be WEP or WPA In case of WEP Press the left right arrow to selcet Open System or SharedKey Open System Authentication is not used and Encryption may or may not be used depending on the need for data security Enter the WEP Key using number keypad after selecting Open System SharedKey Authentication is used A device that has a proper WEP Key can access the network Enter the WEP Key using number keypad after selecting SharedKey In case of WPA Enter the WPA Key using number keypad The Key length should be between 8 to 63 characters long Press OK Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode J e SSID SSID Service Set Identifier is a name that identifies a wireless network Access points and wireless devices attempting to connect to a specific wireless network must use the same SSID The SSID is case sensitive WEP WEP Wired Equivalent Privacy is a security protocol preventing unauthorized access to your wireless network WEP encrypts the data portion of each packet exchanged on a wireless network using a 64 bit or 128 bit WEP encryption key WPA WPA authorizes and identifies users based on a secret key t
396. u can change the various properties for your machine as a printer 1 Open the Unified Driver Configurator If necessary switch to Printers configuration 2 Select your machine on the available printers list and click Properties 3 The Printer Properties window opens 3 Printer Properties General Connection Driver Jobs Classes Name Location Description HI ak god The following five tabs display at the top of the window General allows you to change the printer location and name The name entered in this tab displays on the printer list in Printers configuration Connection allows you to view or select another port If you change the printer port from USB to parallel or vice versa while in use you must re configure the printer port in this tab eDriver allows you to view or select another printer driver By clicking Options you can set the default device options Jobs shows the list of print jobs Click Cancel job to cancel the selected job and select the Show completed jobs check box to see previous jobs on the job list Classes shows the class that your printer is in Click Add to Class to add your printer to a specific class or click Remove from Class to remove the printer from the selected class 4 Click OK to apply the changes and close the Printer Properties Window Printing a Document Printing from Applications There a
397. u can use the onscreen help by clicking Help 3 After changing the configurations click Exit to close the Unified Driver Configurator Printers Configuration Printers configuration has the two tabs Printers and Classes Printers Tab You can see the current system s printer configuration by clicking on the printer icon button on the left side of the Unified Driver Configurator window 2 Unified Driver Configurator Printers contiguration amp nirs Gano e Petresn So Add Prinder ko Shows all of the bris Dnt installed printer po Switches to Printer configuration Shows the status model name and Loa en URI of your printer You can use the following printer control buttons e Refresh renews the available printers list Add Printer allows you to add a new printer e Remove Printer removes the selected printer e Set as Default sets the current printer as a default printer Stop Start stops starts the printer e Test allows you to print a test page to check if the machine is working properly e Properties allows you to view and change the printer properties For details see page 32 Using Your Printer in Linux 31 Classes Tab The Classes tab shows a list of available printer classes 3 Unified Driver Configurator Cm p Printers configuration E Printers Classes maa SB Add Class PT ke Shows all of the printer classes stop
398. u want to install from the list and then click Next e e If you do not see your machine on the list click Update to refresh the list or select Add TCP IP Port to add your machine to the network To add the machine to the network enter the port name and the IP address for the machine e To verify your machine s IP address or the MAC address print a Network Configuration Report page See Printing reports on page 63 5 After the installation is finished a window appears asking you to print a test page and to register yourself as a user of Samsung machines in order to receive information from Samsung If you wish to do so select the corresponding checkbox es and click Finish Z If your machine does not work properly after the installation verify your network settings and try reinstalling the printer driver USING A WIRELESS NETWORK WINDOWS CLX 3175FW ONLY You must set up the network protocols on your machine to use it on your network This chapter will show you how this is easily accomplished This section is applicable only for the Windows operating system Before starting please locate the USB cable and the Printer Software Installation CD ROM provided with your machine printer You may need to contact a network administrator or the person who has set up your wireless network for information regarding the configuration e You must understand your wireless network environment and know its setting before you proc
399. ult mode change 37 delayed fax 56 display language change 37 DRPD Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection 57 E Erasing background special copy 48 F fax header set 54 Fax mode receiving mode 57 fax number set 54 faxing default settings change 60 delayed faxes 56 fax setup 59 forwarding faxes 58 Multiple Send faxes 55 priority faxes 56 receiving faxes 57 sending faxes 55 forwarding faxes 58 G Group dial numbers set 60 l ID card special copy 47 ID copy 21 J jam tips for avoiding paper jams 74 jam clear document 74 K key sound 38 L LED Status 22 Linux problems 87 loading originals ADF 39 scanner glass 39 M machine ID set 54 Maintenance maintenance parts 73 toner cartridge 69 memory clear 66 Multiple Send faxes 55 N network setting up 27 O originals jam clear 74 loading 39 P paper changing the size 43 clearing jam 75 paper jam clear tray 175 paper type setting 45 power save mode 38 print quality problems solve 82 printing reports 65 USB memory 63 priority fax 56 Index_95 problem solve copying 84 faxing 86 Linux 87 Network Scan 85 paper feeding 81 printing quality 82 scanning 85 Windows 86 R receiving a fax in Ans Fax mode 57 in DRPD mode 57 in Fax mode 57 in Secure Receiving mode 58 in Tel mode 57 receiving modes 57 redialing automatically 55 manually 55 replacing components toner cartridge 70 reports
400. ultiple pages If you select JPEG in this option you cannot select Mono in Scan Color oO PON 6 Press the left right arrow until the desired status appears and press OK 7 Repeat steps 4 and 5 to set other setting options 8 When you have finished press Stop Clear to return to ready mode You can change the default scan settings For details see Changing the default scan settings on page 38 PRINTING FROM A USB MEMORY DEVICE You can directly print files stored on a USB memory device You can print TIFF BMP JPEG and PRN files Direct Print option supported file types e PRN Only files created by provided driver with your machine are compatible e PRN files can be created by selecting the Print to file check box when you print a document The document will be saved as a PRN file rather than printed on paper Only PRN files created in this fashion can be printed directly from USB memory See Software section to learn how to create a PRN file e BMP BMP Uncompressed TIFF TIFF 6 0 Baseline e JPEG JPEG Baseline A e If your USB memory device has certain features example security key security partition booting disk password settings and so forth do not use the USB memory device with your machine The files stored in the USB memory device may be corrupted or the machine may not automatically detect it For details about these features see device s User s Guide To print a document from a USB memo
401. until Fax Feature appears on the bottom line of the display and press OK Press the left right arrow until Delay Send appears and press OK Enter the number of the receiving machine using the number keypad You can press speed dial numbers or select Group Dial Number using Address Book Button For details see Setting up Address Book on page 58 Press OK to confirm the number The display asks you to enter another fax number to which to send the document To enter more fax numbers press OK when Yes appears and repeat steps 6 and 7 You can add up to 10 destinations Z Once you entered a group dial number you cannot enter another group dial numbers anymore When you have finished entering fax numbers press the left right arrow to select No at the Another No prompt and press OK Enter the job name you want and press OK For details on how to enter alphanumeric characters see Entering characters using the number keypad on page 36 If you do not want to assign a name skip this step Enter the time using the number keypad and press OK or Black Start If you set a time earlier than the current time the fax will be sent at that time on the following day The original is scanned into memory before transmission The display shows memory capacity and the number of pages being stored in memory If an original is placed on the scanner glass select Yes to add another page Load another original and press OK When you have finished
402. until System Setup appears and press OK 3 Press the left right arrow until Clear Setting appears and press OK 4 Press the left right arrow until the item you want to clear appears Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models If so it is not applicable to your machine OPTIONS DESCRIPTION All Settings Clears all of the data stored in memory and resets all of your settings to the factory default Copy Setup Restores all of the copy options to the factory default Scan Setup Restores all of the scan options to the factory default System Setup Restores all of the system options to the factory default Network Setup Restores all of the network options to the factory default Press OK when Yes appears Press OK again to confirm clearing Repeat steps 3 through 5 to clear another item Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode ONO Maintenance_ 44 CLEANING YOUR MACHINE To maintain print and scan quality follow the cleaning procedures below each time the toner cartridge is replaced or if print and scan quality problems occur A e Cleaning the cabinet of the machine with cleaning materials containing large amounts of alcohol solvent or other strong substances can discolor or distort the cabinet e If your machine or its surrounding is contaminated with toner we recommend you to use cloth or tissue dampened with water to clean it If you use a vacuum cleaner t
403. uper user root to uninstall the printer software If you are not a super user ask your system administrator 2 Click the iJ icon at the bottom of the desktop When the Terminal screen appears type in root localhost root cd opt Samsung mfp uninstall root localhost uninstall uninstall sh 3 Click Uninstall 4 Click Next S Uninstallation of Unified Linux Driver You are about to uninstall the Unified Linux Driver Press Next to proceed with uninstalling the driver Press Cancel to leave the driver intact Next gt Cancel 5 Click Finish Using Seti P program This program is for the network IP setting using the MAC address which is the hardware serial number of the network printer card or interface Especially it is for the network administrator to set several network IPs at the same time You can only use Setl P program when your machine is connected to a network SetI P program should be automatically installed during the printer driver installation Starting the program 1 Print the machine s network information report which includes your machine s MAC address Open the opt Samsung mfp share utils Double click the Seti PApplet html file Click Kk in the SetlP window to open the TCP IP configuration window Enter the network card s MAC address IP address subnet mask default gateway and then click Apply ul A WN NOTE when you enter the MAC address enter it
404. upport for using the machine To access SyncThru Web Service 1 Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer from Windows 2 Enter the machine IP address http xxx xxx xxx xxx in the address field and press the Enter key or click Go Your machine s embedded website opens CHECKING THE MACHINE S SERIAL NUMBER When you call for service or register as a user on the Samsung website the machine s serial number may be required You can check the serial number by taking the following steps 1 Press Menu and then OK Press the left right arrow until System Setup appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until Maintenance appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until Serial Number appears and press OK Check your machine s serial number Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode oa PWN troubleshooting This chapter gives helpful information for what to do if you encounter an error This chapter includes e Tips for avoiding paper jams e Clearing paper jams TIPS FOR AVOIDING PAPER JAMS By selecting the correct media types most paper jams can be avoided When a paper jam occurs follow the steps outlined on page 52 e Follow the procedures on page 32 Ensure that the adjustable guides are positioned correctly e Donot overload the tray Ensure that the paper level is below the paper capacity mark on the inside of the tray Do not remove paper from the tray while your machine is printi
405. ur machine and connected it to your computer you must install the printer software If you are a Windows or Macintosh OS install the software from the supplied CD and if you are a Linux OS user download the software from the Samsung website www samsung com printer and install Os CONTENTS Windows e Printer driver Use this driver to take full advantage of your printer s features Scanner driver TWAIN and Windows Image Acquisition WIA drivers are available for scanning documents on your machine Smart Panel This program allows you to monitor the machine s status and alerts you when an error occurs during printing e SmarThru This is the accompanying Windows based software for your multifunctional machine SetIP Use this program to set your machine s TCP IP addresses Linux e Printer driver Use this driver to run your machine from a Linux computer and print documents e SANE Use this driver to scan documents e Smart Panel This program allows you to monitor the machine s status and alerts you when an error occurs during printing SetIP Use this program to set your machine s TCP IP addresses Macintosh e Printer driver Use this driver to take full advantage of your printer s features Scanner driver TWAIN driver is available for scanning documents on your machine Smart Panel This program allows you to monitor the machine s status and alerts you when an error occurs durin
406. ure may not be supported depending on machines ITEM DESCRIPTION Compatibility ITU T G3 Applicable line Public Switched Telephone Network PSTN or behind PABX Data coding MH MR MMR JBIG JPEG Modem speed 33 6 Kbps Transmission speed Up to 3 seconds page Maximum document length 356 mm 14 inches Resolution Mono Standard 203 x 98 dpi Fine 203 x 196 dpi Super Fine 300 x 300 dpi Color 200 x 200 dpi only Memory 2MB Halftone 256 levels Auto dialer Speed dialing up to 240 numbers a Standard resolution MMR JBIG Maximum modem speed Phase C by ITU T No 1 chart Memory Tx ECM b Transmission resolution in Super fine is different depending on kinds of recievers machine 90 Specifications glossary 4 The following glossary helps you get familiar with the product by understanding the terminologies commonly used with printing as well as mentioned in this user s guide ADF An Automatic Document Feeder ADF is a mechanism that will automatically feed an original sheet of paper so that the machine can scan some amount of the paper at once AppleTalk AppleTalk is a proprietary suite of protocols developed by Apple Inc for computer networking It was included in the original Macintosh 1984 and is now deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP IP networking BIT Depth A computer graphics term describing the number of bits used to represent the
407. uteris network configuration information If the wireless computer is set to DHCP you must contact the network administrator to get the static IP address Example If computer s network information is as below IP address 169 254 133 42 Subnet Mask 255 255 0 0 Printer s network information should be as below IP address 169 254 133 43 Use computer s IP address with changed last three digits Subnet Mask 255 255 0 0 Use the computer s subnet mask Gateway 169 254 133 1 Change the last three digits from IP address of your printer to 1 The wireless network is connecting according to the network configuration When the wireless network setting is completed disconnect the USB cable between the computer and machine Select the components to be installed After selecting the components you can also change the printer name set the printer to be shared on the network set the printer as the default printer and change the port name of each printer Click Next After the installation is finished a window appears asking you to print a test page and to register yourself as a user of Samsung Printers in order to receive information from Samsung If you desire select the corresponding checkbox es and click Finish Installing the printer on a wireless network with an Access Point Preparing items Ensure you have next items ready Access point Networked computer Printer Software CD ROM that provided with your machine
408. velopes labels and transparencies which can be used on a printer a scanner a fax or a copier PPM Pages Per Minute PPM is a method of measurement for determining how fast a printer works meaning the number of pages a printer can produce in one minute PRN file An interface for a device driver this allows software to interact with the device driver using standard input output system calls which simplifies many tasks Protocol A convention or standard that controls or enables the connection communication and data transfer between two computing endpoints PS See PostScript PSTN The Public Switched Telephone Network PSTN is the network of the world s public circuit switched telephone networks which on industrial premises is usually routed through the switchboard Resolution The sharpness of an image measured in Dots Per Inch DPI The higher the dpi the greater the resolution SMB Server Message Block SMB is a network protocol mainly applied to share files printers serial ports and miscellaneous communications between nodes on a network It also provides an authenticated Inter process communication mechanism SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP is the standard for e mail transmissions across the Internet SMTP is a relatively simple text based protocol where one or more recipients of a message are specified and then the message text is transferred It is a client server protocol where t
409. ver locks port while printing the abrupt termination of the driver keeps the port locked and therefore unavailable for subsequent print jobs If this situation occurred try to release the port Some color images come out all black This is a known bug in Ghostscript until GNU Ghostscript version 7 05 when the base color space of the document is indexed color space and it is converted through CIE color space Because Postscript uses CIE color space for Color Matching System you should upgrade Ghostscript on your system to at least GNU Ghostscript version 7 06 or later You can find recent Ghostscript versions at www ghostscript com Troubleshooting_ 85 CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS The machine does not appear on the scanners list Check if your machine is attached to your computer Make sure that it is connected properly via the USB port and is turned on Check if the scanner driver for your machine is installed in your system Open Unified Driver configurator switch to Scanners configuration then press Drivers Make sure that driver with a name corresponding to your machine s name is listed in the window Check if the port is not busy Since functional components of MFP printer and scanner share the same O interface port the situation of simultaneous access of different consumer application to the same port is possible To avoid possible conflicts only one of them at a time is all
410. w you to customize your scan jobs e Scan Size Sets the image size Original Type Sets the original document s type Resolution Sets the image resolution e Scan Color Sets the color mode Scan Format Sets the file format in which the image is to be saved If you select TIFF or PDF you can select to scan multiple pages Depending on the selected scan type this option may not appear To customize the settings before starting a scan job Press Menu Press the left right arrow until Scan Menu appears and press OK Press OK when Scan Feature appears Press OK when USB Feature appears Press the left right arrow until the scan setting option you want appears and press OK oP ON gt NG Repeat steps 5 and 6 to set other setting options When you have finished press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Press the left right arrow until the desired status appears and press OK CHANGING THE DEFAULT SCAN SETTINGS To avoid having to customize the scan settings for each job you can set up default scan settings 1 Press Menu Press the left right arrow until Scan Menu appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until Scan Setup appears and press OK Press OK when Change Default appears Press OK when USB Default appears Press the left right arrow until the scan setting option you want appears and press OK Press the left right arrow until the desired status appears and press OK Repeat steps 6 and 7
411. want to scan via the DADF use TWAIN comliant softwares e You can also scan using TWAIN compliant softwares such as Adobe Photoshop e Scan process differ according to TWAIN compliant softwares Please refer to the user s guide of the software e If scanning does not operate in I mage Capture update Mac OS to the latest version Image Capture operates propery in Mac OS X 10 3 9 or higher and Mac OS X 10 4 7 or higher Scanning with network 1 Make sure that your machine and computer are turned on 2 Place a single document face down on the document glass OR load the document s face up into the ADF or DADF 3 Start Applications and click Image Capture 4 Click Devices and click Browse Devices 5 For MAC OS X 10 4 select your machine in Twain devices option Make sure that Use TWAIN software checkbox is checked and click Connect 42 For MAC OS X 10 5 10 6 Make sure that Connected checkbox is checked beside your machine in Bonjour Devices If you want to scan using TWAIN refer to the MAC OS X 10 4 procedure above 6 Set the scan options on this program 7 Scan and save your scanned image NOTE For more information about using Image Capture please refer to the Image Capture s help e If you want to scan via the DADF use TWAIN comliant softwares e You can also scan using TWAIN compliant softwares such as Adobe Photoshop e Scan process differ according to TWAIN compliant softwares Pleas
412. when Resolution appears 4 Press the left right arrow until the option you want appears and press OK 5 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Recommended resolution settings for different original document types are described in the table below MODE RECOMMENDED FOR Standard Originals with normal sized characters Fine Originals containing small characters or thin lines or originals printed using a dot matrix printer Superfine Originals containing extremely fine detail Super Fine mode is enabled only if the machine with which you are communicating also supports the Super Fine resolution T For memory transmission Superfine 4 mode is not available The resolution setting is automatically changed to Fine e When your machine is set to Superfine resolution and the fax machine with which you are communicating does not support Superfine resolution the machine transmits using the highest resolution mode supported by the other fax machine Photo Fax Originals containing shades of gray or photographs 64 The resolution setting is applied to the current fax job To change the default setting see Changing the default document settings on page 58 Darkness You can select the default contrast mode to fax your originals lighter or darker 1 Press Fax 2 Press Menu and then OK when Fax Feature appears on the bottom line of the display 3 Press OK when Darkness appears 4 Press the left ri
413. which enables the scan job CCD Locking mechanism is also used to hold the CCD module to prevent any damage when you move the machine Collation Collation is a process of printing a multiple copy job in sets When collation is selected the device prints an entire set before printing additional copies Control Panel A control panel is a flat typically vertical area where control or monitoring instruments are displayed They are typically found in front of the machine Coverage It is the printing term used for a toner usage measurement on printing For example 5 coverage means that an A4 sided paper has about 5 image or text on it So if the paper or original has complicated images or lots of text on it the coverage will be higher and at the same time a toner usage will be as much as the coverage CSV Comma Separated Values CSV A type of file format CSV is used to exchange data between disparate applications The file format as it is used in Microsoft Excel has become a pseudo standard throughout the industry even among non Microsoft platforms DADF A Duplex Automatic Document Feeder DADF is a mechanism that will automatically feed and flip over an original sheet of paper so that the machine can scan on both sides of the paper Default The value or setting that is in effect when taking a printer out of its box state reset or initialized DHCP A Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP is a client se
414. while starting scan procedure and appropriate message box appears To identify the source of the problem you should open ports configuration and select the port assigned to your scanner port s symbol dev mfp0 corresponds to LP 0 designation displayed in the scanners options dev mfp1 relates to LP 1 and so on USB ports start at dev mfp4 so scanner on USB 0 relates to dev mfp4 respectively and so forth sequentially In the Selected port pane you can see if the port is occupied by some other application If this is the case you should wait for completion of the current job or should press Release port button if you are sure that the present port s owner is not functioning properly 63 _ Troubleshooting CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS The machine does not scan Check if a document is loaded into the machine Check if your machine is connected to the computer Make sure if it is connected properly if 1 O error is reported while scanning Check if the port is not busy Since functional components of MFP printer and scanner share the same I O interface port the situation of simultaneous access of different consumer application to the same port is possible To avoid possible conflicts only one of them at a time is allowed to gain control over the device The other consumer will encounter device busy response This can usually happen while starting scan procedure and appropriat
415. with an efficient way of managing network devices and lets you remotely monitor and troubleshoot network machines from any site with corporate internet access Download this program from http e SyncThru Web Service Web server embedded on your network print server which allows you to Configure the network parameters necessary for the machine to connect to various network environments Customize machine settings SetIP Utility program allowing you to select a network interface and manually configure the IP addresses for use with the TCP IP protocol See Using the SetIP program on page 25 Using the SetIP program This program is for the network IP setting using the MAC address which is the hardware serial number of the network printer card or interface Especially it helps the network administrator set several network IPs at the same time L e You can only use SetIP program when your machine is connected to a network e The following procedure is based on windows XP If you use Macintosh or Linux OS see Software section Installing the program 1 Insert the driver CD provided along with your machine When the driver CD runs automatically close the window 2 Start Windows Explorer and open the X drive X represents your CD ROM drive Double click Application gt SetIP Double click Setup exe to install this program 5 Click OK If necessary select a language from the drop down list 6 Follow the in
416. without colon 6 The machine prints the network information Confirm all the settings are correct 7 Close the SetIP program Using Your Printer in Linux 30 Using the Unified Driver Configurator Unified Linux Driver Configurator is a tool primarily intended for configuring Printer or MFP devices Since an MFP device combines the printer and scanner the Unified Linux Driver Configurator provides options logically grouped for printer and scanner functions There is also a special MFP port option responsible for the regulation of access to an MFP printer and scanner via a single I O channel After installing the Unified Linux driver the Unified Linux Driver Configurator icon will automatically be created on your desktop Opening the Unified Driver Configurator 1 Double click Unified Driver Configurator on the desktop You can also click the Startup Menu icon and select Samsung Unified Driver and then Unified Driver Configurator 2 Press each button on the Modules pane to switch to the corresponding configuration window aucrioNcs Ea Printers configuration Printers Configuration button E Printers cesses Refresh Scanners Configuration button S Jea Part x Remove Printer Ports Configuration button NG Setas Defaut Stop Test Properties About Help r Selected printer Local printer idle Model URI am Yo
417. y 20 to 80 RH Display 16 characters x 2 lines Toner Black Average continuous black cartridge cartridge life yield 1 500 standard pages Shipped with 1 000 pages Starter toner cartridge Color Average continuous colored cartridge Yellow yield 1 000 standard pages Magenta Shipped with 700 pages Starter toner Cyan cartridge Imaging unit Approx 24 000 images yield 88 Specifications d May be affected by operating environment optional printing interval media type and media size PRINTER SPECIFICATIONS SCANNER SPECIFICATIONS ITEM DESCRIPTION Printing method Color laser beam printing Printing speed e Black amp White Up to 16 ppm A4 17 ppm Letter e Color Up to 4 ppm A4 4 ppm Letter First print out time Black amp From ready Less than 14 seconds White e From coldboot Less than 45 seconds Color From ready Less than 26 seconds From coldboot Less than 57 seconds Print resolution Max 2 400 x 600 dpi class Printer language SPL C OS compatibility Windows 2000 XP 2003 2008 Vista 7 Server 2008 R2 e Linux Red Hat 8 0 9 0 Mandrake 9 2 10 1 SuSE 8 2 9 2 Fedora Core 1 4 e Macintosh Mac OS X 10 3 10 6 Universal Mac Interface e High speed USB 2 0 e Ethernet 10 100 Base TX embedded type e 802 11 b g Wireless LAN CLX 3175FW only a lt will be affected by operating system us
418. ying Your machine can print an image onto 9 sheets of paper 3x3 You can paste the printed pages together to make one poster sized document This copy feature is available only when you place originals on the scanner glass 1 Press Menu 2 Press OK when Copy Menu appears X 3 Press OK when Copy Feature appears 4 Press the left right arrow until Layout appears and o press OK Press the left right arrow until Poster Copy appears o and press OK 6 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Your original is divided into 9 portions Each portion is scanned and printed one by one in the following order Ee Clone copying Your machine can print multiple image copies from the original document on a single page The number of images is automatically determined by the original image and paper size This copy feature is available only when you place originals on the scanner glass 1 Press Menu 2 Press OK when Copy Menu appears 6 3 Press OK when Copy Feature appears y 4 Press the left right arrow until Layout appears and L press OK O 5 Press the left right arrow until Clone Copy appears th rhe and press OK sad 6 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Z You cannot adjust the copy size using the Reduce Enlarge menu while making a clone copy Erasing background images You can set the machine to print an image without its background Thi
419. you have set and reset it if necessary is being used by See Setting up the someone else network on page 25 Line Busy The receiving fax Try again after a few machine did not answer or the line is already engaged minutes Data Read Fail Check USB Mem Time expired while reading data Try again Data Write Fail Check USB Mem Storing to the USB memory failed Check the available USB memory space Line Error Your machine cannot connect with the receiving fax machine or has lost contact because of a problem with the phone line Try again If the problem persists wait an hour or so for the line to clear and try again Or turn the ECM mode on See Sending options on page 57 Deve Home Sensor Error There is a problem in the fuser unit Turn the power switch off and on If the problem persists call for service Low Heat Error Cycle Power There is a problem in the fuser unit Turn the power switch off and on If the problem persists call for service Document Jam The loaded original has jammed in the ADF Clear the jam See Clearing document jams on page 72 LSU Motor Error Cycle Power A problem has occurred in the LSU Laser Scanning Unit Turn the power switch off and on If the problem persists call for service LSU Hsync Error Cycle Power A problem has occurred in the LSU Laser Scanning Unit Turn the power
420. your Mac OS to OS 10 3 3 or higher Some letters are not displayed normally during the Cover page printing This problem is caused because Mac OS cannot create the font during the Cover page printing English alphabet and numbers are displayed normally at the Cover page Z Refer to Mac OS User s Guide that came with your computer for further information on Mac OS error messages ordering supplies This chapter provides information on purchasing cartridges and accessories available for your machine This chapter includes Supplies Z The optional parts or features may differ by countries Contact your sales representatives whether the part you want is available in your country SUPPLIES When the toner runs out you can order the following type of toner cartridge for your machine TYPE AVERAGE YIELD PART NUMBER Standard yield toner cartridge Average continuous black cartridge yield 1 500 standard pages Black Average continuous colored cartridge yield 1 000 standard pages Yellow Magenta Cyan CLT K409S Black CLT C409S Cyan CLT M409S Magenta CLT Y409S Yellow Region A CLT K4092S Black CLT C4092S Cyan CLT M4092S Magenta CLT Y4092S Yellow Imaging unit Approx 24 000 images CLT R409 Waste toner container Approx 10 000 images Full color 5 image CLT W409 a Declared yield value in accordance with ISO IEC 19798
421. ystem you should upgrade Ghostscript on your system to at least GNU Ghostscript version 8 xx or later You can find recent Ghostscript versions at www ghostscript com The machine does not print whole pages and its output is half page printed It is a known problem that occurs when a color printer is used on version 8 51 or earlier of Ghostscript 64 bit Linux OS and reported to bugs ghostscript com as Ghostscript Bug 688252 The problem is solved in AFPL Ghostscript v 8 52 or above Download the latest version of AFPL Ghostscript from http sourceforge net projects ghostscript and install it to solve this problem cannot scan via Gimp Front end e Check if Gimp Front end has Xsane Device dialog on the Acquire menu If not you should install Xsane plug in for Gimp on the your computer You can find Xsane plug in package for Gimp on Linux distribution CD or Gimp home page For the detail information refer to the Help for Linux distribution CD or Gimp Front end application If you wish to use other kind of scan application refer to the Help for application encounter error Cannot open port device file when printing a document Avoid changing print job parameters via LPR GUI for example while a print job is in progress Known versions of CUPS server break the print job whenever print options are changed and then try to restart the job from the beginning Since Unified Linux Dri
422. yte When you have finished press OK 8 Repeat steps 6 and 7 to configure the other TCP IP parameters subnet mask and gateway address IP setting using the Set P program The following procedure is based on Windows XP This program is for manually setting the network IP address of your machine using its MAC address to communicate with the machine MAC address is a hardware serial number of the network interface and can be found in the Network Configuration Report RPN NG e e You only need to run this program if your network requires a static IP address Otherwise you may proceed to the Configuring the machine s wireless network part of this document If you are unsure of this requirement ask the system administrator or the person who has set up your local network e You can only use the Set P program when your machine is connected to a network or directly connected to a PC with the crossover network cable included with your machine In most cases we recommend using the crossover cable You will be asked to connect this cable in a moment Installing the program 1 Insert the Printer Software CD ROM provided with your machine When the driver CD runs automatically close that window Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer and open the X drive X represents your CD ROM drive Double click Application gt SetIP Double click Setup exe to install this program Click OK If necessary select a language from the drop

Samsung CLX-3175FW

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents